Algebra 1 EHS 2014-2015, No Stats

Algebra 1 - Essex High School
Lea Ann Smith

Andrew Gloag, (AndrewG)
Anne Gloag, (AnneG)
Say Thanks to the Authors
Click http://www.ck12.org/saythanks
(No sign in required)
www.ck12.org
To access a customizable version of this book, as well as other
interactive content, visit www.ck12.org
CK-12 Foundation is a non-prot organization with a mission to
reduce the cost of textbook materials for the K-12 market both
in the U.S. and worldwide. Using an open-content, web-based
collaborative model termed the FlexBook, CK-12 intends to
pioneer the generation and distribution of high-quality educational
content that will serve both as core text as well as provide an
adaptive environment for learning, powered through the FlexBook
Platform.
Copyright 2014 CK-12 Foundation, www.ck12.org
The names CK-12 and CK12 and associated logos and the
terms FlexBook and FlexBook Platform (collectively
CK-12 Marks) are trademarks and service marks of CK-12
Foundation and are protected by federal, state, and international
laws.
Any form of reproduction of this book in any format or medium,
in whole or in sections must include the referral attribution link
http://www.ck12.org/saythanks (placed in a visible location) in
addition to the following terms.
Except as otherwise noted, all CK-12 Content (including CK-12
Curriculum Material) is made available to Users in accordance
with the Creative Commons Attribution-Non-Commercial 3.0
Unported (CC BY-NC 3.0) License (http://creativecommons.org/
licenses/by-nc/3.0/), as amended and updated by Creative Com-
mons from time to time (the CC License), which is incorporated
herein by this reference.
Complete terms can be found at http://www.ck12.org/terms.
Printed: August 25, 2014
AUTHORS
Lea Ann Smith
Andrew Gloag, (AndrewG)
Anne Gloag, (AnneG)
iii
Contents www.ck12.org
Contents
1 Unit 1 - Review 1
1.1 Variables and Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 Order of Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.3 Introductory Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.4 Introductory Inequalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.5 Properties of Real Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.6 Solving Equations Using One Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.7 Solving Equations using Two or More Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.8 Equations with Variables on Both Sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.9 Word Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1.10 Solving Equations for a Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.11 Ratios, Rates and Proportions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
1.12 Percent Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
1.13 Multi-Step Inequalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
1.14 Absolute Value Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
1.15 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
2 Unit 2 - Linear Functions 61
2.1 Introduction to Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.2 Finding the Domain and Range of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.3 Creating Equations from Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
2.4 Graphing using Table of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.5 Graphing Using Intercepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
2.6 Slope and Rate of Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
2.7 Graphs Using Slope-Intercept Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
2.8 Writing Equations of Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
2.9 Parallel and Perpendicular Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
2.10 Graphing Linear Inequalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
2.11 Graphs of Absolute Value Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
2.12 Fitting a Line to Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
2.13 Problem Solving with Linear Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
3 Unit 3 - Systems of Linear Equations 139
3.1 Solving Linear Systems by Graphing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
3.2 Solving Linear Systems by Substitution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
3.3 Solving Linear Systems by Combination (Elimination) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
3.4 Special Types of Linear Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
3.5 Applications of Linear Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
3.6 Systems of Linear Inequalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
4 Unit 4 - Polynomials, Exponents and Radicals 176
4.1 Addition and Subtraction of Polynomials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
iv
www.ck12.org Contents
4.2 Exponent Properties Involving Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
4.3 Multiplication of Polynomials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
4.4 Special Products of Polynomials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
4.5 Exponent Properties Involving Quotients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
4.6 Zero and Negative Exponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
4.7 Division of Polynomials by Monomials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
4.8 Division of Polynomials by Polynomials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
4.9 Scientic Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
4.10 Square Roots and Irrational Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
4.11 Pythagorean Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
4.12 Multiplication and Division of Radicals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
4.13 Addition and Subtraction of Radicals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
5 Unit 5 - Quadratic Functions 232
5.1 Monomial Factors of Polynomials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
5.2 Factoring Quadratic Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
5.3 Factoring Polynomials where a does not equal 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
5.4 Factoring the Difference of Two Squares (DOTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
5.5 Solve Quadratic Equations by Factoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
5.6 Solve Quadratic Equations by Square Roots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
5.7 Solve Quadratic Equations by Completing the Square . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
5.8 Solving Quadratic Equations by the Quadratic Formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
5.9 Graphs of Quadratic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
5.10 Vertex Form of a Quadratic Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
5.11 Applications of Quadratic Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
6 Unit 6 - Exponential Functions, Sequences and Modeling 288
6.1 Exponential Growth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
6.2 Exponential Decay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
6.3 Arithmetic Sequences and Linear Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
6.4 Geometric Sequences and Exponential Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
6.5 Describing the Pattern and Writing a Recursive Rule for a Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
6.6 Linear, Exponential, and Quadratic Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
6.7 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
7 Appendix A - One Variable Statistics 333
7.1 Dot Plots, Frequency Tables, Histograms and Bar Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
7.2 Measures of Central Tendency (Mean, Median and Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
7.3 Box and Whisker Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
7.4 Shape, Center and Spread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
v
www.ck12.org Chapter 1. Unit 1 - Review
CHAPTER
1
Unit 1 - Review
Chapter Outline
1.1 VARIABLES AND EXPRESSIONS
1.2 ORDER OF OPERATIONS
1.3 INTRODUCTORY EQUATIONS
1.4 INTRODUCTORY INEQUALITIES
1.5 PROPERTIES OF REAL NUMBERS
1.6 SOLVING EQUATIONS USING ONE STEP
1.7 SOLVING EQUATIONS USING TWO OR MORE STEPS
1.8 EQUATIONS WITH VARIABLES ON BOTH SIDES
1.9 WORD PROBLEMS
1.10 SOLVING EQUATIONS FOR A VARIABLE
1.11 RATIOS, RATES AND PROPORTIONS
1.12 PERCENT PROBLEMS
1.13 MULTI-STEP INEQUALITIES
1.14 ABSOLUTE VALUE EQUATIONS
1.15 REFERENCES
1
1.1. Variables and Expressions www.ck12.org
1.1
Variables andExpressions
What You Will Learn
Evaluate single-variable expressions with given values for the variable.
Evaluate multi-variable expressions with given values for the variables.
Evaluate Single-Variable Expressions with Given Values for the Variable
An algebraic expression is a mathematical phrase involving letters, numbers, and operation symbols.
A variable can be any letter, such as x, m, R, y, P, a, and others, that we use in an expression.
The variable represents possible values of a quantity.
Take a look at the following examples of variable expressions.
3x +10
10r
b
3
+2
mx 3
Variable expressions are used to describe real-world situations when we dont know a value or a quantity. Sometimes
a value is dependent on a changing variable, for example, the total height of a stack of paper depends on the thickness
of each piece of paper.
When we work with a variable expression, we can say that we evaluate the expression. To evaluate means to
nd the value of. We nd the value of an expression.
Why dont we solve expressions?
To solve something in math means that it has to equal a value. An expression does not have an equal sign, therefore
we cant solve it. Also, a variable in an expression can have several different values. Whereas in an equation, the
variable has one value that makes the equation true.
Example
Evaluate the expression 10k 44 if k = 12.
Remember that a number next to a letter means to multiply.
First, we substitute the 12 for the letter k.
10(12) 44
Now we multiply 10 and 12, then we subtract 44.
12044
76
Our answer is 76.
Sometimes, you will also have an expression to evaluate that uses division.
2
Example
Evaluate the expression
x
3
+2 if x is 24
First, we substitute the 24 for x.
24
3
+2
Next, we divide twenty-four by three.
243 = 8
Now we add 2.
8+2 = 10
Our answer is 10.
Practice Exercises
Now it is your turn. Evaluate the following single-variable expressions.
a. 4x 9 if x is 20
b. 5y +6 if y is 9
c.
a
4
8 if a is 36
Evaluate Multi-Variable Expressions with Given Values for the Variables
Algebraic expressions can have more than one variable. Look at the following examples of multi-variable expres-
sions.
xy +4x
mx +b
25r +(x 7)
When we know the value of the variables, we can evaluate multi-variable expressions the same way we evaluated
single-variable expressions, by substituting the value for the variables in the expression and solving from left to
right.
Example
Evaluate xy +x if x = 2 and y = 4.
In this case we are only given one possible value for x and y. We know that x = 2 and y = 4, we can evaluate the
expression using the given values.
First, we can rewrite the expression by substituting the given values into the expression.
xy +x
(2)(4) +2
We used the parentheses here to show multiplication. When two variables are next to each other it means
multiplication. Here we used the parentheses because we needed to show multiplication between 2 and 4.
Now we can multiply rst.
24 = 8
Next, we add two.
8+2 = 10
3
1.1. Variables and Expressions www.ck12.org
Our answer is 10.
Lets look at another example where a given value is a fraction.
Example 4
Evaluate mx +3m if x =
2
3
and m = 9.
First, we substitute the given values into the expression.
9
_
2
3
_
+3(9)
Do you remember how to multiply a whole number and a fraction?
To multiply a whole number and a fraction you must rst make the whole number a fraction by placing the number
over one.
9 becomes
9
1
Now you multiply numerator numerator and denominator denominator.
9
1
2
3
Next, we multiply the two fractions and simplify.
18
3
= 6
Now we can substitute the 6 back into the expression.
6+3(9)
Next we multiply.
3(9) = 27
Finally, we add the numbers.
6+27
33
Our answer is 33.
Practice Exercises
Evaluate the following expressions using the given values.
a. ab+7 when a is 9 and b is 8
b. xy +zx when x is 2, y is 5 and z is 7
c. xy +x when x is 4, and y is
1
2
Video Overview
MEDIA
Click image to the left for use the URL below.
URL: http://www.ck12.org/x/render/embeddedobject/70317
Homework
Directions: Evaluate each expression if the given value of r = 9.
4
1.
r
3
2. 63r
3. 11r
4. 2r +7
5. 3r +r
6. 4r 2r
7. r +5r
8. 12r 1
Directions: Evaluate each expression when h =12.
9. 703h
10. 6h+6
11. 4h9
12. 11+
h
4
13. 3h+h
14. 2h+5h
15. 6h2h
Directions: Evaluate each multi-variable expression.
16. Evaluate xy +9y if x = 3 and y =
1
3
17. Evaluate 2x +3y if x =
2
5
and y =
1
4
18. Evaluate 4y +3y 2z if y = 2 and z =4
19. Evaluate 6z 2(z +x) if x is 3 and z is 4
20. Evaluate 8a+3b2c if a is 5, b is 4 and c is 3
Here are the vocabulary words that are found in this lesson.
Algebraic Expression
an expression that contains numbers, variables and operations.
Variable
a letter used to represent an unknown quantity.
Variable Expression
an algebraic expression that contains one or more variables.
5
1.2. Order of Operations www.ck12.org
1.2
Order of Operations
What You Will Learn
The correct order of operations and how to use them
How to use a calculator to evaluate multistep expressions
Math operations have to be done in a specic order so that the answer to an expression always comes out the same. A
saying that can help you remember the Order of Operations is PEMDAS - Please Excuse My Dear Aunt Sally.
The Order of Operations:
Whatever is found inside PARENTHESES must be done rst. EXPONENTS are to be simplied next. MULTI-
PLICATION and DIVISION are equally important and must be performed moving left to right. ADDITION and
SUBTRACTION are also equally important and must be performed moving left to right.
Example 1: Use the Order of Operations to simplify (72) 423
Solution: First, we check for parentheses. Yes, there they are and must be done rst.
(72) 423 = (5) 423
Next we look for exponents (little numbers written a little above the others). No, there are no exponents so we skip
to the next math verb.
Multiplication and division are equally important and must be done from left to right.
5423 = 2023
2023 = 103
Finally, addition and subtraction are equally important and must be done from left to right.
103 = 7 This is our answer.
Example 2: Use the Order of Operations to simplify the following expressions.
a) 3572
b) 3(57) 2
c) (35) (72)
Solutions:
a) There are no parentheses and no exponents. Go directly to multiplication and division from left to right: 35
72 = 1572 = 153.5
Now subtract: 153.5 = 11.5
b) Parentheses must be done rst: 3(2) 2
6
There are no exponents, so multiplication and division come next and are done left to right: 3(2)2 =62 =
3
c) Parentheses must be done rst: (35) (72) = 153.5
There are no exponents, multiplication, division, or addition, so simplify:
153.5 = 11.5
Parentheses are used two ways. The rst is to alter the Order of Operations in a given expression, such as example
(b). The second way is to clarify an expression, making it easier to understand.
Some expressions contain no parentheses while others contain several sets of parentheses. Some expressions even
have parentheses inside parentheses! When faced with nested parentheses, start at the innermost parentheses and
work outward.
Example 3: Use the Order of Operations to simplify 8[19(2+5) 7]
Solution: Begin with the innermost parentheses:
8[19(2+5) 7] = 8[1977]
Simplify according to the Order of Operations:
8[1977] = 8[5] = 3
Evaluating Algebraic Expressions with Fraction Bars
Fraction bars count as grouping symbols for PEMDAS, and should be treated as a set of parentheses. All numerators
and all denominators can be treated as if they have invisible parentheses. When real parentheses are also present,
remember that the innermost grouping symbols should be evaluated rst. If, for example, parentheses appear on a
numerator, they would take precedence over the fraction bar. If the parentheses appear outside of the fraction, then
the fraction bar takes precedence.
Example 4: Use the Order of Operations to simplify the following expressions.
a)
z+3
4
1 when z = 2
b)
_
a+2
b+4
1
_
+b when a = 3 and b = 1
c) 2
_
w+(x2z)
(y+2)
2
1
_
when w = 11, x = 3, y = 1 and z =2
Solutions: Begin each expression by substituting the appropriate value for the variable:
a)
(2+3)
4
1 =
5
4
1. Rewriting 1 as a fraction, the expression becomes:
5
4
4
4
=
1
4
b)
(3+2)
(1+4)
=
5
5
= 1
(11) +b Substituting 1 for b, the expression becomes 0+1 = 1
c) 2
_
[11+(32(2))]
[(1+2)
2
)]
1
_
= 2
_
(11+7)
3
2
1
_
= 2
_
18
9
1
_
Continue simplifying: 2
_
18
9

9
9
_
= 2
_
9
9
_
= 2(1) = 2
7
Using a Calculator to Evaluate Algebraic Expressions
A calculator, especially a graphing calculator, is a very useful tool in evaluating algebraic expressions. The graphing
calculator follows the Order of Operations, PEMDAS. In this section, we will explain two ways of evaluating
expressions with the graphing calculator.
Method #1: This method is the direct input method. After substituting all values for the variables, you type in the
expression, symbol for symbol, into your calculator.
Evaluate [3(x
2
1)
2
x
4
+12] +5x
3
1 when x =3.
Substitute the value x =3 into the expression.
[3((3)
2
1)
2
(3)
4
+12] +5(3)
3
1
The potential error here is that you may forget a sign or a set of parentheses, especially if the expression is long or
complicated. Make sure you check your input before writing your answer. An alternative is to type the expression
in by appropriate chunks do one set of parentheses, then another, and so on.
Method #2: This method uses the STORE function of the Texas Instrument graphing calculators, such as the TI-83,
TI-84, or TI-84 Plus.
First, store the value x = 3 in the calculator. Type -3 [STO] x. ( The letter x can be entered using the x- [VAR]
button or [ALPHA] + [STO]). Then type in the expression in the calculator and press [ENTER].
The answer is 13.
Note: On graphing calculators there is a difference between the minus sign and the negative sign. When we stored
the value negative three, we needed to use the negative sign, which is to the left of the [ENTER] button on the
calculator. On the other hand, to perform the subtraction operation in the expression we used the minus sign. The
minus sign is right above the plus sign on the right.
You can also use a graphing calculator to evaluate expressions with more than one variable.
Evaluate the expression:
3x
2
4y
2
+x
4
(x+y)
1
2
for x =2, y = 1.
8
Store the values of x and y. 2 [STO] x, 1 [STO] y. The letters x and y can be entered using [ALPHA] + [KEY].
Input the expression in the calculator. When an expression shows the division of two expressions be sure to use
parentheses: (numerator) (denominator). Press [ENTER] to obtain the answer .8
8 or
8
9
.
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
Use the Order of Operations to simplify the following expressions.
1. 8(19(2+5) 7)
2. 2+711123
3. (3+7) (712)
4.
2(3+(21))
4(6+2)
(35)
5. 8 5+6
2
6. 9372
3
+7
7. 8+126+6
8. (7
2
3
2
) 8
Evaluate the following expressions involving variables.
9.
jk
j+k
when j = 6 and k = 12.
10. 2y
2
when x = 1 and y = 5
11. 3x
2
+2x +1 when x = 5
12. (y
2
x)
2
when x = 2 and y = 1
Evaluate the following expressions involving variables.
13.
4x
9x
2
3x+1
when x = 2
14.
z
2
x+y
+
x
2
xy
when x = 1, y =2, and z = 4.
15.
4xyz
y
2
x
2
when x = 3, y = 2, and z = 5
9
16.
x
2
z
2
xz2x(zx)
when x =1 and z = 3
The formula to nd the volume of a square pyramid is V =
s
2
(h)
3
. Evaluate the volume for the given values.
17. s = 4 inches, h = 18 inches
18. s = 10 f eet, h = 50 f eet
19. h = 7 meters, s = 12 meters
20. h = 27 f eet, s = 13 f eet
21. s = 16 cm, h = 90 cm
In 22 25, insert parentheses in each expression to make a true equation.
22. 52 64+2 = 5
23. 124+103 3+7 = 11
24. 22325 36 = 30
25. 1284 5 =8
In 26 29, evaluate each expression using a graphing calculator.
26. x
2
+2x xy when x = 250 and y =120
27. (xy y
4
)
2
when x = 0.02 and y =0.025
28.
x+yz
xy+yz+xz
when x =
1
2
, y =
3
2
, and z =1
29.
(x+y)
2
4x
2
y
2
when x = 3 and y =5d
30. The formula to nd the volume of a spherical object (like a ball) is V =
4
3
()r
3
, where r = the radius of the
sphere. Determine the volume for a grapefruit with a radius of 9 cm.
10
1.3
Introductory Equations
What You Will Learn
Solve single-variable addition and subtraction equations using mental math.
Solve single-variable multiplication and division equations using mental math.
Solve Single-Variable Addition and Subtraction Equations Using Mental Math
We have been working with algebraic expressions. Remember that algebraic expressions combine numbers, vari-
ables and operations together. When given the value of a variable, we can evaluate any expression.
Take the following example: 10r +11.
If r = 22, we substitute the value of the variable into the expression and evaluate.
Be careful to follow the order of operations.
10r +11 = 10(22) +11
220+11
231
The answer is 231.
An equation is a mathematical statement that two expressions are equal. The key thing to notice in an equation is
that there is an equals sign.
For example, we can say that
15+7 = 242
Since both sides of the equation equal 22, these equations are equivalent.
15+7 = 22 and 242 = 22
An equation can also include an algebraic unknown, or a variable. If you think about this it makes perfect sense. We
have an unknown in an equation so we use a variable to represent the unknown quantity.
Take a look at some of these equations with variables in them:
15t = 45
12 = x +9
25 = 3(x 7) +1
When we have an equation with a variable in it, we can solve the equation to gure out the value of the
variable.
Remember, an equation states that two expressions are equal.
When we solve an equation with a variable, we are nding the value of the variable that makes the equation true.
11
1.3. Introductory Equations www.ck12.org
Example
y +10 = 15
The equal sign tells us that y +10 and 15 have the same value.
Therefore, the value of y must be a number that, when added to 10, equals 15.
What could be the value of y?
We can ask ourselves, What number plus ten is equal to fteen?
You can use mental math to determine that y = 5 because 5+10 = 15.
One advantage of working with equations is that you can always check your work.
Think of it like a balance.
This scale is not balanced. When we solve an equation, we want the scale to balance. One side will be equal
to the other side.
When you think you know the value of a variable, substitute it into the equation.
If your value for the variable is the correct one, both sides will be equal.
The two expressions will balance!
The rst example had addition in it, what about subtraction?
You can work on a subtraction equation in the same way. Lets look at an example.
Example
x 5 = 10
This is an equation once again. We want to gure out what number, minus ve, is equal to ten. That way both sides
of the equations will be equal and be balanced. We ask ourselves the question, What number take away ve is equal
to 10?
We can use mental math to gure out that x is equal to 15. When working with small numbers, mental math is
the quickest way to guring out the value of the variable.
Now lets check our answer. To do this we substitute our answer for x back into the equation and see if both sides
are equal.
155 = 10
10 = 10
12
You can see that if we pick the correct quantity for x that the two halves of the scale will be balanced. If we
pick the wrong quantity, one that is too big or too small, then the scales will tip.
Solving equations is often called BALANCING EQUATIONS for this very reason!!
Practice Exercies
Practice using mental math to solve each equation.
a. x +5 = 12
b. x 3 = 18
c. 6y = 4
Solve Single-Variable Multiplication and Division Equations Using Mental Math
We have just demonstrated how to solve single-variable addition and subtraction equations. To solve variable
equations using multiplication and division we follow the same procedure. First, we examine the problem and
use mental math.
Using mental math requires you to remember your multiplication tables. Remember that division is the
opposite of multiplication, so when using small numbers mental math and your times tables will be your best
strategy to balancing equations.
Lets look at an example.
Example
9p = 72
Here is a multiplication problem. Whenever you see a variable next to a number it means multiplication.
Here we need to gure out, What number times 9 is equal to 72?
Using mental math and division, you can see that p is equal to 8.
Now lets check our answer. We do this by substituting the value of the variable, 8, back into the original problem.
9(8) = 72
72 = 72
One side of the equation is equal to the other side, so our equation balances! Our work is complete and
accurate.
13
1.3. Introductory Equations www.ck12.org
We can apply mental math when solving division problems too. Remember that a fraction bar means division,
so when you see one you know that you are going to be dividing.
Example
x
3
= 4
Remember that when the variable is on top of the fraction bar that we are dividing the bottom number into
this number. So we ask ourselves, What number divided by three is equal to four?
We use mental math, and our knowledge of the times table, to gure this out. Our missing value is 12.
Next, we can check our work. We substitute 12 back into the equation for the variable x.
12
3
= 4
4 = 4
One side of the equation is equal to the other side, so our equation balances! Our work is complete and
accurate.
Practice Exercises
Practice solving these equations.
a. 5y = 20
b. 6g = 42
c.
x
7
= 49
Homework
Directions: Use mental math to solve each addition or subtraction equation.
1. x +2 = 7
2. y +5 = 10
3. a+7 = 20
4. b+8 = 13
5. z +10 = 32
6. s +14 = 26
7. 4+y = 8
8. 6+x = 21
9. 17+a = 23
10. 18+b = 30
11. 12+x = 24
12. 13+y = 18
13. 15+a = 22
14. x +17 = 24
15. y +3 = 45
14
16. x 4 = 10
17. y 8 = 20
18. 5y = 2
19. 22a = 15
20. 18y = 2
Directions: Use mental math to solve each multiplication or division equation.
21. 5x = 25
22. 6x = 48
23. 2y = 18
24. 3y = 21
25. 4a = 16
26. 13b = 26
27. 15a = 30
28. 15x = 45
29.
x
2
= 3
30.
x
4
= 5
31.
x
3
= 11
32.
x
5
= 12
33.
x
7
= 8
34.
x
8
= 9
35.
x
3
= 12
Here are the vocabulary words that are part of this lesson.
Algebraic Expression
an expression that contains a combination of numbers, variables and operations. It does not have an equals
sign.
Equation
a number sentence with two expressions divided by an equal sign. One quantity on one side of the equation
equals the quantity on the other side of the equation.
Variable Equation
an equation where a variable is used to represent an unknown quantity.
15
1.4. Introductory Inequalities www.ck12.org
1.4
Introductory Inequalities
What You Will Learn
The meaning of inequality symbols
How to graph inequalities on a number line
How to express an inequality using interval notation
The Meaning of Inequality Symbols
We are going to begin working with quantities that may or may not be equal. These are called inequalities.
Just like an equation is shown using an equal sign, an inequality is expressed through symbols too.
> means is greater than.
< means is less than.
means is greater than or equal to.
means is less than or equal to.
Lets begin by taking a look at some inequalities.
2 > x
Here we have an inequality where we know that two is greater than the quantity of x. This problem has many
different solutions. Any number that would make this a true statement can be substituted in for the variable. We
know that we can have negative numbers here too. We can write our answer as a set of numbers that begins with one
and goes down from there.
The answer is {1, 0 , -1...} Remember that any fraction or decimal that is smaller than two could also work.
Here is another one.
5 y
Here we have an inequality that involves less than or equal to. We can substitute any value in for the variable that
makes this a true statement. This means that we can start with ve and go greater.
The answer is {5, 6, 7...}
Graphing Inequalities on a Number Line
We graph inequalities on a number line to visually show the set of numbers that would make the statement a true
statement. Given that we can have less than, greater than, or less than or equal to, and greater than or equal to, we
can have four different types of graphing. Here are some hints to help you with graphing inequalities.
Use an open circle to show that a value is not a solution for the inequality. You will use open circles to graph
inequalities that include the symbols > or <.
Use a closed circle to show that a value is a solution for the inequality. You will use closed circles to graph
inequalities that include the symbols or .
16
Write an inequality to represent all possible values of n if n is less than 2. Then graph those solutions on a number
line.
First, translate the description above into an inequality. You can do this in the same way that you wrote
equations. Just pay close attention to the words being used.
n, is less than 2.

n < 2
Now, graph the inequality.
Draw a number line from -5 to 5.
You know that n represents all numbers less than 2, and can be represented as n < 2. So, the solutions for
this inequality include all numbers less than 2. The number 2 is not a solution for this inequality, so draw an
open circle at 2. Then draw an arrow showing all numbers less than 2. The arrow should face left because the
lesser numbers are to the left on a number line.
Write an inequality for each example.
Example A
The quantities less than or equal to 4.
Solution: x 4
Example B
A number is greater than or equal to -12.
Solution: a 12
Example C
Two times a number is less than 7.
Solution: 2x < 7
Practice Exercise
Here is one for you to try on your own.
Write an inequality to represent all possible values of n if n is greater than or equal to -4. Then graph those solutions
on a number line.
17
1.4. Introductory Inequalities www.ck12.org
Solution
First, translate the description above into an inequality.
n is greater than or equal to 4.

n 4
Now, graph the inequality.
Draw a number line from -5 to 5.
You know that n represents all numbers greater than or equal to -4, and can be represented as n 4. So, the
solutions for this inequality include all numbers greater than or equal to -4. The number -4 is a solution for
this inequality, so draw a closed circle at -4. Then draw an arrow showing all numbers greater than -4. The
arrow should face right because the greater numbers are to the right on a number line.
Express an Inequality Using Interval Notation
Interval notation is another commonly used way to express an inequality. The graphs we have been drawing can
be thought of as an interval on the number line. The inequality x > 5 means x can be any number in the interval
between 5 and innity. This is written in interval notation as (5, ). If x 5, the interval notation would be [5, ).
If the graph ends in an open circle, use a parenthesis, if it ends in a closed circle, use a square bracket.
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
Directions: List at least three possible values for the variable in each inequality
1. x < 13
2. y > 5
3. x < 2
4. y >3
18
5. a > 12
6. x 4
7. y 3
8. b 3
9. a 5
10. b 11
Directions: Write an inequality to describe each situation, graph it on a number line and write it in interval notation.
11. A number is less than or equal to -8.
12. A number is greater than 50.
13. A number is less than -4.
14. A number is greater than -12.
15. A number is greater than or equal to 11.
19
1.5. Properties of Real Numbers www.ck12.org
1.5
Properties of Real Numbers
What You Will Learn
Algebraic Properties of Addition
Algebraic Properties of Multiplication
Algebraic Properties of Addition
The Commutative Property of Addition: For all real numbers a and b, a+b = b+a.
To commute means to change locations, so the Commutative Property of Addition allows you to rearrange the objects
in an addition problem.
The Associative Property of Addition: For all real numbers a, b, and c, (a+b) +c = a+(b+c).
To associate means to group together, so the Associative Property of Addition allows you to regroup the objects in
an addition problem.
The Identity Property of Addition: For any real number a, a+0 = a.
This property allows you to use the fact that the sum of any number and zero is the original value.
These properties apply to all real numbers, but in this lesson we are applying them to integers, which are just a
special kind of real number.
Guided Practice
Simplify the following using the properties of addition:
a) 9+(1+22)
b) 4, 211+0
Solution:
a) It is easier to regroup 9+1, so by applying the Associative Property of Addition, (9+1) +22 = 10+22 = 32.
b) The Additive Identity Property states the sum of a number and zero is itself; therefore, 4, 211+0 = 4, 211.
Algebraic Properties of Multiplication
The four mathematical properties which involve multiplication are the Commutative, Associative, Multiplicative
Identity and Distributive Properties.
Commutative property When two numbers are multiplied together, the product is the same regardless of the
order in which they are written:
Example 4 2 = 2 4
20
We can see a geometrical interpretation of The Commutative Property of Multiplication to the right. The Area
of the shape (length width) is the same no matter which way we draw it.
Associative Property When three or more numbers are multiplied, the product is the same regardless of their
grouping
Example (2 3) 4 = 2 (3 4)
Multiplicative Identity Property: The product of one and any number is that number.
Example 5 1 = 5.
Distributive property The multiplication of a number and the sum of two numbers is equal to the rst number
times the second number plus the rst number times the third number.
Example: 4(6+3) = 4 6+4 3
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
1. Complete each statement using the commutative property
a) x + 3 = _____ + x
b) 4(2) = ____(4)
2. Complete each statement using the associative property
a) (34)(-2) = ____ [4(-2)]
b) [x + (-4)] + (-3) = ___ + [(-4) + (-3)]
3. Complete each statement using an identity property
a) 6 + 0 = ____
b) 1(5) = ____
4. Complete each statement using an inverse property
21
1.5. Properties of Real Numbers www.ck12.org
a) -8 + ___ = 0
b)
2
3
____ = 1
22
1.6
SolvingEquations UsingOne Step
What You Will Learn
Solve an equation using addition.
Solve an equation using subtraction.
Solve an equation using multiplication.
Solve an equation using division.
Introduction
Nadia is buying a new bicycle helmet. Peter watches her pay for the helmet with a $100 bill. She receives $22.00 in
change, and from only this information, Peter works out how much the helmet costs. How much was the helmet?
In math, we can solve problems like this using an equation. An equation is an algebraic expression that involves an
equals sign. If we use the letter x to represent the cost of the bicycle helmet we could write the following equation.
x +22 = 100
This tells us that the value of the helmet plus the value of the change received is equal to the $100 that Nadia paid.
Peter saw the transaction from a different viewpoint. He saw Nadia receive the helmet, give the salesperson $100
then he saw Nadia receive $22 change. Another way we could write the equation would be:
x = 10022
This tells us that the value of the player is equal to the amount of money Nadia paid (100 - 22).
Mathematically, these two equations are equivalent, though it is easier to determine the cost of the bicycle helmet
from the second equation. In this chapter, we will learn how to solve for the variable in a one variable linear
equation. Linear equations are equations in which each term is either a constant or the product of a constant and a
single variable (to the rst power). The term linear comes from the word line. You will see in later chapters that
linear equations dene lines when graphed.
We will start with simple problems such as the one in the last example.
Solve an Equation Using Addition
When we write an algebraic equation, equality means that whatever we do to one side of the equation, we have to
do to the other side. For example, to get from the second equation in the introduction back to the rst equation, we
would add a quantity of 22 to both sides:
x = 10022
x +22 = 10022+22 or x +22 = 100
23
1.6. Solving Equations Using One Step www.ck12.org
Similarly, we can add numbers to each side of an equation to help solve for our unknown.
Example 1
Solve x 3 = 9
Solution
We need to isolate x. Change our equation so that x appears by itself on one side of the equals sign. Right now our
x has a 3 subtracted from it. To reverse this, we could add 3, but we must do this to both sides.
x 3 = 9
x 3+3 = 9+3 The +3 and 3 on the left cancel each other. We evaluate 9+3
x = 12
Example 2
Solve x 3 = 11
Solution
To isolate x we need to add 3 to both sides of the equation. This time we will add vertically.
x
3 = 11
+3 = +3
x = 14
Notice how this format works. One term will always cancel (in this case the three), but we need to remember to
carry the x down and evaluate the sum on the other side of the equals sign.
Example 3
Solve z 5 =7
Solution
This time our variable is z, but dont let that worry you. Treat this variable like any other variable.
z 5 =7
+5 = +5
z =2
Solve an Equation Using Subtraction
When our variable appears with a number added to it, we follow the same process, only this time to isolate the
variable we subtract a number from both sides of the equation.
Example 4
Solve x +6 = 26
Solution
To isolate x we need to subtract six from both sides.
24
x
+6 = 26
6 =6
x = 20
Example 5
Solve x +20 =11
Solution
To isolate x we need to subtract 20 from both sides of the equation.
x +20 =11
20 =20
x =31
Solve an Equation Using Multiplication
Suppose you are selling pizza for $1.50 a slice and you get eight slices out of a single pizza. How much do you get
for a single pizza? It shouldnt take you long to gure out that you get 8$1.50 =$12.00. You solve this problem by
multiplying. The following examples do the same algebraically, using the unknown variable x as the cost in dollars
of the whole pizza.
Example 6
Solve
1
8
x = 1.5
Our x is being multiplied by one-eighth. We need to cancel this factor, so we multiply by the reciprocal 8. Do not
forget to multiply both sides of the equation.
8
_
1
8
x
_
= 8(1.5)
x = 12
In general, when x is multiplied by a fraction, we multiply by the reciprocal of that fraction.
Example 7
Solve
9x
5
= 5
9x
5
is equivalent to
9
5
x so x is being multiplied by
9
5
. To cancel, multiply by the reciprocal,
5
9
.
25
1.6. Solving Equations Using One Step www.ck12.org
5
9
_
9x
5
_
=
5
9
5
x =
25
9
Solve an Equation Using Division
Solving by division is another way to cancel any terms that are being multiplied x. Suppose you buy ve identical
candy bars, and you are charged $3.25. How much did each candy bar cost? You might just divide $3.25 by 5. Or
you may convert to cents and divide 325 by 5. Lets see how this problem looks in algebra.
Example 8
Solve 5x = 325 To cancel the 5 we divide both sides by 5.
5x
5
=
325
5
x = 65
Video Overview of Adding/Subtracting to solve equations
MEDIA
Video Overview of Multiplying/Dividing to solve equations
MEDIA
Lesson Summary
An equation in which each term is either a constant or a product of a constant and a single variable is a linear
equation.
Adding, subtracting, multiplying, or dividing both sides of an equation by the same value results in an
equivalent equation.
26
To solve an equation, isolate the unknown variable on one side of the equation by applying one or more
arithmetic operations to both sides.
Homework
1. Solve the following equations for x.
a. x +11 = 7
b. x 1.1 = 3.2
c. 7x = 21
d. 4x = 1
e.
5x
12
=
2
3
f. x +
5
2
=
2
3
g. x
5
6
=
3
8
2. Solve the following equations for the unknown variable.
a. q13 =13
b. z +13 = 9
c. 21s = 3
d. t +
1
2
=
1
3
e.
7 f
11
=
7
11
f.
3
4
=
1
2
y
g. 6r =42
27
1.7. Solving Equations using Two or More Steps www.ck12.org
1.7
SolvingEquations usingTwoor More
Steps
What You Will Learn
Solve a two-step equation using addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division.
Solve a multi-step equation by using the distributive property and combining like terms.
Solve a multi-step equation with fractions
Solve a Two-Step Equation
We have seen that in order to solve for an unknown variable we can "undo" the operation on the variable to get it by
itself. In this chapter we will expand our ability to do that, with problems that require us to combine more than one
technique in order to solve for our unknown.
First, we will look at equations that have require two steps to isolate the variable. An example is
3x 5 = 10
We are looking for a number that will give you an answer of 10 if you multiply it by 3 and subtract 5. It is possible
to gure that out in your head, but algebra can be very helpful as well, especially when the equations get longer and
full of fractions. Heres how you use algebra to solve it
3x 5 = 10
+5 = +5 Add 5 to both sides.
3x = 15
3x
3
=
15
3
Divide both sides by 3.
x = 5
We had to do two operations in order to get x by itself. First, we used adding to "undo" the subtracted 5. Then we
used dividing to "undo" the multiplied 3. Using the opposite operation to undo an equation is what algebra is all
about.
The same logic holds for all of the algebra operations, you just have to keep doing the opposite until you are left
with x by itself.
28 = 4x +3
3 = 3 Subtract 3 from both sides.
25 = 4x
25
4
=
4x
4
Divide both sides by 4
x =
25
4
28
Combining Like Terms and the Distributive Property
If it is possible to combine like terms on one or both sides of the equation, you must do that before you start undoing
any of the operations.
3x +2x +4 = 14 Combine like terms.
5x +4 = 14
4 =4 Subtract 4 from both sides.
5x = 10
5x
5
=
10
5
x = 2
If the x is inside a set of parenthesis, you need to use the distributive property to get rid of them.
6(x +4) = 12 Distribute the 6.
6x +24 = 12
24 =24 Subtract 24 from both sides
6x
6
=
12
6
x =2
This last example will combine all the ideas from this section.
4(x +2) 3(4x 7) = 21 Use the Distributive Property
4x +812x +21 = 21 Combine like terms
8x +29 = 21 Subtract 29 from each side
29 =29
8x
8
=
8
8
Divide both sides by -8
x = 1
Solve a Multi-Step Equation with Fractions
If an equation has a large number of fractions, it is often easier to multiply both sides of the equation by the least
common denominator of the fractions. This will cancel out all of the denominators and there will be no fractions
remaining.
29
1.7. Solving Equations using Two or More Steps www.ck12.org
3
5
x +
7
10
=
12
5
LCD is 10
10(
3
5
x +
7
10
) = (
12
5
)10 Multiply each side by 10
6x +7 =24 Subtract 7 from each side
7 =7
6x
6
=
31
6
x =
31
6
Lesson Summary
Some equations require more than one operation to solve.
Terms with the same variable in them (or no variable in them) are like terms. Combine like terms (adding
or subtracting them from each other) is necessary to simplify the expression and solve for the unknown. You
may need to use the Distributive Property before you combine like terms.
Video Overview of Solving Two Step Equations
MEDIA
Video Overview of Solving Equations with the Distributive Property and Combining Like Terms
MEDIA
Homework
Solve the following equations for the unknown variable.
1. 4x 3 = 9
2. 15 =5x +4
3. 5x (3x +2) = 1
4. 4(x +3) = 1
30
5. 45 = 94x
6. 6x +123x = 7
7. 12+
2
3
x = 8
8. 7(x 3) 4(x +1) = 15
9.
5
6
x
2
3
=
3
4
10. 3
4
7
x =
2
5
31
1.8. Equations with Variables on Both Sides www.ck12.org
1.8
Equations withVariables onBothSides
What You Will Learn
Solve an equation with variables on both sides
Solve an equation with no solution or innite solutions
Solve an Equation with Variables on Both Sides
When the variable appears on both sides of the equation, we need to manipulate our equation so that all variables
appear on one side, and only numbers remain on the other.
Example 1
Solve 3x +4 = 5x
Solution
This equation has x on both sides. However, there is only a number term on the left. We will therefore move all the
x terms to the right of the equal sign leaving the number on the left.
3x +4 = 5x Subtract 3x from both sides.
3x 3x
4 = 2x Divide by 2
4
2
=
2x
2
Solution
x = 2
Example 2
Solve 9x = 45x
This time we will collect like terms (x terms) on the left of the equal sign.
9x = 4
5x
+5x

+5x Add 5x to both sides.

14x = 4
14x = 4 Divide by 14.
14x
14
=
4
14
x =
2
7
Solution
32
x =
2
7
If there are like terms to combine, do that before you collect the variables on one side of the equal sign
Example 3
3x +56x = 13x +4 Combine like terms
3x +5 = 13x +4 Add 3x to each side
+3x = +3x
5 = 16x +4 Subtract 4 from each side
4 = 4
1
16
=
16x
16
Divide each side by 16
1
16
= x
If there are parenthesis in the equation, do the distributive property rst.
Example 4
4(2x +3) +7 = 4x Use the Distributive Property
8x 12+7 = 4x Combine like terms
8x 5 = 4x Add 8x to each side
+8x = +8x
5
12
=
12x
12
5
12
= x
Solve an Equation with No Solutions or Innite Solutions
Now that we have variables on both sides, it is possible to set up an equation where it isnt possible to get a number
for x. This example will show how this can happen.
4x +5(x +1) = 3x 3(2x +7) Use the Distributive Property
4x +5x +5 = 3x +6x 21 Combine like terms
9x +5 = 9x 21 Subtract 9x from each side
9x =9x
5 =21
No matter what number is substituted in for x, the nal result will be two numbers that dont equal each other. This
means that the equation has no solution.
It is also possible to set up an equation where any number can work.
33
1.8. Equations with Variables on Both Sides www.ck12.org
2(5x +3) 8x = 3(3x +2) 7x Use the Distributive Property
10x +68x = 9x +67x Combine like terms
2x +6 = 2x +6 Subtract 2x from each side
2x =2x
6 = 6
In this case, any value for x will give us two numbers that equal each other. This means the solution to the equation
is all real numbers. There are an innite number of numbers, so another way to say this is the equation has innite
solutions.
Video Overview
MEDIA
Lesson Summary
If an unknown variable appears on both sides of an equation, distribute and combine like terms as necessary.
Then subtract (or add) one term to both sides to simplify the equation to have the unknown on only one side.
Homework
Solve the following equations for the unknown variable.
1. 4x +3 = 2x +9
2. 5x +2x +7 = 10x 13
3. 3(x 1) = 2(x +3)
4. 8(x +6) = 3x +6
5. 7(x +20) = x +5
6. 9(x 2) = 3x +3
7. 5x (x 3) = 2x +79x
8.
3
5
x
1
10
x =
1
2
x +1
9. x 5 =(5x)
10. 9x +3x 10 = 3(3x +1)
34
1.9
WordProblems
What You Will Learn
Solve a word problem by dening variables, setting up an equation and solving
Word Problems
Word problems are challenging. It can be difcult to gure out how to read the problem and turn it into an equation.
This book will outline several different types of problems and how to set them up.
The rst problems we will do involve word phrases that are used to describe math operations.
Example 1
Write "A number increased by seven" as an algebraic expression.
Solution: x+4
Example 2
Write "The product of a number and three times the same number is 27" as an algebraic equation.
Solution:
x 3x = 27
Now we will try some similar problems where we use our equation solving skills to nd the number
Example 3
Write "If four is added to three times a number, the result is seven" as an equation. Then solve to nd the
number
3x +4 = 7 Subtract 4 from both sides
4 =4
3x
3
=
3
3
Divide both sides by three
x = 1
Solution: x=1, so the number being discussed is 1.
As the problems get more difcult, you will need a strategy. Try doing the following ve steps when you set up a
word problem
1. Read the problem
35
1.9. Word Problems www.ck12.org
2. Highlight the important information
3. Dene a variable
4. Write an equation
5. Solve and check
Try that strategy on the next problem
Example 4
A piece of lumber 70 inches long is divided into 3 pieces. The longest piece must be three times the middle
size piece and the shortest piece is 10 inches shorter than the middle sized piece. Find the length of each
piece.
First lets think about the important information. The lumber is divided into three pieces. We dont know
how long each piece is, but we do know how they both compare to the middle piece. That means we should
dene a variable "m" for the length of the middle piece and we will write an equation using that.
The longest piece is three times the size of the middle piece, so we will call the longest piece 3m. The shortest
piece is 10 inches shorter than the middle piece, so we will call it m-10. All of the pieces add up to 70, so
this is our nal equation
3m+m+m10 = 70
Now solve this equation to nd m
Solution: This means the middle sized piece is 16 inches. The longest piece is three times that, or 48 inches.
The shortest piece is ten inches shorter than that, or 6 inches
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
Read the following problems, dene a variable, write an equation and solve using algebra.
1. The product of two and a number is ten.
2. The sum of ve times a number and ten is equal to the product of 15 and the number
3. The quotient of a number and 5 is equal to the sum of six and one.
4. The perimeter of a rectange is 120 inches. The length is twice the width. Find the length and width of the
rectangle.
5. The Fast Track company makes toy remote-control cars, which it sells for $18 each. The production cost for
the company is $2000 per day plus $13 per race car. How many race cars must the company sell to break
even?
6. Lauren is two years younger than Emily. If Emily is 12, how old is Lauren?
7. Kathleen is twice as old as Bob. The sum of their ages is 48. Find their ages
36
8. Bill received 100 more votes than Martha in a recent election. The total number of votes was 458. How many
votes did each receive?
9. The sum of two consecutive even integers is 186. What are the integers?
10. The perimeter of a triangle is 22 inches. The rst side is 3 times longer than the second side. The third side
is 4 more than twice the second side. How long is each side of the triangle?
37
1.10. Solving Equations for a Variable www.ck12.org
1.10
SolvingEquations for a Variable
What Will You Learn
Solve a formula for a given variable
Use that formula to evaluate a variable
Solve a Formula for a Given Variable
A formula is an equation where variables are used to describe how one thing depends on other things. For example,
here is a common formula
A = LW
This formula says the area (A) of a rectangle is equal to the length (L) times the width (W). If the length of the
rectangle were increased, the area would increase. The area changes if the length changes, so the area depends on
the length.
It would also make sense to say that if the length increased, maybe it was because the area increased. In order to
have the length be the answer the formula gave us, we have to do some algebra to the formula.
A
W
=
LW
W
Divide both sides by W
A
W
=
L
W
The Ws cancel out
A
W
= L or L =
A
W
Now when you use the formula, the length is the answer you get, not the area.
Now use the formula to evaluate a variable
Example 1
The area of a rectangle is 40 sq ft and the width is 8 ft, what is the length
L =
A
W
L =
40
8
L = 5 f t
Lets look at a more complicated formula. The area of a triangle is given by
A =
1
2
bh
38
where b is the base and h is the height. What if you wanted the base to be the variable that was by itself? You
would do the same algebra you do to solve an equation, except some of the steps would be with variables instead of
numbers.
2
1
A =
1
2
bh
2
1
Multiply both sides by
2
1
to clear the fraction
2A = bh
2A
h
=
b
h
Divide both sides by h to get the b by itself
2A
h
= b or b =
2A
h
Example 2
The area of a triangle is 18 square feet and the height is 4 feet, nd the base
b =
2A
h
b =
2 18
4
b =
36
4
b = 9 f t
Heres one last example with even more steps. The perimeter of a rectangle is given by the formula
P = 2L+2W
In this formula, L stands for length and W stands for width. What if you knew the perimeter of the rectangle and
the length of the rectangle and you wanted to gure out the width? Once again, just do algebra steps to the formula
until you get the width all by itself
P = 2L+2W
2L =2L Subtract 2L from each side
P2L = 2W
P2L
2
=
2W
2
Now divide each side by 2
P2L
2
=W or W =
P2L
2
Now if someone gave you the perimeter and the length, you would be able to gure out the width.
Example 3
The perimeter of a rectangle is 24 ft and the length is 5 ft, nd the width
39
1.10. Solving Equations for a Variable www.ck12.org
W =
P2L
2
W =
242 5
2
W =
2410
2
W =
14
2
W = 7 f t
Homework
Solve the following formulas for the given variable
1. a. d = rt,solve for r
b. If d=10 and t=2, what is r?
2. a. P = a+b+c, solve for b
b. If P=53, a=5 and c =16, what is b?
3. a. I = prt, solve for p
b. If I=26, r=3 and t=5, what is p?
4. a. V =
1
3
bh, solve for b
b. If V=24 and h=8, what is b?
5. a. C = 2r, solve for r
b. If C=100, what is r? ( is a constant that is always equal to 3.14)
6. a. y = 2x 5, solve for x
b. If y =23, what is x?
40
1.11
Ratios, Rates andProportions
What You Will Learn
Write and understand a ratio.
Write and understand a rate
Write and solve a proportion.
Solve proportions using cross products.
Ratio
A ratio shows the relative sizes of two or more numbers, it is best explained by looking at an example.
Example 1
The State Dining Room in the White House measures approximately 48 feet long by 36 feet wide. Compare the length
of room to the width, and express your answer as a ratio.
Solution
48 f eet
36 f eet
=
48
36
=
4
3
Example 2
A tournament size shufeboard table measures 30 inches wide by 14 feet long. Compare the length of the table to its
width and express the answer as a ratio.
We could write the ratio immediately as:
14 f eet
30 inches
Notice that we cannot cancel the units.
Sometimes it is OK to leave the units in, but as we are comparing two lengths, it makes sense to convert all the
measurements to the same units.
Solution
14 f eet
30 inches
=
1412 inches
30 inches
=
168
30
=
28
5
41
1.11. Ratios, Rates and Proportions www.ck12.org
Rates
A rate is similar to a ratio, except the numbers being compared have different units. Typical examples include speed
in miles per hour or gas mileage in miles per gallon.
Example 3
A family car is being tested for fuel efciency. It drives non-stop for 100 miles, and uses 3.2 gallons of gasoline.
Write the ratio of distance traveled to fuel used as a rate.
100 miles
3.2 gallons
To convert this to miles/gallon we need to divide both numerator and denominator by 3.2.
_
100
3.2
_
miles
_
3.2
3.2
_
gallons
=
31.25 miles
1 gallon
Solution
The ratio of distance to fuel used is
31.25 miles
1 gallon
or 31.25 miles per gallon.
Write and Solve a Proportion
When two ratios are equal to each other, we call it a proportion.
10
15
=
6
9
This statement is a proportion. We know the statement is true because we can reduce both fractions to
2
3
.
Check this yourself to make sure!
We often use proportions in science and business. For example, when scaling up the size of something. We use them
to solve for an unknown, so we will use algebra and label our unknown variable x. We assume that a certain ratio
holds true whatever the size of the thing we are enlarging (or reducing). The next few examples demonstrate this.
42
Example 4
A small fast food chain operates 60 stores and makes $1.2 million prot every year. How much prot would the chain
make if it operated 250 stores?
First, we need to write a ratio. This will be the ratio of prot to number of stores.
Ratio =
$1, 200, 000
60 stores
We now need to determine our unknown, x which will be in dollars. It is the prot of 250 stores. Here is the ratio
that compares unknown dollars to 250 stores.
Ratio =
$x
250 stores
We now write equal ratios and solve the resulting proportion.
$1, 200, 000
60 stores
=
$x
250 stores
or
1, 200, 000
60
=
x
250
Note that we can drop the units not because they are the same on the numerator and denominator, but because they
are the same on both sides of the equation.
1, 200, 000
60
=
x
250
Simplify fractions.
20, 000 =
x
250
Multiply both sides by 250.
5, 000, 000 = x
Solution
If the chain operated 250 stores the annual prot would be 5 million dollars.
Solve Proportions Using Cross Products
One neat way to simplify proportions is to cross multiply. Consider the following proportion.
16
4
=
20
5
43
If we want to eliminate the fractions, we could multiply both sides by 4 and then multiply both sides by 5. In fact
we could do both at once:
4 5
16
4
= 4
5
20
5
5 16 = 4 20
Now comparing this to the proportion we started with, we see that the denominator from the left hand side ends up
multiplying with the numerator on the right hand side.
You can also see that the denominator from the right hand side ends up multiplying the numerator on the left hand
side.
In effect the two denominators have multiplied across the equal sign:
This movement of denominators is known as cross multiplying. It is extremely useful in solving proportions,
especially when the unknown variable is on the denominator.
Example 5
Solve the proportion for x.
4
3
=
9
x
Cross multiply:
x 4 = 9 3
4x
4
=
27
4
Solution
x = 6.75
Example 6
Solve the following proportion for x.
0.5
3
=
56
x
Cross multiply:
x 0.5 = 56 3
0.5x
0.5
=
168
0.5
Divide both sides by 0.5.
Solution:
x = 336
44
Example 7
x +2
3
=
x 1
4
Cross Multiply
4(x +2) = 3(x 1)
4x +8 = 3x 3
3x 3x
x +8 =3
8 =8
x =11
Video Overview of Ratios
MEDIA
Video Overview of Rates
MEDIA
Video Overview of Proportions and Cross Multiplication
MEDIA
Lesson Summary
A ratio is a way to compare two numbers, measurements or quantities by dividing one number by the other
and expressing the answer as a fraction.
2
3
,
32 miles
1.4 gallons
, and
x
13
are all ratios.
45
A rate compares two numbers with different units, for example miles per hour
A proportion is formed when two ratios are set equal to each other.
Cross multiplication is useful for solving equations in the form of proportions. To cross multiply, multiply
the bottom of each ratio by the top of the other ratio and set them equal. For instance, cross multiplying
results in 11 3 = 5 x.
Homework
1. Write the following comparisons as ratios. Simplify fractions where possible.
a. $150 to $3
b. 150 boys to 175 girls
c. 200 minutes to 1 hour
d. 10 days to 2 weeks
2. Write the following ratios as a unit rate.
a. 54 hotdogs to 12 minutes
b. 5000 lbs to 250 in
2
c. 20 computers to 80 students
d. 180 students to 6 teachers
e. 12 meters to 4 oors
f. 18 minutes to 15 appointments
3. Solve the following proportions.
a.
13
6
=
5
x
b.
1.25
7
=
3.6
x
c.
6
19
=
x
11
d.
1
x
=
0.01
5
e.
300
4
=
x
99
f.
3x
9
=
x 5
7
g.
4
2x+4
=
9
5
h.
4x10
5
=
3x+8
3
4. A restaurant serves 100 people per day and takes $908. If the restaurant were to serve 250 people per day,
what might the taking be?
46
1.12
Percent Problems
What You Will Learn
Find a percent of a number.
Use the percent equation.
Percent
A percent is simply a ratio with a base unit of 100. When we write a ratio as a fraction, the base unit is the
denominator. Whatever percentage we want to represent is the number on the numerator. For example, the following
ratios and percents are equivalent.
TABLE 1.1:
Fraction Percent Fraction Percent
_
50
100
_
50%
_
50
1000
_
=
_
0.5
100
_
0.5%
_
10
100
_
10%
_
1
25
_
=
_
4
100
_
4%
_
99
100
_
99%
_
3
5
_
=
_
60
100
_
60%
_
125
100
_
12.5%
_
1
10,000
_
=
_
0.01
100
_
0.01%
Fractions are easily converted to decimals, just as fractions with denominators of 10, 100, 1000, 10000 are converted
to decimals. When we wish to convert a percent to a decimal, we divide by 100, or simply move the decimal point
two units to the left.
TABLE 1.2:
Percent Decimal Percent Decimal Percent Decimal
10% 0.1 0.05% .0005 0% 0
99% 0.99 0.25% .0025 100% 1
Find a Percent of a Number
One thing we need to do before we work with percents is to practice converting between fractions, decimals and
percentages. We will start by converting decimals to percents.
Example 1
Express 0.2 as a percent.
The word percent means for every hundred. Therefore, to nd the percent, we want to change the decimal to a
fraction with a denominator of 100. For the decimal 0.2 we know the following is true:
47
1.12. Percent Problems www.ck12.org
0.2 = 0.2100
_
1
100
_
Since 100
_
1
100
_
= 1
0.2 = 20
_
1
100
_
0.2 =
_
20
100
_
= 20%
Solution
0.2 = 20%
Another approach is to think of a decimal using its word name. For example, 0.35 is 35 hundredths. This means it
cold be written as
35
100
or 35%.
Notice that the answer is the same as if you just moved the decimal point two places to the right. This is a more
practical way to convert decimals to percents.
Example 2
Express 0.07 as a percent.
Move the decimal point to places to the right to get that 0.07 = 7%
Example 3
Express 35% as a decimal.
35% =
_
35
100
_
= 0.35
There is also a shortcut here, notice that we have just moved the decimal point two places to the left
When converting fractions to percents, we can substitute
x
100
for x%, where x is the unknown percentage we can
solve for.
Example 5
Express
3
5
as a percent.
We start by representing the unknown as x% or
x
100
.
_
3
5
_
=
x
100
Cross multiply.
5x = 100 3 Divide both sides by 5 to solve for x.
5x = 300
x =
300
5
= 60
Solution
_
3
5
_
= 60%
Example 6
Express
13
40
as a percent.
Again, represent the unknown percent as
x
100
, cross-multiply, and solve for x.
48
13
40
=
x
100
40x = 1300
x =
1300
40
= 32.5
Solution
_
13
40
_
= 32.5%
Converting percentages to simplied fractions can be done by writing the percent as a fraction with a denominator
of 100 and then simplifying
Example 7
Express 28% as a simplied fraction.
First write as a fraction, then simplify.
28% =
28
100
Now reduce the fraction.
_

4 7
4 25
_
=
7
25
Solution
28% =
_
7
25
_
Use the Percent Equation
The percent equation is often used to solve problems.
Percent Equation:
percent
100
=
is
of
Example 8
What is 25% of $80
In this equation, the percent is the easier part. The left side of the equation will be
25
100
The "is" is associated with x, because the question is asking "what is". The "of" is associated with the 80, because
the question is asking "of $80". This means the nal equation is:
49
1.12. Percent Problems www.ck12.org
25
100
=
x
80
Cross multiply
100x = 25 80
100x = 2000
x = 20
Solution
25% of $80 is $20.
Example 9
$90 is what percentage of $160.
Use the percent equation. This time the percentage is the unknown, so the x will be over 100
x
100
=
90
160
160x = 100 90
160x = 9000
x = 56.25
Solution
$90 is 56.25% of 160.
An alternative to the percent proportion is to use algebra. For example, if you are trying to gure out what number
is 30% of 90, you could use "x" to stand for "what number" and "0.30" in place of 35% and write the following
equation
x = 0.30 90
x = 27
Video Overview of Percents, Decimals and Fractions
MEDIA
Video Overview of the Percent Equation
50
MEDIA
Lesson Summary
A percent is simply a ratio with a base unit of 100, i.e. 13% =
13
100
.
The percent equation is:
percent
100
=
is
o f
Homework
1. Express the following decimals as a percent.
a. 0.011
b. 0.001
c. 0.91
d. 1.75
e. 20
2. Express the following fractions as a percent (round to two decimal places when necessary).
a.
1
6
b.
5
24
c.
6
7
d.
11
7
e.
13
97
3. Express the following percentages as a reduced fraction.
a. 11%
b. 65%
c. 16%
d. 12.5%
e. 87.5%
4. Find the following.
a. What number is 30% of 90
b. 14 is 40% of what number?
c. 14 is what % of 52?
d. What number is 5% of 80
51
1.13. Multi-Step Inequalities www.ck12.org
1.13
Multi-StepInequalities
What You Will Learn
Solve an inequality.
Graph an inequality
Write the solution to an inequality in interval notation
Procedure to Solve an Inequality:
a. Remove any parentheses by using the Distributive Property.
b. Simplify each side of the inequality by combining like terms.
c. Get the variable on one side of the inequality sign and the numerical values on the other.
d. Isolate the variable
e. Graph the solution
f. Write the answer in interval notation
Remember to reverse the inequality sign if you are multiplying or dividing by a negative number.
Example A
Solve for w : 6x 5 < 7.
Solution: Begin by using the checklist above.
1. Parentheses? No
2. Like terms on the same side of inequality? No
3. Isolate the ax term using the Addition Property.
6x 5+5 < 7+5
Simplify.
6x < 12
4. Isolate the variable using the Multiplication or Division Property.
6x
6
<
12
6
x < 2
5. Check your solution. Choose a number less than 2, say 0, and check using the original inequality.
52
6(0) 5 < 7?
5 < 7
Yes, the answer checks. x < 2
6. Graph your solution
FIGURE 1.1
7. Write your solution in interval notation
(, 2)
Example B
Solve for x : 9x <5x 16.
Solution: Begin by using the checklist above.
1. Parentheses? No
2. Like terms on the same side of inequality? No
9x +5x <5x +5x 16
Simplify.
4x <15
4x
4
<
16
4
Because the number you are dividing by is negative, you must reverse the inequality sign.
x > 4
5. Check your solution by choosing a number larger than 4, such as 10.
53
1.13. Multi-Step Inequalities www.ck12.org
FIGURE 1.2
9(10) <5(10) 16?
90 <66
(4, )
Example C
Solve for x : 4x 2(3x 9) 4(2x 9).
Solution: Begin by using the previous checklist.
1. Parentheses? Yes. Use the Distributive Property to clear the parentheses.
4x +(2)(3x) +(2)(9) 4(2x) +(4)(9)
Simplify.
4x 6x +18 8x +36
2. Like terms on the same side of inequality? Yes. Combine these.
2x +18 8x +36
2x +8x +18 8x +8x +36
Simplify.
6x +18 36
6x +1818 3618
6x 18
54
6x
6

18
6
x 3
5. Check your solution using x=0, you will see that it does work
FIGURE 1.3
(, 3]
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
In 1 15, solve each of the inequalities, graph the solution set and write it in interval notation.
1. 6x 5 < 10
2. 9x <5x 15
3.
9x
5
24
4.
9x
5
7 3x +12
5.
5x1
4
>2(x +5)
6. 4x +3 <1
7. 2x < 7x 36
8. 5x > 8x +27
9. 5x < 9+x
10. 46x 2(2x +3)
11. 5(4x +3) 9(x 2) x
12. 2(2x 1) +3 < 5(x +3) 2x
13. 8x 5(4x +1) 1+2(4x 3)
14. 2(7x 2) 3(x +2) < 4x (3x +4)
15.
2
3
x
1
2
(4x 1) x +2(x 3)
55
1.14. Absolute Value Equations www.ck12.org
1.14
Absolute Value Equations
What You Will Learn
How to solve an equation that has an absolute value sign in it.
Absolute Value Equations
Equations can be used to represent absolute value situtations. For example, suppose the distance from zero is 16.
What two points can this represent?
Begin by writing an absolute value sentence to represent this situation.
16 =[n[, where n =the missing value
Which two numbers are 16 units from zero?
n = 16 or n =16
Absolute value situations can also involve distances from points other than zero. We treat such cases as compound
inequalities, separating the two independent equations and solving separately.
Example A
Solve: [x 4[= 5.
Solution: This equation looks like the distance denition:
distance =[x y[ or [y x[
The distance is 5, and the value of y is 4. We are looking for two values that are ve units away from four on a
number line.
Visually, we can see the answers are 1 and 9.
Algebraically, we separate the two absolute value equations and solve.
x 4 = 5 and x 4 =(5)
By solving each, the solutions become:
x = 9 and x =1
56
Example B
Solve: [2x 7[=6.
Solution:
Begin by separating this into its separate equations.
2x 7 =6 and 2x 7 =(6) = 6
Solve each equation independently.
2x 7 = 6 2x 7 =6
2x 7+7 = 6+7 2x 7+7 =6+7
2x = 13 2x = 1
x =
13
2
x =
1
2
Example C
Solve: 3[x 4[+2 = 11
Solution: This equation is more complicated. Before we can break it into two separate equations, we need to isolate
the absolute value. First, we will subtract 2 from each side
3[x 4[+22 = 112
3[x 4[= 9
Next, we will divide each side by 3
3[x 4[
3
=
9
3
[x 4[= 3
Now that the absolute value is by itselft, we can write two separate equations and solve
x 4 = 3 x 4 =3
x 4+4 = 3+4 x 4+4 =3+4
x = 7 x = 1
57
1.14. Absolute Value Equations www.ck12.org
Example D
A company packs coffee beans in airtight bags. Each bag should weigh 16 ounces but it is hard to ll each bag to the
exact weight. After being lled, each bag is weighed and if it is more than 0.25 ounces overweight or underweight,
it is emptied and repacked. What are the lightest and heaviest acceptable bags?
FIGURE 1.4
Solution:
The varying quantity is the weight of the bag of coffee beans. Choosing a letter to represent this quantity and writing
an absolute value equation yields:
[w16[= 0.25
Separate and solve.
w16 = 0.25 w16 =0.25
w = 16.25 w = 15.75
The lightest bag acceptable is 15.75 ounces and the heaviest bag accepted is 16.25 ounces.
Homework
In 1 10, solve the absolute value equations.
1. [7u[= 77
2. [x 5[= 10
3. [5r 6[= 9
4. 1 =[6+5z[
58
5. [8x[= 32
6. [
m
8
[= 1
7. [x +2[3 = 6
8. 2[5x 2[1 = 3
9. 51 =[15b[
10. 8 = 3+
1
2
[10y +5[
59
1.15. References www.ck12.org
1.15
References
1. . . CC BY-NC-SA
2. . . CC BY-NC-SA
3. . . CC BY-NC-SA
60
www.ck12.org Chapter 2. Unit 2 - Linear Functions
CHAPTER
2
Unit 2 - Linear Functions
Chapter Outline
2.1 INTRODUCTION TO FUNCTIONS
2.2 FINDING THE DOMAIN AND RANGE OF FUNCTIONS
2.3 CREATING EQUATIONS FROM PATTERNS
2.4 GRAPHING USING TABLE OF VALUES
2.5 GRAPHING USING INTERCEPTS
2.6 SLOPE AND RATE OF CHANGE
2.7 GRAPHS USING SLOPE-INTERCEPT FORM
2.8 WRITING EQUATIONS OF LINES
2.9 PARALLEL AND PERPENDICULAR LINES
2.10 GRAPHING LINEAR INEQUALITIES
2.11 GRAPHS OF ABSOLUTE VALUE EQUATIONS
2.12 FITTING A LINE TO DATA
2.13 PROBLEM SOLVING WITH LINEAR MODELS
61
2.1. Introduction to Functions www.ck12.org
2.1
IntroductiontoFunctions
What You Will Learn
Denition of a function
How to nd the value of a function
Denition of a Function
Denition: A function is a relationship between two variables such that the input value has ONLY one unique
output value.
Lets look at a relationship between variables and see what that means
y = 2x
This relationship means y will always be two times x. If x is 1, y is 2 and so on for any value of x. x is called the
independant variable because that is the variable that is chosen rst. y is the dependant variable, its value depends
on x, it will always be twice the value of x.
Function notation replaces the dependant variable y with its function name, usually f (x). These parentheses do not
mean multiplication. They separate the function name from the independent variable, x.
input
f (x)
..
= y out put
f (x) is read the function f of x or simply f of x.
If the function looks like this: h(x) = 3x 1, it would be read h of x equals 3 times x minus 1.
How to Find the Value of a Function
Function notation allows you to easily see the input value for the independent variable inside the parentheses.
Example A
Consider the function f (x) =
1
2
x
2
.
Evaluate f (4).
Solution: The value inside the parentheses is the value of the variable x. Use the Substitution Property to evaluate
the function for x = 4.
62
f (4) =
1
2
(4
2
)
f (4) =
1
2
16
f (4) =8
To use function notation, the equation must be written in terms of x. This means that the yvariable must be isolated
on one side of the equal sign.
Example B
Rewrite 9x +3y = 6 using function notation.
Solution: The goal is to rearrange this equation so the equation looks like y =. Then replace y = with f (x) =.
9x +3y = 6 Subtract 9x from both sides.
3y = 69x Divide by 3.
y =
69x
3
= 23x
f (x) = 23x
Functions as Machines
You can think of a function as a machine. You start with an input (some value), the machine performs the operations
(it does the work), and your output is the answer. For example, f (x) = 3x+2 takes some number, x, multiplies it by
3 and adds 2. As a machine, it would look like this:
When you use the function machine to evaluate f (2), the solution is f (2) = 8.
Example C
A function is dened as f (x) = 6x 36. Determine the following:
a) f (2)
b) f (p)
Solution:
a) Substitute x = 2 into the function f (x) : f (2) = 6 236 = 1236 =24.
b) Substitute x = p into the function f (x) : f (p) = 6p36.
Practice Exercise
Rewrite the equation 2y 4x = 10 in function notation where f (x) = y, and then evaluate f (1), f (2), f (0), and
f (z).
63
2.1. Introduction to Functions www.ck12.org
Solution:
First we need to solve for y.
Adding 4x to both sides gives 2y = 4x +10, and dividing by 2 gives y = 2x +5.
Now we just replace the y with f (x) to get f (x) = 2x +5..
Now we can evaluate f (x) = y = 2x +5 for f (1), f (2), f (0), and f (z):
f (1) = 2(1) +5 =2+5 = 3
f (2) = 2(2) +5 = 4+5 = 9
f (0) = 2(0) +5 = 5
f (z) = 2z +5
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
Part 1
Solve each equation for y, then rewrite using function notation
1. .y = 7x 21
2. 6x +8y = 36
3. x = 9y +3
4. y = 6
5. 5x 3y = 15
Part 2
Evaluate f (3), f (0), and f (z)
1. f (x) =2x +3
2. f (x) = 0.7x +3.2
3. f (x) =
5(2x)
11
Part 3
Evalute g(1)
1. g(t) =
1
2
t
2
+4
2. g(x) = 3
1
2
x
64
2.2
Findingthe DomainandRange of Func-
tions
What You Will Learn
How to determine if a relation is a function
How to nd the domain and range of a function
How to Determine if a Relation is a Function
We saw in the last section that a relationship between numbers was a function if each x value in the relation resulted
in a unique value for y. If a set of points is given, look at each x and see if it has a different y with it. If each x does
have a unique value for y, than the relationship is a function. If not, it is a relation.
Example A
Determine if {(4, 2), (6, -3), (4, -6), (5, 4), (6, -7)} is a function.
It is not because an x of 6 results in two different y values.
If you are looking at a graphed equation instead of a set of points, you can use the Vertical Line Test to determine
if it is a function
Example B
Is this graphed relation a function?
By drawing a vertical line (the red line) through the graph, we can see that the vertical line intersects the circle more
than once. Therefore, each value of x does not have a unique value of y and this graph is NOT a function.
Here is a second example:
65
2.2. Finding the Domain and Range of Functions www.ck12.org
No matter where a vertical line is drawn through the graph, there will be only one intersection. Therefore, this graph
is a function.
Practice Exercise
Determine if the graphed relation is a function.
Solution:
Imagine moving a vertical line across the plane. Do you see anywhere that this vertical line would intersect the graph
at more than one place?
There is no place on this graph where a vertical line would intersect the graph at more than one place. Using the
vertical line test, we can conclude the relation is a function.
Domain and Range
The input and output of a function is also called the domain and range. The domain of a function is the set of all
input values. The range of a function is the set of all output values. Sometimes, a function is a set of points. In this
case, the domain is all the xvalues and the range is all the yvalues. Functions can also be linear and polynomial
equations. In these instances, you need to graph the function to see where it is dened.
Example A
Determine if {(9, 2), (7, -3), (4, -6), (-10, 4), (-2, -7)} is a function. If so, nd the domain and range.
Solution: First, this is a function because the xvalues do not repeat. To nd the domain, we need to list all the
xvalues. The range is all the yvalues. Typically, you would list the values in the order they appear.
66
Domain 9, 7, 4, 10, 2
Range 2, 3, 6, 4, 7
Example B
Find the domain and range of y = x 3.
Solution: This graph is a function because it passes the vertical line test. All lines continue forever in both directions,
as indicated by the arrows.
Notice the line is solid, there are no dashes or breaks, this means that it is continuous. A continuous function has a
value for every x, or the domain is all real numbers. Can you plug in ANY value for x and get a yvalue? Yes.
Domain: (, ), x is all reals
In words, x is an element in the set of real numbers.
The range of this function is also continuous. Therefore, the range is also the set of all real numbers. We can write
the range in the same ways we wrote the domain, but with y instead of x.
Range: (, )
Practice Exercises
Find the domain and range of the following functions.
1. {(8, 3), (-4, 2), (-6, 1), (5, 7)}
2. y =
1
2
x +4
3.
4.
67
2.2. Finding the Domain and Range of Functions www.ck12.org
Video Overview of Vertical Line Test
MEDIA
Video Overview of Domain and Range
MEDIA
Homework
Determine if the following are functions. If so, state the domain and range.
1. {(5, 6), (-1, 5), (7, -3), (0, 9)}
2. {(9, 8), (-7, 8), (-7, 9), (8, 8)}
3. {(6, 2), (-5, 6), (-5, 2)}
4. {(-1, 2), (-6, 3), (10, 7), (8, 11)}
5. {(-3, -4), (-5, -6), (1, 2), (2, -6)}
6. y = 3x 2
68
Are the following graphs functions? If so, state the domain and range.
7.
8.
69
2.3. Creating Equations from Patterns www.ck12.org
2.3
CreatingEquations fromPatterns
Students analyze the rst few gures of a pattern and then describe the pattern, write a rule for the pattern, and
describe the 10th gure in the pattern. All rules require two steps. Students use problem solving steps to help.
What You Will Learn
Find a pattern in a given diagram
Use that pattern to make an equation
Finding a Pattern and Making an Equation
In order to nd an equation from a given diagram, use the problem solving steps.
Start by describing what you see in the gures.
Next, gure out what your job is in this problem. In all of these problems your job will be to write a rule that
works for the pattern and answer additional questions about the pattern.
Then, make a plan for how you will solve. Describe the number of tiles in each gure in words. Look for a
pattern in the shape of each gure. Finally, write the rule.
Next, solve the problem.
Finally, check to make sure that your rule works with all of the given gures.
Example A
Look at the gures below and answer the questions.
Solution:
We can use problem solving steps to help.
70
Describe : Each gure is made of square tiles.
Figure 1 has 5 tiles.
My job : Determine the number of tiles in Figure 10.
Write the rule relating the Number of Tiles to the Figure Number.
Plan : Use the diagrams to gure out the relationship between the Figure Number and
the Number of Tiles.
Solve : Figure 1 has 1 row of 3 tiles with two tiles on top. That is 31+2, or 5 tiles.
Figure 2 has 2 rows of 3 tiles with two tiles on top. That is 32+2, or 8 tiles.
Figure 10 will have 10 rows of 3 tiles with two on top. That is 310+2, or 32 tiles.
Figure n will have n rows of 3 tiles with two on top. That is 3n+2, or 3n+2 tiles.
The rule is y = 3n+2
Check : Figure 1 : 31+2 = 5
Figure 2 : 32+2 = 8
Figure 3 : 33+2 = 11
Figure 4 : 34+2 = 14
Example B
Solution:
71
Describe : Each gure is made of triangle tiles.
Solve : Figure 1 has 1 row of 3 tiles with one tile on top. That is 31+1, or 4 tiles.
Figure 2 has 2 rows of 3 tiles with one tile on top. That is 32+1, or 7 tiles.
Figure 10 will have 10 rows of 3 tiles with one on top. That is 310+1, or 31 tiles.
Figure n will have n rows of 3 tiles with one on top. That is 3n+1, or 3n+1 tiles.
Figure 2 : 32+1 = 7
Figure 3 : 33+1 = 10
Figure 4 : 34+1 = 13
Example C
Solution:
72
Describe : Each gure is made of square tiles.
Solve : Figure 1 has 1 row of 4 tiles with three tiles on top. That is 41+3, or 7 tiles.
Figure 2 has 2 rows of 4 tiles with three tiles on top. That is 42+3, or 5 tiles.
Figure 10 will have 10 rows of 4 tiles with three on top. That is 410+3, or 21 tiles.
Figure n will have n rows of 4 tiles with three on top. That is 4n+3, or 4n+3 tiles.
Figure 2 : 42+3 = 11
Figure 3 : 43+3 = 15
Figure 4 : 44+3 = 19
Guided Practice
For each problem below, look at the gures and answer the questions.
1.
2.
73
3.
Answers:
1. Figure 10 has 23 tiles. The rule is y = 2n+3.
2. Figure 10 has 24 tiles. The rule is y = 2n+4.
3. Figure 10 has 59 tiles. The rule is y = 5n+n1 or y = 6n1.
Homework
For each problem below, look at the gures and answer the questions.
1.
74
2.
3.
4.
5.
75
2.4. Graphing using Table of Values www.ck12.org
2.4
GraphingusingTable of Values
What You Will Learn
Graph a linear function using an equation.
Test if a point is on the line
Solve for y before graphing
Write equations and graph horizontal and vertical lines.
Graph a Linear Equation
A linear equation tells you a relationship between x and y. If you graph that equation, you will get a picture of how
x and y are related.
Example 1
A taxi fare costs more the further you travel. Taxis usually charge a fee on top of the per-mile charge to cover hire
of the vehicle. In this case, the taxi charges $3 as a set fee and $0.80 per mile traveled. Here is the equation linking
the cost in dollars (y) to hire a taxi and the distance traveled in miles (x).
y = 0.8x +3
Graph the equation and use your graph to estimate the cost of a seven mile taxi ride.
We will start by making a table of values. We will take a few values for x {0, 1, 2, 3, 4}, nd the corresponding y
values and then plot them. Since the question asks us to nd the cost for a seven mile journey, we will choose a scale
that will accommodate this.
TABLE 2.1:
x y
0 3
76
TABLE 2.1: (continued)
x y
1 3.8
2 4.6
3 5.4
4 6.2
The graph is shown to the right. To nd the cost of a seven mile journey we rst locate x = 7 on the horizontal axis
and draw a line up to our graph. Next we draw a horizontal line across to the y axis and read where it hits. It appears
to hit around half way between y = 8 and y = 9. Lets say it is 8.5.
Solution
A seven mile taxi ride would cost approximately $8.50 ($8.60 exactly).
There are a few interesting points that you should notice about this graph and the formula that generated it.
The graph is a straight line (this means that the equation is linear), although the function is discrete and will
graph as a series of points.
The graph crosses the yaxis at y = 3 (look at the equation - you will see a +3 in there!). This is the base cost
of the taxi.
Every time we move over by one square we move up by 0.8 squares (look at the coefcient of x in the
equation). This is the rate of charge of the taxi (cost per mile).
If we move over by three squares, we move up by 30.8 squares.
This graph is a function, it passes the vertical line test. This means it could also be written f (x) = 0.8x +3
Example 2
A student borrows $500 to buy a computer. She predicts that it can pay off the debt at a rate of $85 per month
according to the following equation..
y =85x +500
Graph the above equation and use your graph to predict when the debt will be fully paid.
First, we start with our table of values. We substitute in xvalues and calculate our corresponding yvalues.
TABLE 2.2:
x y
0 500
1 415
2 330
3 245
4 160
77
Then we plot our points and draw the line that goes through them.
Take note of the scale that has been chosen. There is no need to have any points above y = 500, but it is still wise to
allow a little extra.
We need to determine how many months (the x value) that it takes the debt (y value) to reach zero. We know that it
is greater than four (since at x = 4 the y value is still positive), so we need an x scale that goes well past x = 4. In
this case the x value runs from 0 to 12, though there are plenty of other choices that would work well.
To read the time that the debt is paid off, we simply read the point where the line hits y = 0 (the x axis). It looks as
if the line hits pretty close to x = 6. So the debt will denitely be paid off in six months.
Solution
The debt will be paid off in six months
Testing if a point is on the line
It is common to ask if a random point will be on a certain line. To do this, you put the given x and y values into the
equation and see if it comes out to be true. If it does, then the point is on the line.
Example 3
2x +y = 5 Is the point (1,2) on the line?
2(1) +(2) = 5 Replace x and y with 1 and 2
4 = 5 This is not true, so (1,2) is not on the line
Solving for y before graphing
All of the equations we have graphed so far have had y on the left side. Sometimes the equation is messier and we
need to use algebra to get y by itself.
Example 4
78
3x +y = 5
3x =3x Subtract 3x from both sides.
y = 53x
Now you could graph this using the same procedure as the previous section
Example 5
2y 5x = 8
+5x = +5x Add 5x to both sides.
2y = 8+5x
2y
2
=
8+5x
2
y = 4+
5
2
x
Graphs and Equations of Horizontal and Vertical Lines
Example 6
Mad-cabs have an unusual offer going on. They are charging $7.50 for a taxi ride of any length within the city
limits. Graph the function that relates the cost of hiring the taxi (y) to the length of the journey in miles (x).
To proceed, the rst thing we need is an equation. You can see from the problem that the cost of a journey does not
depend on the length of the journey. It should come as no surprise that the equation then, does not have x in it. In
fact, any value of x results in the same value of y (7.5). Here is the equation.
y = 7.5
The graph of this function is shown to the right. You can see that the graph y = 7.5 is simply a horizontal line.
79
Any time you see an equation of the form y = constant then the graph is a horizontal line that intercepts the yaxis
at the value of the constant.
Similarly, when you see an equation of the form x = constant then the graph is a vertical line that intercepts the
xaxis at the value of the constant. Notice that this a relation, and not a function because each x value (theres only
one in this case) corresponds to many (actually an innite number) y values.
Example 6
Plot the following graphs.
(a) y = 4
(b) y =4
(c) x = 4
(d) x =4
(a) y = 4 is a horizontal line that crosses the yaxis at 4
(b) y =4 is a horizontal line that crosses the yaxis at -4
(c) x = 4 is a vertical line that crosses the xaxis at 4
(d) x =4 is a vertical line that crosses the xaxis at -4
Example 7
Find an equation for the xaxis and the yaxis.
Look at the axes on any of the graphs from previous examples. We have already said that they intersect at the origin
(the point where x = 0 and y = 0). The following denition could easily work for each axis.
x axis: A horizontal line crossing the yaxis at zero.
y axis: A vertical line crossing the xaxis at zero.
So using example 3 as our guide, we could dene the xaxis as the line y = 0 and the yaxis as the line x = 0.
Video Overview of Graphing with Table of Values
80
MEDIA
Video Overview of Horizontal and Vertical Lines
MEDIA
Homework
1. Make a table of values for the following equations and then graph them.
a. y = 2x +7
b. y =
1
2
x 4
c. f (x) = 63x
d. y =
2
5
x 1
2. Solve the following equations for y, make a table and then graph them.
(a) x +y = 4
(b) 6 = 2y +x
(c) 5y = 4x
3. Check if the following points are on the suggested line
(a) Is the point (3,-2) on the line x+y=1?
(b) Is the point (1,5) on the line y=2x-3?
(c) Is the point (-6,7) on the line 3x=2y-4?
4. Graph the following lines
(a) y=2
(b) x=3
(c) x=-4
(d) y=0
81
2.5. Graphing Using Intercepts www.ck12.org
2.5
GraphingUsingIntercepts
What You Will Learn
Find intercepts of the graph of an equation.
Use intercepts to graph an equation.
Finding x and y Intercepts and Graphing
Example 1
Find the intercepts of the line y = 13x and use them to graph the function.
Find the y intercept by replacing x with 0. Substituting gives:
y = 130 = 13 (0, 13) is the x intercept.
Find the x intercept by replacing y with zero.
0 = 13x To isolate x subtract 13 from both sides.
13 =x Divide by1.
Solution
(13, 0) is the xintercept.
To draw the graph simply plot these points and join them with a line.
Example 2
Graph the following functions by nding intercepts.
a. y = 2x +3
82
b. y = 72x
c. 4x 2y = 8
d. 2x +3y =6
a. Find the yintercept by plugging in x = 0.
y = 2 0+3 = 3 The y intercept is (0, 3)
Find the xintercept by plugging in y = 0.
0 = 2x +3 Subtract 3 from both sides.
3 = 2x Divide by 2.
3
2
= x The x intercept is (1.5, 0).
b. Find the yintercept by substituting in x = 0.
y = 72 0 = 7 The y intercept is (0, 7).
83
2.5. Graphing Using Intercepts www.ck12.org
Find the xintercept by substituting in y = 0.
0 = 72x Subtract 7 from both sides.
7 =2x Divide by 2.
7
2
= x The x intercept is (3.5, 0).
c. Find the yintercept by substituting in x = 0.
4 02y = 8
2y = 8 Divide by 2.
y =4 The y intercept is (0, 4).
4x 2 0 = 8
4x = 8 Divide by 4.
x = 2 The x intercept is (2, 0).
84
d. Find the yintercept by substituting in x = 0.
2 0+3y =6
3y =6 Divide by 3.
y =2 The y intercept is (0, 2).
2x +3 0 =6
2x =6 Divide by 2.
x =3 The x intercept is (3, 0)
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
Find the x and y intercepts for the following equations and graph them
1. y = 3x 6
2. y =2x +4
3. y = 7x 21
4. 3x 4y =12
5. 2x +7y = 14
6. 5x +10y = 25
85
2.6. Slope and Rate of Change www.ck12.org
2.6
Slope andRate of Change
What You Will Learn
Find positive and negative slopes.
Recognize and nd slopes for horizontal and vertical lines.
Understand rates of change.
Interpret graphs and compare rates of change.
Introduction
We come across many examples of slope in everyday life. For example, a slope is in the pitch of a roof, the grade or
incline of a road, and the slant of a ladder leaning on a wall. In math, we use the word slope to dene steepness in a
particular way.
Slope =
distance moved vertically
distance moved horizontally
This is often reworded to be easier to remember:
Slope =
rise
run
Essentially, slope is the change in y if x increases by 1.
In the picture to the right, the slope would be the ratio of the height of the hill (the rise) to the horizontal length of
the hill (the run).
Slope =
3
4
= 0.75
If the car were driving to the right it would climb the hill. We say this is a positive slope. Anytime you see the graph
of a line that goes up as you move to the right, the slope is positive.
86
If the car were to keep driving after it reached the top of the hill, it may come down again. If the car is driving to
the right and descending, then we would say that the slope is negative. The picture at right has a negative slope of
-0.75.
Do not get confused! If the car turns around and drives back down the hill shown, we would still classify the slope
as positive. This is because the rise would be -3, but the run would be -4 (think of the xaxis - if you move from
right to left you are moving in the negative xdirection). Our ratio for moving left is:
Slope =
3
4
= 0.75 A negative divided by a negative is a positive.
So as we move from left to right, positive slopes increase while negative slopes decrease.
Find a Positive Slope
We have seen that a function with a positive slope increases in y as we increase x. A simple way to nd a value
for the slope is to draw a right angled triangle whose hypotenuse runs along the line. It is then a simple matter of
measuring the distances on the triangle that correspond to the rise (the vertical dimension) and the run (the horizontal
dimension).
Example 1
Find the slope of the line that passes through the points (1, 2) and (4, 7).
We already know how to graph a line if we are given two points. We simply plot the points and connect them with a
line. Look at the graph shown at right.
87
Since we already have coordinates for our right triangle, we can quickly work out that the rise would be 5 and the
run would be 3 (see diagram). Here is our slope.
Slope =
72
41
=
5
3
If you look closely at the calculations for the slope you will notice that the 7 and 2 are the ycoordinates of the two
points and the 4 and 1 are the xcoordinates. This suggests a pattern we can follow to get a general formula for the
slope between two points (x
1
, y
1
) and (x
2
, y
2
).
Slope between (x
1
, y
1
) and (x
2
, y
2
) =
y
2
y
1
x
2
x
1
or m =
y
x
In the second equation, the letter m denotes the slope (you will see this a lot in this chapter) and the Greek letter
delta () means change. So another way to express slope is change in y divided by change in x. In the next section,
you will see that it does not matter which point you choose as point 1 and which you choose as point 2.
Find a Negative Slope
Any function with a negative slope is simply a function that decreases as we increase x. If you think of the function
as the incline of a road a negative slope is a road that goes downhill as you drive to the right.
Example 2
Find the slopes of the following two lines.
Look at the lines. Both functions fall (or decrease) as we move from left to right. Both of these lines have a negative
slope.
Neither line passes through a great number of lattice points, but by looking carefully you can see a few points that
look to have integer coordinates. These points have been identied (with rings) and we will use these to determine
the slope. We will also do our calculations twice, to show that we get the same slope whichever way we choose point
1 and point 2.
For line A:
(x
1
, y
1
) = (6, 3) (x
2
, y
2
) = (5, 1) (x
1
, y
1
) = (5, 1) (x
2
, y
2
) = (6, 3)
m =
y
2
y
1
x
2
x
1
=
(1) (3)
(5) (6)
=
4
11
0.364 m =
y
2
y
1
x
2
x
1
=
(3) (1)
(6) (5)
=
4
11
0.364
88
For line B:
(x
1
, y
1
) = (4, 6) (x
2
, y
2
) = (4, 5) (x
1
, y
1
) = (4, 5) (x
2
, y
2
) = (4, 6)
m =
y
2
y
1
x
2
x
1
=
(5) (6)
(4) (4)
=
11
8
=1.375 m =
y
2
y
1
x
2
x
1
=
(6) (5)
(4) (4)
=
11
8
=1.375
You can see that whichever way you select the points, the answers are the same!
Solution
Line A has slope -0.364. Line B has slope -1.375.
Find the Slopes of Horizontal and Vertical lines
Example 3
Determine the slopes of the two lines on the graph at the right.
There are two lines on the graph. A(y = 3) and B(x = 5).
Lets pick two points on line A. say, (x
1
, y
1
) = (4, 3) and (x
2
, y
2
) = (5, 3) and use our equation for slope.
m =
y
2
y
1
x
2
x
1
=
(3) (3)
(5) (4)
=
0
9
= 0
If you think about it, this makes sense. If there is no change in y as we increase x then there is no slope, or to be
correct, a slope of zero. You can see that this must be true for all horizontal lines.
Horizontal lines (y = constant) all have a slope of 0.
Now consider line B. Pick two distinct points on this line and plug them in to the slope equation.
(x
1
, y
1
) = (5, 3) and (x
2
, y
2
) = (5, 4).
m =
y
2
y
1
x
2
x
1
=
(4) (3)
(5) (5)
=
7
0
A division by zero!
Divisions by zero lead to innities. In math we often use the term undened for any division by zero.
Vertical lines (x = constant) all have an innite (or undened) slope.
89
Find a Rate of Change
The slope of a function that describes real, measurable quantities is often called a rate of change. In that case, the
slope refers to a change in one quantity (y) per unit change in another quantity (x).
Example 4
Andrea has a part time job at the local grocery store. She saves for her vacation at a rate of $15 every week. Express
this rate as money saved per day and money saved per year.
Converting rates of change is fairly straight forward so long as you remember the equations for rate (i.e. the equations
for slope) and know the conversions. In this case 1 week = 7 days and 52 weeks = 1 year.
rate =
$15
1 week
1 week
7 days
=
$15
7 days
=
15
7
dollars per day $2.14 per day
rate =
$15
1 week
52 week
1 year
= $15
52
year
= $780 per year
Example 5
A candle has a starting length of 10 inches. Thirty minutes after lighting it, the length is 7 inches. Determine the rate
of change in length of the candle as it burns. Determine how long the candle takes to completely burn to nothing.
In this case, we will graph the function to visualize what is happening.
We have two points to start with. We know that at the moment the candle is lit (time = 0) the length of the candle is
10 inches. After thirty minutes (time = 30) the length is 7 inches. Since the candle length is a function of time we
will plot time on the horizontal axis, and candle length on the vertical axis. Here is a graph showing this information.
The rate of change of the candle is simply the slope. Since we have our two points (x
1
, y
1
) = (0, 10) and (x
2
, y
2
) =
(30, 7) we can move straight to the formula.
Rate of change =
y
2
y
1
x
2
x
1
=
(7 inches) (10 inches)
(30 minutes) (0 minutes)
=
3 inches
30 minutes
=0.1 inches per minute
The slope is negative. A negative rate of change means that the quantity is decreasing with time.
We can also convert our rate to inches per hour.
90
rate =
0.1 inches
1 minute

60 minutes
1 hour
=
6 inches
1 hour
=6 inches per hour
To nd the point when the candle reaches zero length we can simply read off the graph (100 minutes). We can use
the rate equation to verify this algebraically.
Length burned = rate time
0.1100 = 10
Since the candle length was originally 10 inches this conrms that 100 minutes is the correct amount of time.
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
1. Use the slope formula to nd the slope of the line that passes through each pair of points.
a. (-5, 7) and (0, 0)
b. (-3, -5) and (3, 11)
c. (3, -5) and (-2, 9)
d. (-5, 7) and (-5, 11)
e. (9, 9) and (-9, -9)
f. (3, 5) and (-2, 7)
2. Determine the slopes of the following lines.
FIGURE 2.1
91
FIGURE 2.2
FIGURE 2.3
4.
FIGURE 2.4
3. Using the following graph about Johns savings account, how much is he saving per month?
In 1999, Lydia purchased a house for $160,000. In 2013, the house was worth $210,000. Find the average
annual rate of change in dollars per year in the value of the house.
92
2.7
Graphs UsingSlope-Intercept Form
What Will You Learn
Identify the slope and yintercept of equations and graphs.
Graph an equation in slope-intercept form.
Understand what happens when you change the slope or intercept of a line.
Identify Slope and y-intercept
One of the most common ways of writing linear equations prior to graphing them is called slope-intercept form.
We have actually seen several slope-intercept equations so far. They take the following form:
y = mx +b where m is the slope and the point (0, b) is the yintercept.
We know that the yintercept is the point at which the line passes through the yaxis. The slope is a measure of the
steepness of the line. Hopefully, you can see that if we know one point on a line and the slope of that line, we know
what the line is. Being able to quickly identify the yintercept and slope will aid us in graphing linear functions.
Example 1
Identify the slope and yintercept of the following equations.
a) y = 3x +2
b) y = 0.5x 3
c) y =7x
d) y =4
Solution
a)
Comparing, we see that m = 3 and b = 2.
y = 3x +2 has a slope of 3 and a y intercept of (0, 2)
b)
has a slope of 0.5 and a y intercept of (0, -3).
93
2.7. Graphs Using Slope-Intercept Form www.ck12.org
Note that the yintercept is negative. The b term includes the sign of the operator in front of the number. Just
remember that y = 0.5x 3 is identical to y = 0.5x +(3) and is in the form y = mx +b.
c) At rst glance, this does not appear to t the slope-intercept form. To illustrate how we deal with this, let
us rewrite the equation.
We now see that we get a slope of -7 and a y intercept of (0, 0).
Note that the slope is negative. The (0, 0) intercept means that the line passes through origin.
d) Rewrite as y = 0x 4, giving us a slope of 0 and an intercept of (0, -4).
Remember:
When m < 0 the slope is negative.
For example, y =3x +2 has a slope of -3.
When b < 0 the intercept is below the x axis.
For example, y = 4x 2 has a yintercept of (0, -2).
When m = 0 the slope is zero and we have a horizontal line.
For example, y = 3 can be written as y = 0x +3.
When b = 0 the graph passes through the origin.
For example, y = 4x can be written as = 4x +0.
Example 2
Identify the slope and yintercept of the lines on the graph shown to the right.
94
The intercepts have been marked, as have a number of lattice points that lines pass through.
a. The yintercept is (0, 5). The line also passes through (2, 3).
slope m =
y
x
=
2
2
=1
b. The yintercept is (0, 2). The line also passes through (1, 5).
slope m =
y
x
=
3
1
= 3
c. The yintercept is (0, -1). The line also passes through (2, 3).
slope m =
y
x
=
4
2
= 2
d. The yintercept is (0, -3). The line also passes through (4, -4).
slope m =
y
x
=
1
4
=
1
4
or 0.25
Graph an Equation in Slope-Intercept Form
Once we know the slope and intercept of a line it is easy to graph it. Just remember what slope means. Lets look
back at this example from Lesson 4.1.
Example 3
Ahiga is trying to work out a trick that his friend showed him. His friend started by asking him to think of a number.
Then double it. Then add ve to what he got. Ahiga has written down a rule to describe the rst part of the trick. He
is using the letter x to stand for the number he thought of and the letter y to represent the result of applying the rule.
His rule is:
y = 2x +5
Help him visualize what is going on by graphing the function that this rule describes.
In that example, we constructed the following table of values.
95
TABLE 2.3:
x y
0 2.0+5 = 0+5 = 5
1 2.1+5 = 2+5 = 7
2 2.2+5 = 4+5 = 9
3 2.3+5 = 6+5 = 11
The rst entry gave us our y intercept (0, 5). The other points helped us graph the line.
We can now use our equation for slope, and two of the given points.
Slope between (x
1
, y
1
) = (0, 5) and (x
2
, y
2
) = (3, 11).
m =
y
2
y
1
x
2
x
1
=
115
30
=
6
3
= 2
Thus conrming that the slope, m = 2.
An easier way to graph this function is the slope-intercept method. We can now do this quickly, by identifying the
intercept and the slope.
Look at the graph we drew, the line intersects the yaxis at 5, and every time we move to the right by one unit, we
move up by two units.
So what about plotting a function with a negative slope? Just remember that a negative slope means the function
decreases as we increase x.
Example 4
Graph the following function. f (x) =3x +5
96
Identify yintercept b = 5
Plot intercept (0, 5)
Identify slope m =3
Draw a line through the intercept that has a slope of -3.
To do this last part remember that slope =
rise
run
so for every unit we move to the right the function increases by -3
(in other words, for every square we move right, the function comes down by 3).
Changing the Slope of a Line
Look at the graph on the right. It shows a number of lines with different slopes, but all with the same yintercept
(0, 3).
You can see all the positive slopes increase as we move from left to right while all functions with negative slopes fall
as we move from left to right.
Notice that the higher the value of the slope, the steeper the graph.
The graph of y = 2x +3 appears as the mirror image of y =2x +3. The two slopes are equal but opposite.
Fractional Slopes and Rise Over Run
Look at the graph of y = 0.5x +3. As we increase the x value by 1, the y value increases by 0.5. If we increase
the x value by 2, then the y value increases by 1. In fact, if you express any slope as a fraction, you can determine
how to plot the graph by looking at the numerator for the rise (keep any negative sign included in this term) and the
denominator for the run.
97
Example 5
Find integer values for the rise and run of following slopes then graph lines with corresponding slopes.
a. m = 3
b. m =2
c. m = 0.75
d. m =0.375
Solution:
a.
b.
c.
98
d.
Changing the Intercept of a Line
When we take an equation (such as y = 2x) and change the y intercept (leaving the slope intact) we see the following
pattern in the graph on the right.
Notice that changing the intercept simply translates the graph up or down. Take a point on the graph of y = 2x, such
as (1, 2). The corresponding point on y =2x+3 would be (1, 4). Similarly the corresponding point on the y =2x3
line would be (1, -1).
Lets look at some graphs of lines and see if we can nd the slope and y intercept.
Example 6
This line crosses the y axis at -4, so b = -4. To nd the slope, lets start at -4 and see the next place it crosses a grid
point, that coordinate is (1, -2). The slope between the y intercept and the point (1,-2) has a rise of 2 and a run of
one, so the slope is 2. Since the y intercept of this graph is -4 and the slope is 2, the equation is y = 2x 4.
Example 7
99
This line crosses the y axis at 6, so b = 6. To nd the slope, lets start at 6 and look for the next place it crosses a
grid point, that coordinate is (3, -4). The slope between the y intercept and the point (3, -4) has a rise of -2 and a
run of 3, so the slope is
2
3
. This means the equation of the line is y =
2
3
x +6
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
1. Identify the slope and yintercept for the following equations.
a. y = 2x +5
b. f (x) =
1
2
x +7
c. y = x
d. 3x 2y = 6
2. Put the following equations in slope-intercept form and graph them
a. y = 2x +5
b. x y = 3
c. 4y = x 8
d. 4x = 3y 12
3. Find the equations of the following lines
(a)
(b)
100
(c)
101
2.8. Writing Equations of Lines www.ck12.org
2.8
WritingEquations of Lines
What You WIll Learn
Write an equation given slope and y-intercept.
Write an equation given the slope and a point.
Write an equation given two points.
Write an Equation Given Slope and y-intercept
If you are given the slope and y-intercept of a line:
a. Start with the slopeintercept form of the line y = mx +b.
b. Substitute the given values of m and b into the equation.
Example 1
Write an equation with a slope of 4 and a y intercept of -3
Solution
We are given m = 4 and b =3. Substitute these values into the slopeintercept form y = mx +b.
y = 4x 3
You can also write an equation in slope-intercept form if you are given the graph of the line.
Example 2
Write the equation of each line in slopeintercept form.
a)
b)
102
c)
d)
a) The yintercept =4 and the slope =
5
2
. Substitue these values into the slopeintercept form y = mx +b.
Solution
y =
5
2
x 4
b) The yintercept = 2 and the slope =
3
1
. Substitute these values into the slopeintercept form y = mx +b.
103
Solution
y = 3x +2
c) The yintercept = 4 and the slope =
1
1
Solution
y =x +4
d) The yintercept =2 and the slope =
1
2
Solution
y =
1
2
x 2.
Write an Equation Given the Slope and a Point
Often, we dont know the value of the yintercept, but we know the value of y for a non-zero value of x. In this case
we can still use the slopeintercept form to nd the equation of the line.
For example, we are told that the slope of a line is two and that the line passes through the point (1, 4). To nd the
equation of the line, we start with the slopeintercept form of a line.
y = mx +b
Substitute the value of the slope.
We dont know the value of b but we know that the slope is two, and that point (1, 4) is on this line. Where the x
value is one, and the y value is four. We put this point in the equation and solve for b.
4 = 2(1) +b
4 = 2+b
2 =2
2 = b
Therefore the equation of this line is y = 2x +2.
If you are given the slope and a point on the line:
b. Substitute the given value of m into the equation.
c. Substitute the x and y values of the given point and solve for b.
d. Substitute the value of b into the equation.
Example 3
Write the equation of the line in slopeintercept form.
a) The slope of the line is 4 and the line contains point (-1, 5).
b) The slope of the line is
2
3
and the line contains point (2, -2).
c) The slope of the line is -3 and the line contains point (3, -5).
Solution
104
a)
Start with the slope intercept form of the line y = mx +b
Substitute the slope. y = 4x +b
Put point (1, 5) into the equation. 5 = 4(1) +b b = 9
Substitute the value of b into the equation. y = 4x +9
b)
Substitute the slope. y =
2
3
x +b
Put point (2, 2) into the equation. 2 =
2
3
(2) +b b =2+
4
3
=
2
3
Substitute the value of b into the equation. y =
2
3
x
2
3
c)
Substitute the slope. y =3x +b
Put in point (3, 5) into the equation. 5 =3(3) +b b = 4
Substitute the value of b into the equation. y =3x +4
Write an Equation Given Two Points
One last case is when we are just given two points on the line and we are asked to write the line of the equation in
slopeintercept form.
For example, we are told that the line passes through the points (-2, 3) and (5, 2). To nd the equation of the line we
start with the slopeintercept form of a line
y = mx +b
Since we dont know the slope, we nd it using the slope formula m =
y
2
y
1
x
2
x
1
.
Now substitute the x
1
and x
2
and the y
1
and y
2
values into the slope formula to solve for the slope.
m =
23
5(2)
=
1
7
We substitute the value of the slope into the slopeintercept form y =
1
7
x +b
We dont know the value of b but we know two points on the line. We can substitute either point into the equation
and solve for b. Lets use point (-2, 3).
Therefore, the equation of this line is y =
1
7
x +
19
7
.
If you are given two points on the line:
105
a. Start with the slopeintercept form of the line y = mx +b
b. Use the two points to nd the slope using the slope formula m =
y
2
y
1
x
2
x
1
.
c. Substitute the given value of m into the equation.
d. Substitute the x and y values of one of the given points into the equation and solve for b.
e. Substitute the value of b into the equation.
f. Substitute the other point into the equation to check the values of m and b.
Example 4
Write the equations of each line in slopeintercept form.
a) The line contains the points (3, 2) and (-2, 4).
b) The line contains the points (-4, 1) and (-2, 3).
Solution:
a)
b. Find the slope of the line. m =
y
2
y
1
x
2
x
1
=
42
23
=
2
5
c. Substitute the value of the slope. y =
2
5
x +b
d. Substitute point (3, 2) into the equation. 2 =
2
5
(3) +b b = 2+
6
5
=
16
5
e. Substitute the value of b into the equation. y =
2
5
x +
16
5
f. Substitute point (-2, 4) into the equation to check. 4 =
2
5
(2) +
16
5
=
4
5
+
16
5
=
20
5
= 4
b)
b. Find the slope of the line. m =
y
2
y
1
x
2
x
1
=
31
2(4)
=
2
2
= 1
c. Substitute the value of the slope. y = x +b
d. Substitute point (-2, 3) into the equation. 3 =2+b b = 5
e. Substitute the value of b into the equation. y = x +5
f. Substitute point (-4, 1) into the equation to check. 1 =4+5 = 1
Video Overview of Writing an Equation with Slope and Intercept (from graph)
MEDIA
Video Overview of Writing an Equation Given a Point and the Slope
106
MEDIA
Video Overview of Writing an Equation Given Two Points
MEDIA
Homework
Part 1
Find the equation of the line in slopeintercept form.
1. The line has slope of 7 and yintercept of -2.
2. The line has slope of -5 and yintercept of 6.
3. The line has slope of
1
4
and contains point (4, -1).
4. The line has slope of
2
3
and contains point
_
1
2
, 1
_
.
5. The line has slope of -1 and contains point
_
4
5
, 0
_
.
6. The line contains points (2, 6) and (5, 0).
7. The line contains points (5, -2) and (8, 4).
8. The line contains points (3, 5) and (-3, 0).
9. The line contains points (10, 15) and (12, 20).
Part 2
Write the equation of each line in slope-intercept form.
1.
107
2.
Applications
1. To buy a car, Andrew puts a down payment of $1500 and pays $350 per month in installments. Write an
equation describing this problem in slope-intercept form. How much money has Andrew paid at the end of
one year?
2. Anne transplants a rose seedling in her garden. She wants to track the growth of the rose so she measures its
height every week. On the third week, she nds that the rose is 10 inches tall and on the eleventh week she
nds that the rose is 14 inches tall. Assuming the rose grows linearly with time, write an equation describing
this problem in slope-intercept form. What was the height of the rose when Anne planted it?
3. Ravi hangs from a giant spring whose length is 5 m. When his child Nimi hangs from the spring its length is 2
m. Ravi weighs 160 lbs. and Nimi weighs 40 lbs. Write the equation for this problem in slope-intercept form.
What should we expect the length of the spring to be when his wife Amardeep, who weighs 140 lbs., hangs
from it?
108
2.9
Parallel andPerpendicular Lines
What You Will Learn
Properties of parallel and perpendicular lines.
Determining whether lines are parallel or perpendicular
Writing equations of parallel and perpendicular lines.
Properties of Parallel and Perpendicular Lines
Lets start by looking at a graph of two parallel lines.
The two lines will never meet because they are parallel. We can clearly see that the two lines have different
yintercepts, more specically 6 and -4.
How about the slopes of the lines? Are they related in any way? Because the lines never meet, they must rise at the
same rate. This means that the slopes of the two lines are the same.
Indeed, if we calculate the slopes of the lines, we nd the following results.
Line A: m =
62
0(2)
=
4
2
= 2
Line B: m =
0(4)
20
=
4
2
= 2
For Parallel Lines: the slopes are the same, m
1
= m
2
, and the yintercepts are different.
109
2.9. Parallel and Perpendicular Lines www.ck12.org
Now lets look at a graph of two perpendicular lines.
We nd that we cant say anything about the yintercepts. In this example, they are different, but they would be the
same if the lines intersected at the yintercept.
Now we want to gure out if there is any relationship between the slopes of the two lines.
First of all we see that the slopes must have opposite signs, one negative and one positive.
To nd the slope of line A, we pick two points on the line and draw the blue (upper) right triangle. The legs of the
triangle represent the rise and the run.
Looking at the gure m
1
=
b
a
To nd the slope of line B, we pick two points on the line and draw the red (lower) right triangle. If we look at the
gure, we see that the two triangles are identical, only rotated by 90
.
Looking at the diagram m
2
=
a
b
For Perpendicular Lines: the slopes are negative reciprocals of each other. m
1
=
1
m
2
or m
1
m
2
=1
Determine Whether Lines are Parallel or Perpendicular
You can nd whether lines are parallel or perpendicular by comparing the slopes of the lines. If you are given points
on the line you can nd the slope using the formula. If you are given the equations of the lines, rewrite each equation
in a form so that it is easy to read the slope, such as the slope-intercept form.
Example 1
110
Determine whether the lines are parallel or perpendicular or neither.
a) One line passes through points (2, 11) and (-1, 2); another line passes through points (0, -4) and (-2, -10).
b) One line passes through points (-2, -7) and (1, 5); another line passes through points (4, 1) and (-8, 4).
c) One lines passes through points (3, 1) and (-2, -2); another line passes through points (5, 5) and (4, -6).
Solution
Find the slope of each line and compare them.
a) m
1
=
211
12
=
9
3
= 3 and m
2
=
10(4)
20
=
6
2
= 3
The slopes are equal, so the lines are parallel.
b) m
1
=
5(7)
1(2)
=
12
3
= 4 and m
2
=
41
84
=
3
12
=
1
4
The slopes are negative reciprocals of each other, so the lines are perpendicular.
c) m
1
=
21
23
=
3
5
=
3
5
and m
2
=
65
45
=
11
1
= 11
The slopes are not the same or negative reciprocals of each other, so the lines are neither parallel nor perpendicular.
Example 2
Determine whether the lines are parallel or perpendicular or neither.
a) Line 1: 3x +4y = 2 Line 2: 8x 6y = 5
b) Line 1: 2x = y 10 Line 2: y =2x +5
c) Line 1: 7y +1 = 7x Line 2: x +5 = y
Solution
Write each equation in slope-intercept form.
a) Line 1 3x +4y = 2 4y =3x +2 y =
3
4
x +
1
2
slope =
3
4
Line 2: 8x 6y = 5 8x 5 = 6y y =
8
6
x
5
6
y =
4
3
x
5
6
slope =
4
3
The slopes are negative reciprocals of each other, so the lines are perpendicular to each other.
b) Line 1 2x = y 10 y = 2x +10 slope = 2
Line 2 y =2x +5 slope =2
The slopes are not the same or negative reciprocals of each other, so the lines are neither parallel nor perpendicular.
c) Line 1 7y +1 = 7x 7y = 7x 1 y = x
1
7
slope = 1
Line 2: x +5 = y y = x +5 slope = 1
The slopes are the same so the lines are parallel.
Writing Equations of Parallel and Perpendicular lines
You can nd the equations of lines that are parallel or perpendicular to each other by using what you know about the
relationships of their slopes.
Example 1
Find the equation of a line that goes through the point (-2, 4) and is parallel to the line y =
1
2
x +5
We learned in the last section how to nd the equation of a line that had a given slope and went through a point.
Here, we are given a parallel line, so we can use our knowledge of parallel lines to determine that the slope we
should use is
1
2
. We can now nd the equation of the line.
111
2.9. Parallel and Perpendicular Lines www.ck12.org
Substitute the slope. y =
1
2
x +b
Put point (2, 4) into the equation. 4 =
1
2
(2) +b b = 5
Substitute the value of b into the equation. y =
1
2
x +5
Asimilar procedure would be used for perpendicular lines, except this time the slope would be the opposite reciprocal
of the given line.
Video Overview of Parallel and Perpendicular Lines
MEDIA
Homework
Part 1
Determine whether the lines are parallel, perpendicular or neither.
1. One line passes through points (-1, 4) and (2, 6); another line passes through points (2, -3) and (8, 1).
2. One line passes through points (4, -3) and (-8, 0); another line passes through points (-1, -1) and (-2, 6).
3. One line passes through points (-3, 14) and (1, -2); another line passes through points (0, -3) and (-2, 5).
4. One line passes through points (3, 3) and (-6, -3); another line passes through points (2, -8) and (-6, 4).
5. Line 1: 4y +x = 8 Line 2: 12y +3x = 1
6. Line 1: 5y +3x = 1 Line 2: 6y +10x =3
7. Line 1: 2y 3x +5 = 0 Line 2: y +6x =3
Part 2
Find the equations of the following lines
1. Parallel to the line y = 3x 2 and through the point (5, -3)
2. Perpendicular to the line y =
4
5
x +124 and throught the point (8, 1)
3. Parallel to the line 5y 15 = 2x and through the point (15,7)
4. Perpendicular to the line 3x 8y = 16 and through the point (-6,4)
112
2.10
GraphingLinear Inequalities
What You Will Learn
Graph linear inequalities in one variable on the coordinate plane.
Graph linear inequalities in two variables.
Solve real-world problems using linear inequalities
Graph Linear Inequalities in One Variable in the Coordinate Plane
In previous sections, we graphed inequalities in one variable on the number line. We can also graph inequalities in
one variable on the coordinate plane. We just need to remember that when we graph an equation of the type x = a
we get a vertical line and when we graph an equation of the type y = b we get a horizontal line.
Example 1
Graph the inequality x > 4 on the coordinate plane.
Solution
First, lets remember what the solution to x > 4 looks like on the number line.
The solution to this inequality is the set of all real numbers x that are bigger than four but not including four. The
solution is represented by a line.
In two dimensions we are also concerned with values of y, and the solution to x > 4 consists of all coordinate points
for which the value of x is bigger than four. The solution is represented by the half plane to the right of x = 4.
The line x = 4 is dashed because the equal sign is not included in the inequality and therefore points on the line are
not included in the solution.
Example 2
113
2.10. Graphing Linear Inequalities www.ck12.org
Graph the inequality y 6 on the coordinate plane.
Solution
The solution is all coordinate points for which the value of y is less than or equal than 6. This solution is represented
by the half plane below the line y = 6.
The line y =6 is solid because the equal sign is included in the inequality sign and the points on the line are included
in the solution.
Graph Linear Inequalities in Two Variables
The general procedure for graphing inequalities in two variables is as follows.
Step 1: Re-write the inequality in slope-intercept form y = mx+b. Writing the inequality in this form lets you know
the direction of the inequality
Step 2 Graph the line of equation y = mx +b using your favorite method. (For example, plotting two points, using
slope and yintercept, using yintercept and another point, etc.). Draw a dashed line if the equal sign in not included
and a solid line if the equal sign is included.
Step 3 Shade the half plane above the line if the inequality is greater than. Shade the half plane under the line if the
inequality is less than.
Example 5
Graph the inequality y 2x 3.
Solution
Step 1
The inequality is already written in slope-intercept form y 2x 3.
Step 2
Graph the equation y = 2x 3 using slope intercept form.
Step 3
Graph the inequality. We shade the plane above the line because y is greater than. The value 2x 3 denes the line.
The line is solid because the equal sign is included.
Example 6
Graph the inequality 5x 2y > 4.
114
Solution
Step 1
Rewrite the inequality in slope-intercept form.
2y >5x +4
y >
5
2
x 2
Notice that the inequality sign changed direction due to division of negative sign.
Step 2
Graph the equation y >
5
2
x 2 using slope intercept form.
Step 3
Graph the inequality. We shade the plane below the line because the inequality in slope-intercept form is less than.
The line is dashed because the equal sign in not included.
Example 7
Find the equation of this graph
First we will nd the equation of the line at the border of this graph, then we will think about the shading. The line
crosses the y axis at 3, so b = 3. The slope up to the next grid point has a rise of 2 and a run of one, so the slope is
2. This means the equation of the line at the border is y = 2x +3. The shading goes below the line and it is dotted,
so the inequality in the graph is y 2x +3.
Solve Real-World Problems Using Linear Inequalities
In this section, we see how linear inequalities can be used to solve real-world applications.
115
Example 8
A pound of coffee blend is made by mixing two types of coffee beans. One type costs $9 per pound and another type
costs $7 per pound. Find all the possible mixtures of weights of the two different coffee beans for which the blend
costs $8.50 per pound or less.
Solution
Lets apply our problem solving plan to solve this problem.
Step 1:
Let x = weight of $9 per pound coffee beans in pounds
Let y = weight of $7 per pound coffee beans in pounds
Step 2
The cost of a pound of coffee blend is given by 9x +7y.
We are looking for the mixtures that cost $8.50 or less.
We write the inequality 9x +7y 8.50.
Step 3
To nd the solution set, graph the inequality 9x +7y 8.50.
Rewrite in slope-intercept y 1.29x +1.21.
Graph y =1.29x +1.21 by making a table of values.
TABLE 2.4:
x y
0 1.21
1 -0.08
2 -1.37
Step 4
Graph the inequality. The line will be solid. We shade below the line.
Notice that we show only the rst quadrant of the coordinate plane because the weight values should be positive.
The blue-shaded region tells you all the possibilities of the two bean mixtures that will give a total less than or equal
to $8.50.
116
Example 9
Julian has a job as an appliance salesman. He earns a commission of $60 for each washing machine he sells and
$130 for each refrigerator he sells. How many washing machines and refrigerators must Julian sell in order to make
$1000 or more in commission?
Solution Lets apply our problem solving plan to solve this problem.
Step 1
Let x = number of washing machines Julian sells
Let y = number of refrigerators Julian sells
Step 2
The total commission is given by the expression 60x +130y.
We are looking for total commission of $1000 or more. We write the inequality. 60x +130y 1000.
Step 3
To nd the solution set, graph the inequality 60x +130y 1000.
Rewrite it in slope-intercept y .46x +7.7.
Graph y =.46x +7.7 by making a table of values.
TABLE 2.5:
x y
0 7.7
2 6.78
4 5.86
Step 4
Graph the inequality. The line will be solid. We shade above the line.
Notice that we show only the rst quadrant of the coordinate plane because dollar amounts should be positive. Also,
only the points with integer coordinates are possible solutions.
Video Overview
117
MEDIA
Homework
Graph the following inequalities on the coordinate plane.
1. x < 20
2. y 5
3. y 4x +3
4. y >
x
2
6
5. 3x 4y 12
6. x +7y < 5
7. 6x +5y > 1
8. y +5 4x +10
9. x
1
2
y 5
10. 30x +5y < 100
11. What is the equation of the following graph?
FIGURE 2.5
12. An ounce of gold costs $670 and an ounce of silver costs $13. Find all possible weights of silver and gold that
makes an alloy that costs less than $600 per ounce.
13. A phone company charges 50 cents cents per minute during the daytime and 10 cents per minute at night.
How many daytime minutes and night time minutes would you have to use to pay more than $20 over a 24
hour period?
118
2.11
Graphs of Absolute Value Equations
What You Will Learn
Graph an equation with absolute value
Graphing Absolute Value Equations
Absolute value equations can be graphed in a way that is similar to graphing linear equations. By making a table of
values, you can get a clear picture of what an absolute value equation will look like.
Example A
Graph the solutions to y =[x[.
Solution:
Make a table of values and graph the coordinate pairs.
TABLE 2.6:
x y =[x[
2 [2[= 2
1 [1[= 1
0 [0[= 0
1 [1[= 1
2 [2[= 2
3 [3[= 3
The Shape of an Absolute Value Graph
Every absolute value graph will make a V-shaped gure. It consists of two pieces: one with a negative slope
119
2.11. Graphs of Absolute Value Equations www.ck12.org
and one with a positive slope. The point of their intersection is called the vertex. An absolute value graph is
symmetrical, meaning it can be folded in half on its line of symmetry. The function y =[x[ is the parent function,
or most basic function, of absolute value functions.
Example B
Graph the solutions to y =[x 1[.
Solution:
Make a table of values and plot the ordered pairs. In order to efciently make the table, it is best to put the vertex in
the center of the table. The vertex will always be where the value inside the absolute value is zero, we can nd that
by setting x 1 equal to zero. We nd that x = 1, so we put that number in the center of the table
TABLE 2.7:
x y =[x 1[
1 [11[= 2
0 [01[= 1
1 [11[= 0
2 [21[= 1
3 [31[= 2
The graph of this function is seen below in green, graphed with the parent function in red.
Notice that the green function is just the parent function shifted over. The vertex is shifted over 1 unit to the right. It
is also possible to graph an absolute value function by considering the translation of the vertex and graphing the
equation using the parent function y =[x[.
Example C
Graph y =[x 3[ by determining the translation of the vertex.
120
Solution: The vertex in this case is translated three units to the right. Starting from the point (3,0), draw the graph
of the graph y =[x[
Example D
Graph y =[x[5.
Solution: Be careful! Here, the minus 5 is not inside the absolute value. If there is a constant value outside of the
absolute value sign, that tells you about translations that are up and down instead of left and right. In this case, the
vertex will move down 5.
Example E
Graph y =3[x +2[1.
Solution:
Start by nding the horizontal translation by looking at the situation inside the absolute value.
0 =[x +2[x =2
This means that the vertex moves two units to the left.
121
2.11. Graphs of Absolute Value Equations www.ck12.org
The constant value outside the absolute value is -1, this means the vertex shifts down 1.
There is a -3 in front of the absolute value. The negative sign ips the graph upside down so the vertex is on the
top. The slope of the line changes from
1
1
to
3
1
due to the "3"
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
In 1 11, graph the function.
1. y =[x +3[
2. y =[x 6[
3. y =[4x +2[
4. y =[x 4[ 3
5. [x 4[= y
6. [x 2[= y
7. y =[x[2
8. y = 2[x[+3
9. y =4[x +2[+3
10. y =[x +1[+5
122
2.12
Fittinga Line toData
What You Will Learn
Make a scatter plot.
Fit a line to data and write an equation for that line.
Perform linear regression with a graphing calculator.
Solve real-world problems using linear models of scattered data.
Make a Scatter Plot
A scatter plot is a plot of all the ordered pairs in the table. This means that a scatter plot is a relation, and not
necessarily a function. Also, the scatter plot is discrete, as it is a set of distinct points. Even when we expect the
relationship we are analyzing to be linear, we should not expect that all the points would t perfectly on a straight
line. Rather, the points will be scattered about a straight line.
Example 1
Make a scatter plot of the following ordered pairs: (0, 2), (1, 4.5), (2, 9), (3, 11), (4, 13), (5, 18), (6, 19.5)
Solution
We make a scatter plot by graphing all the ordered pairs on the coordinate axis.
123
2.12. Fitting a Line to Data www.ck12.org
Fit a Line to Data
Notice that the points look like they might be part of a straight line, although they would not t perfectly on a
straight line. If the points were perfectly lined up it would be quite easy to draw a line through all of them and nd
the equation of that line. However, if the points are scattered, we try to nd a line that best ts the data.
You see that we can draw many lines through the points in our data set. These lines have equations that are very
different from each other. We want to use the line that is closest to all the points on the graph. The best candidate in
our graph is the red line A. We want to minimize the sum of the distances from the point to the line of t as you can
see in the gure below.
Finding this line mathematically is a complex process and is not usually done by hand. We usually eye-ball the
line or nd it exactly by using a graphing calculator or computer software such as Excel. The line in the graph above
is eye-balled, which means we drew a line that comes closest to all the points in the scatter plot.
When we use the line of best t we are assuming that there is a continuous linear function that will approximate the
discrete values of the scatter plot. We can use this to interpret unknown values.
Write an Equation for a Line of Best Fit
Once you draw the line of best t, you can nd its equation by using two points on the line. Finding the equation of
the line of best t is also called linear regression.
Caution: Make sure you dont get caught making a common mistake. In many instances the line of best t will not
pass through many or any of the points in the original data set. This means that you cant just use two random points
from the data set. You need to use two points that are on the line.
We see that two of the data points are very close to the line of best t, so we can use these points to nd the equation
of the line (1, 4.5) and (3, 11).
124
Start with the slope-intercept form of a line y = mx +b.
Find the slope m =
114.5
31
=
6.5
2
= 3.25
Then y = 3.25x +b
Plug (3, 11) into the equation. 11 = 3.25(3) +b b = 1.25
The equation for the line that ts the data best is y = 3.25x +1.25.
Perform Linear Regression with a Graphing Calculator
Drawing a line of t can be a good approximation but you cant be sure that you are getting the best results because
you are guessing where to draw the line. Two people working with the same data might get two different equations
because they would be drawing different lines. To get the most accurate equation for the line, we can use a graphing
calculator. The calculator uses a mathematical algorithm to nd the line that minimizes the sum of the squares.
Example 2
Use a graphing calculator to nd the equation of the line of best t for the following data (3, 12), (8, 20), (1, 7), (10,
23), (5, 18), (8, 24), (11, 30), (2, 10).
Solution
Step 1 Input the data in your calculator.
Press [STAT] and choose the [EDIT] option.
Input the data into the table by entering the x values in the rst column and the y values in the second column.
125
Step 2 Find the equation of the line of best t.
Press [STAT] again use right arrow to select [CALC] at the top of the screen.
Chose option number 4: LinReg(ax +b) and press [ENTER]
The calculator will display LinReg(ax +b)
Press [ENTER] and you will be given the a and b values.
Here a represents the slope and b represents the yintercept of the equation. The linear regression line is y =
2.01x +5.94.
Step 3 Draw the scatter plot.
To draw the scatter plot press [STATPLOT] [2nd] [Y=].
Choose Plot 1 and press [ENTER].
Press the On option and choose the Type as scatter plot (the one highlighted in black).
Make sure that the X list and Y list names match the names of the columns of the table in Step 1.
Choose the box or plus as the mark since the simple dot may make it difcult to see the points.
Press [GRAPH] and adjust the window size so you can see all the points in the scatter plot.
126
Step 4 Draw the line of best t through the scatter plot.
Press [Y=]
Enter the equation of the line of best t that you just found Y
1
= 2.01X +5.94
Press [GRAPH].
Solve Real-World Problems Using Linear Models of Scattered Data
In a real-world problem, we use a data set to nd the equation of the line of best t. We can then use the equation to
predict values of the dependent or independent variables. The usual procedure is as follows.
a. Make a scatter plot of the given data.
b. Draw a line of best t.
c. Find an equation of a line either using two points on the line or the TI-83/84 calculator.
d. Use the equation to answer the questions asked in the problem.
Example 3
Gal is training for a 5 K race (a total of 5000 meters, or about 3.1 miles). The following table shows her times for
each month of her training program. Assume here that her times will decrease in a straight line with time (does that
seem like a good assumption?) Find an equation of a line of t. Predict her running time if her race is in August.
TABLE 2.8:
Month Month number Average time (minutes)
January 0 40
February 1 38
March 2 39
April 3 38
May 4 33
June 5 30
Solution
127
Lets make a scatter plot of Gals running times. The independent variable, x, is the month number and the dependent
variable, y, is the running time in minutes. We plot all the points in the table on the coordinate plane.
Draw a line of t.
Choose two points on the line (0, 41) and (4, 34).
Find the equation of the line.
m =
3441
40
=
7
4
=1
3
4
y =
7
4
x +b
41 =
7
2
(0) +b b = 41
y =
7
4
x +41
In a real-world problem, the slope and yintercept have a physical signicance.
Slope =
number of minutes
month
128
Since the slope is negative, the number of minutes Gal spends running a 5 K race decreased as the months pass. The
slope tells us that Gals running time decreases by
7
4
or 1.75 minutes per month.
The yintercept tells us that when Gal started training, she ran a distance of 5 K in 41 minutes, which is just an
estimate, since the actual time was 40 minutes.
The problem asks us to predict Gals running time in August. Since June is assigned to month number ve, then
August will be month number seven. We plug x = 7 into the equation of the line of best t.
y =
7
4
(7) +41 =
49
4
+41 =
49
4
+
164
4
=
115
4
= 28
3
4
The equation predicts that Gal will be running the 5 K race in 28.75 minutes.
In this solution, we eye-balled a line of best t. Using a graphing calculator, we found this equation for a line of t
y =2.2x +43.7.
If we plug x = 7 in this equation, we get y = 2.2(7) +43.7 = 28.3. This means that Gal ran her race in 28.3
minutes. You see that the graphing calculator gives a different equation and a different answer to the question. The
graphing calculator result is more accurate but the line we drew by hand still gives a good approximation to the
result.
Example 4
Baris is testing the burning time of BriteGlo candles. The following table shows how long it takes to burn candles
of different weights. Assume its a linear relation and we can then use a line to t the data. If a candle burns for 95
hours, what must be its weight in ounces?
TABLE 2.9: Candle Burning Time Based on Candle Weight
Candle weight (oz) Time (hours)
2 15
3 20
4 35
5 36
10 80
16 100
22 120
26 180
Solution
129
Lets make a scatter plot of the data. The independent variable, x, is the candle weight in ounces and the dependent
variable, y, is the time in hours it takes the candle to burn. We plot all the points in the table on the coordinate plane.
Then we draw the line of best t.
Now pick two points on the line (0,0) and (30, 200).
Find the equation of the line:
m =
200
30
=
20
3
y =
20
3
x +b
0 =
20
3
(0) +b b = 0
y =
20
3
x
In this problem the slope is burning time divided by candle weight. A slope of
20
3
= 6
2
3
tells us for each extra ounce
of candle weight, the burning time increases by 6
2
3
hours.
A yintercept of zero tells us that a candle of weight 0 oz will burn for 0 hours.
The problem asks for the weight of a candle that burns 95 hours. We are given the value of y = 95. We need to use
the equation to nd the corresponding value of x.
y =
20
3
x =
20
3
x x =
285
20
=
57
4
= 14
1
4
A candle that burns 95 hours weighs 14.25 oz.
The graphing calculator gives the linear regression equation as y = 6.1x +5.9 and a result of 14.6 oz.
Notice that we can use the line of best t to estimate the burning time for a candle of any weight.
Video Overview
130
MEDIA
Homework
For each data set, draw the scatter plot and nd the equation of the line of best t for the data set by hand.
1. (57, 45) (65, 61) (34, 30) (87, 78) (42, 41) (35, 36) (59, 35) (61, 57) (25, 23) (35, 34)
2. (32, 43) (54, 61) (89, 94) (25, 34) (43, 56) (58, 67) (38, 46) (47, 56) (39, 48)
3. (12, 18) (5, 24) (15, 16) (11, 19) (9, 12) (7, 13) (6, 17) (12, 14)
4. (3, 12) (8, 20) (1, 7) (10, 23) (5, 18) (8, 24) (2, 10)
For each data set, use a graphing calculator to nd the equation of the line of best t.
1. (57, 45) (65, 61) (34, 30) (87, 78) (42, 41) (35, 36) (59, 35) (61, 57) (25, 23) (35, 34)
2. (32, 43) (54, 61) (89, 94) (25, 34) (43, 56) (58, 67) (38, 46) (47, 56) (95, 105) (39, 48)
3. (12, 18) (3, 26) (5, 24) (15, 16) (11, 19) (0, 27) (9, 12) (7, 13) (6, 17) (12, 14)
4. Shiva is trying to beat the samosa eating record. The current record is 53.5 samosas in 12 minutes. The
following table shows how many samosas he eats during his daily practice for the rst week of his training.
Will he be ready for the contest if it occurs two weeks from the day he started training? What are the meanings
of the slope and the yintercept in this problem?
TABLE 2.10:
Day No. of Samosas
1 30
2 34
3 36
4 36
5 40
6 43
7 45
1. Nitisha is trying to nd the elasticity coefcient of a Superball. She drops the ball from different heights and
measures the maximum height of the resulting bounce. The table below shows her data. Draw a scatter plot
and nd the equation. What is the initial height if the bounce height is 65 cm? What are the meanings of the
slope and the yintercept in this problem?
TABLE 2.11:
Initial height (cm) Bounce height (cm)
30 22
35 26
40 29
45 34
50 38
131
Initial height (cm) Bounce height (cm)
55 40
60 45
65 50
70 52
1. The following table shows the median California family income from 1995 to 2002 as reported by the US
Census Bureau. Draw a scatter plot and nd the equation. What would you expect the median annual income
of a Californian family to be in year 2010? What are the meanings of the slope and the yintercept in this
problem?
TABLE 2.12:
Year Income
1995 53807
1996 55217
1997 55209
1998 55415
1999 63100
2000 63206
2001 63761
2002 65766
132
2.13
ProblemSolvingwithLinear Models
What You Will Learn
How to use linear regression to model real world situations
A model is an equation that best describes the data graphed in the scatter plot. Sometimes the data ts a linear
model, often the situation is more complicated and other types of models are necessary. This is a very important
subject in mathematics. It is often useful to have a mathematical model to describe a real life situation. If you know
many different types of math equations, you can model many of the situations that actually occur in the world.
Example A
Dana heard something very interesting at school. Her teacher told her that if you divide the circumference of a
circle by its diameter you always get the same number. She tested this statement by measuring the circumference
and diameter of several circular objects. The following table shows her results.
From this data, estimate the circumference of a circle whose diameter is 12 inches.
Solution:
Begin by creating a scatter plot and drawing the line of best t.
TABLE 2.13: Diameter and Circumference of Various Objects
Object Diameter (inches) Circumference (inches)
Table 53 170
Soda can 2.25 7.1
Cocoa tin 4.2 12.6
Plate 8 25.5
Straw 0.25 1.2
Propane tank 13.3 39.6
Hula hoop 34.25 115
133
2.13. Problem Solving with Linear Models www.ck12.org
Find the equation of the line of best t using points (0.25, 1.2) and (8, 25.5).
Slope m =
25.512
80.25
=
24.3
7.75
= 3.14
amp; y = 3.14x +b
1.2 = 3.14(0.25) +b b = 0.42
Equation y = 3.14x +0.42
Diameter = 12 inches y = 3.14(12) +0.42 = 38.1 inches
In this problem, the slope = 3.14. This number should be very familiar to youit is the number pi rounded to
the hundredths place. Theoretically, the circumference of a circle divided by its diameter is always the same and it
equals 3.14 or .
Example B
Using Danas data from Example A, estimate the circumference of a circle whose diameter is 25 inches.
Solution:
The equation y = 3.14x +0.42 of the relationship between diameter and circumference from Example A applies
here.
A circle with a diameter of 25 inches will have a circumference that is approximately 78.92 inches.
134
Example C
Using Danas data from Example A, estimate the circumference of a circle whose diameter is 60 inches.
Solution:
The equation y = 3.14x +0.42 of the relationship between diameter and circumference from Example A applies
here.
A circle with a diameter of 60 inches will have a circumference that is approximately 188.82 inches.
Guided Practice
A cylinder is lled with water to a height of 73 centimeters. The water is drained through a hole in the bottom of the
cylinder and measurements are taken at two-second intervals. The table below shows the height of the water level
in the cylinder at different times.
TABLE 2.14: Water Level in Cylinder at Various Times
Time (seconds) Water level (cm)
0.0 73
2.0 63.9
4.0 55.5
6.0 47.2
8.0 40.0
10.0 33.4
12.0 27.4
14.0 21.9
16.0 17.1
18.0 12.9
20.0 9.4
22.0 6.3
24.0 3.9
26.0 2.0
28.0 0.7
30.0 0.1
Find the water level at 15 seconds.
Solution:
Begin by graphing the scatter plot. As you can see below, a straight line does not t the majority of this data. We
will learn other types of models later in the year that will better describe this situation.
135
Video Overview
MEDIA
136
Homework
1. What is a mathematical model?
2. What is linear modeling? What are the options to determine a linear model?
3. Can you think of a real world situation that could be descibed by a linear model?
Use the Life Expectancy table below to answer the questions.
4. Make a scatter plot of the data.
5. Use a line of best t to estimate the life expectancy of a person born in 1955.
6. Use linear interpolation to estimate the life expectancy of a person born in 1955.
8. Use linear interpolation to estimate the life expectancy of a person born in 1976.
10. Use linear extrapolation to estimate the life expectancy of a person born in 2012.
11. Which method gives better estimates for this data set? Why?
TABLE 2.15:
Birth Year Life expectancy in years
1930 59.7
1940 62.9
1950 68.2
1960 69.7
1970 70.8
1980 73.7
1990 75.4
2000 77
The table below lists the high temperature for the rst day of each month in 2006 in San Diego, California (Weather
Underground). Use this table to answer the questions.
12. Draw a scatter plot of the data.
13. Use a line of best t to estimate the temperature in the middle of the 4
th
month (month 4.5).
14. Use linear interpolation to estimate the temperature in the middle of the 4
th
month (month 4.5).
15. Use a line of best t to estimate the temperature for month 13 (January 2007).
16. Use linear extrapolation to estimate the temperature for month 13 (January 2007).
17. Which method gives better estimates for this data set? Why?
TABLE 2.16:
Month number Temperature (F)
1 63
2 66
3 61
4 64
5 71
6 78
7 88
8 78
9 81
137
Month number Temperature (F)
10 75
11 68
12 69
138
www.ck12.org Chapter 3. Unit 3 - Systems of Linear Equations
CHAPTER
3
Unit 3 - Systems of Linear
Equations
Chapter Outline
3.1 SOLVING LINEAR SYSTEMS BY GRAPHING
3.2 SOLVING LINEAR SYSTEMS BY SUBSTITUTION
3.3 SOLVING LINEAR SYSTEMS BY COMBINATION (ELIMINATION)
3.4 SPECIAL TYPES OF LINEAR SYSTEMS
3.5 APPLICATIONS OF LINEAR SYSTEMS
3.6 SYSTEMS OF LINEAR INEQUALITIES
139
3.1. Solving Linear Systems by Graphing www.ck12.org
3.1
SolvingLinear Systems by Graphing
What You Will Learn
Determine whether an ordered pair is a solution to a system of equations.
Solve a system of equations graphically.
Solve a system of equations graphically with a graphing calculator.
Determine Whether an Ordered Pair is a Solution to a System of Equations
A linear system of equations consists of a set of equations that must be solved together. We will be looking for a
value for x and y that will make BOTH of the equations true.
Consider the following system of equations.
y = x +2
y =2x +1
Since the two lines are in a system we deal with them together by graphing them on the same coordinate axes. The
lines can be graphed using your favorite method. Lets graph by making a table of values for each line.
Line 1 y = x +2
TABLE 3.1:
x y
0 2
1 3
Line 2 y =2x +1
140
TABLE 3.2:
x y
0 1
1 -1
A solution for a single equation is any point that lies on the line for that equation. A solution for a system of
equations is any point that lies on both lines in the system.
For Example
Point A is not a solution to the system because it does not lie on either of the lines.
Point B is not a solution to the system because it lies only on the blue line but not on the red line.
Point C is a solution to the system because it lies on both lines at the same time.
In particular, this point marks the intersection of the two lines. It solves both equations, so it solves the system.
For a system of equations, the geometrical solution is the intersection of the two lines in the system. The algebraic
solution is the ordered paid that solves both equations.
You can conrm the solution by substituting it into the system of equations, and conrming that the solution works
in each equation.
Example 1
Determine which of the points (1, 3), (0, 2) or (2, 7) is a solution to the following system of equations.
y = 4x 1
y = 2x +3
Solution
To check if a coordinate point is a solution to the system of equations, we substitute each of the x and y values into
the equations to see if they work.
Point (1, 3)
y = 4x 1
3
?
=
?
4(1) 1
3 = 3
The solution checks.
y = 2x +3
3
?
=
?
2(1) +3
3 ,= 5
The solution does not check.
Point (1, 3) is on line y = 4x 1 but it is not on line y = 2x +3 so it is not a solution to the system.
Point (0, 2)
141
y = 4x 1
2
?
=
?
4(0) 1
2 ,=1
The solution does not check.
Point (0, 2) is not on line y = 4x 1 so it is not a solution to the system. Note that it is not necessary to check the
second equation because the point needs to be on both lines for it to be a solution to the system.
Point (2, 7)
y = 4x 1
7
?
=
?
4(2) 1
7 = 7
y = 2x +3
7
?
=
?
2(2) +3
7 = 7
Point (2, 7) is a solution to the system since it lies on both lines.
Answer The solution to the system is point (2, 7).
Determine the Solution to a Linear System by Graphing
The solution to a linear system of equations is the point which lies on both lines. In other words, the solution is the
point where the two lines intersect.
We can solve a system of equations by graphing the lines on the same coordinate plane and reading the intersection
point from the graph.
This method most often offers only approximate solutions. It is exact only when the x and y values of the solution
are integers. However, this method it is a great at offering a visual representation of the system of equations and
demonstrates that the solution to a system of equations is the intersection of the two lines in the system.
Example 2
(The equations are in slope-intercept form)
Solve the following system of equations by graphing.
y = 3x 5
y =2x +5
Solution
142
Graph both lines on the same coordinate axis using any method you like.
In this case, lets make a table of values for each line.
Line 1 y = 3x 5
TABLE 3.3:
x y
1 -2
2 1
Line 2 y =2x +5
TABLE 3.4:
x y
1 3
2 1
Answer The solution to the system is given by the intersection point of the two lines. The graph shows that the lines
intersect at point (2, 1). So the solution is x = 2, y = 1 or (2, 1).
Example 3
(The equations are in standard form)
Solve the following system of equations by graphing
2x +3y = 6
4x y =2
Solution
Graph both lines on the same coordinate axis using your method of choice.
Here we will graph the lines by nding the x and yintercepts of each of the lines.
143
Line 1 2x +3y = 6
xintercept set y = 0 2x = 6 x = 3 which results in point (3, 0).
yintercept set x = 0 3y = 6 y = 2 which results in point (0, 2).
Line 2 4x +y = 2
xintercept: set y = 0 4x = 2 x =
1
2
which results in point
_
1
2
, 0
_
.
yintercept: set x = 0 y = 2 which results in point (0, 2)
Answer The graph shows that the lines intersect at point (0, 2). Therefore, the solution to the system of equations is
x = 0, y = 2.
Example 4:
Solve the following system by graphing.
y = 3
x +y = 2
Line 1 y = 3 is a horizontal line passing through point (0, 3).
Line 2 x +y = 2
xintercept: (2, 0)
yintercept: (0, 2)
Answer The graph shows that the solution to this system is (-1, 3) x =1, y = 3.
144
These examples are great at demonstrating that the solution to a system of linear equations means the point at which
the lines intersect. This is, in fact, the greatest strength of the graphing method because it offers a very visual
representation of system of equations and its solution. You can see, however, that determining a solution from a
graph would require very careful graphing of the lines, and is really only practical when you are certain that the
solution gives integer values for x and y. In most cases, this method can only offer approximate solutions to systems
of equations. For exact solutions other methods are necessary.
Solving a System of Equations Using the Graphing Calculator
A graphing calculator can be used to nd or check solutions to a system of equations. In this section, you learned
that to solve a system graphically, you must graph the two lines on the same coordinate axes and nd the point of
intersection. You can use a graphing calculator to graph the lines as an alternative to graphing the equations by hand.
Example 6
Solve the following system of equations using a graphing calculator.
x 3y = 4
2x +5y = 8
In order to input the equations into the calculator, they must be written in slope-intercept form (i.e., y = mx +b
form), or at least you must isolate y.
x 3y = 4 y =
1
3
x
4
3
2x +5y = 8 y =
2
5
x
8
5
Press the [y=] button on the graphing calculator and enter the two functions as:
Y
1
=
x
3
4
3
Y
2
=
2x
3

8
5
Now press [GRAPH]. The window below is set to 5 x 10 and 5 x 5.
The rst screen below shows the screen of a TI-83 family graphing calculator with these lines graphed.
There are a few different ways to nd the intersection point.
Option 1 Use [TRACE] and move the cursor with the arrows until it is on top of the intersection point. The values
of the coordinate point will be on the bottom of the screen. The second screen above shows the values to be
X = 4.0957447 and Y = .03191489.
145
Use the [ZOOM] function to zoom into the intersection point and nd a more accurate result. The third screen
above shows the system of equations after zooming in several times. A more accurate solution appears to be X = 4
and Y = 0.
Option 2 Look at the table of values by pressing [2nd] [GRAPH]. The rst screen below shows a table of values
for this system of equations. Scroll down until the values for and are the same. In this case this occurs at X = 4 and
Y = 0.
Use the [TBLSET] function to change the starting value for your table of values so that it is close to the intersection
point and you dont have to scroll too long. You can also improve the accuracy of the solution by taking smaller
values of Table 1.
Option 3 Using the [2nd] [TRACE] function gives the screen in the second screen above.
Scroll down and select intersect.
The calculator will display the graph with the question [FIRSTCURVE]? Move the cursor along the rst curve until
it is close to the intersection and press [ENTER].
The calculator now shows [SECONDCURVE]?
Move the cursor to the second line (if necessary) and press [ENTER].
The calculator displays [GUESS]?
Press [ENTER] and the calculator displays the solution at the bottom of the screen (see the third screen above).
The point of intersection is X = 4 and Y = 0.
Notes:
When you use the intersect function, the calculator asks you to select [FIRSTCURVE]? and [SECOND-
CURVE]? in case you have more than two graphs on the screen. Likewise, the [GUESS]? is requested in case
the curves have more than one intersection. With lines you only get one point of intersection, but later in your
mathematics studies you will work with curves that have multiple points of intersection.
Option 3 is the only option on the graphing calculator that gives an exact solution. Using trace and table give
you approximate solutions.
Video Overview of Solving Systems by Graphing
MEDIA
Video Overview of Solving Systems using the Graphing Calculator
146
MEDIA
Homework
Determine which ordered pair satises the system of linear equations.
1. y = 3x 2
y =x
a. (1, 4)
b. (2, 9)
c.
_
1
2
,
1
2
_
2. y = 2x 3
y = x +5
a. (8, 13)
b. (-7, 6)
c. (0, 4)
3. 2x +y = 8
5x +2y = 10
a. (-9, 1)
b. (-6, 20)
c. (14, 2)
4. 3x +2y = 6
y =
x
2
3
a.
_
3,
3
2
_
b. (4, 3)
c.
_
1
2
, 4
_
Solve the following systems using the graphing method.
1. y = x +3
y =x +3
2. y = 3x 6
y =x +6
3. 2x = 4
y =3
4. y =x +5
x +y = 1
5. x +2y = 8
5x +2y = 0
6. 3x +2y = 12
4x y = 5
7. 5x +2y =4
x y = 2
147
8. 2x +4 = 3y
x 2y +4 = 0
9. y =
x
2
3
2x 5y = 5
10. y = 4
x = 83y
148
3.2
SolvingLinear Systems by Substitution
What You Will Learn
Solve systems of equations with two variables by substituting for either variable.
Solving Linear Systems Using Substitution
Graphing two equations to nd the solution can be awkward, especially if the answer is a fraction. The method of
substitution is often a better choice.
Example 1
Solve the system
2x +3y = 6
4x +y = 2
The rst step is to solve one of the equations for x or y. y is already by itself in the second equation, so that is the
best place to start.
4x +y = 2 Add 4x to both sides.
y = 2+4x
Now substitute this equation in place of y in the rst equation.
2x +3(2+4x) = 6 Distribute the 3.
2x +6+12x = 6 Collect like terms.
14x +6 = 6 Subtract 6 from both sides.
14x = 0
x = 0
Substitute back into our expression for y.
y = 2+4 0 = 2
The solution is (x = 0, y = 2)
Next, consider a more complicated example. In the following example the solution gives a fractional answer, so it
would be difcult to solve by graphing.
Example 2
149
3.2. Solving Linear Systems by Substitution www.ck12.org
Solve the system
2x +2y = 3
x 2y =1
Again, we start by looking to isolate one variable in either equation. The second equation has x by itself, so we will
start there.
Solve the second equation for x
x 4y =1 Add 4y to both sides.
x =1+4y
Substitute this expression into the rst equation and solve.
2(1+4y) +2y Distribute the 2
2+8y +2y = 3 Collect like terms.
2+10y = 3 Add 2 to both sides
10y = 5 Divide both sides by 10
y =
1
2
Substitute this back into the equation that was solved for x
x =1+4y
x =1+4(
1
2
)
x =1+2
x = 1
So our solution is, x = 1, y =
1
2
.
Video Overview, Example 1
MEDIA
150
Video Overview, Example 2
MEDIA
Homework
Solve the following systems
1)
x +2y = 9
3x +5y = 20
2)
x 3y = 10
2x +y = 13
3)
5x +2y =1
2x y =13
4)
4x +3y =5
x = y 3
5)
7x +4y = 13
x +y = 1
151
3.3. Solving Linear Systems by Combination (Elimination) www.ck12.org
3.3
SolvingLinear Systems by Combination
(Elimination)
What You Will Learn
Solve systems by combining the two equations (or multiples of the two equations) to eliminate a variable.
Solving Systems Without Multiplying
Objective
Solve systems by adding the two equations together to eliminate a variable.
Example A
Solve the system using Linear Combination:
2x 3y =9
5x +3y = 30
Solution: Notice that the coefcients of the y terms are opposites. When we add the two equations together, these
terms will be eliminated because their sum is zero.
2x
3y =9
+5x +
3y = 30
7x = 21
Now we can solve for x:
7x = 21
x = 3
Now that we have found x, we can plug this value into either equation to nd y:
2(3) 3y =9 5(3) +3y = 30
63y =9 15+3y = 30
3y =15 or 3y = 15
y = 5 y = 5
The solution is therefore: (3, 5).
Remember to check your answer:
152
2(3) 3(5) = 615 =9
5(3) +3(5) = 15+15 = 30
Example B
Solve the system using Linear Combination:
2x +y = 2
3x +y =18
Solution: In this case the coefcients of the y terms are the same, not opposites. One way to solve this system
using linear combination would be to subtract the second equation from the rst instead of adding it. Sometimes
subtraction results in more errors, however, particularly when negative numbers are involved. Instead of subtracting,
multiply the second equation by -1 and then add them together.
1(3x +y =18)
3x y = 18
Essentially, we changed all of the signs of the terms in this equation.
Now we can add the two equations together to eliminate y:
2x +
y = 2
+3x
y = 18
5x = 20
Now we can solve for x:
5x = 20
x = 4
Now that we have found x, plug this value into either equation to nd y:
2(4) +y = 2 3(4) +y =18
8+y = 2 or 12+y =18
y =6 y =6
The solution is therefore: (4, -6).
Remember to check your answer:
2(4) +(6) = 86 = 2
3(4) +(6) =126 =18
153
Solving Systems by Multiplying One Equation to Cancel a Variable
Objective
Solve systems using linear combinations by multiplying one equation by a constant to eliminate a variable.
Example
Solve the system using linear combinations:
4x +y = 0
x 3y = 26
Solution: Here we have coefcients of y that are opposite signs (one is positive and one is negative). We can
get opposite values if we multiple the rst equation by 3. Be careful; make sure you multiply the entire equation,
including the constant, by 3:
3(4x +y = 0)
12x +3y = 0
Now we can use this new equation in our system to eliminate y and solve for x:
12x +
3y = 0
+ x
3y = 26
13x = 26
x = 2
Now, nd y:
4(2) +y = 0
8+y = 0
y =8
Solution: (2, -8)
Check your answer:
4(2) +(8) = 88 = 0
(2) 3(8) = 2+24 = 26
Note that we could have used the other equation to nd yin the nal step.
From the beginning, we could have multiplied the second equation by -4 instead to cancel out the xvariable.
154
Solving Systems by Multiplying Both Equations to Cancel a Variable
Objective
Solve linear systems using linear combinations in which both equations must be multiplied by a constant to cancel a
variable.
Example A
2x 5y = 15
3x +7y = 8
Solution: In this problem we cannot simply multiply one equation by a constant to get opposite coefcients for one
of the variables. Here we will need to identify the least common multiple of the coefcients of one of the variables
and use this value to determine what to multiple each equation by. If we look at the coefcients of x, 2 and 3, the
least common multiple of these numbers is 6. So, we want to have the coefcients of x be 6 and -6 so that they are
opposites and will cancel when we add the two equations together. In order to get coefcients of 6 and -6 we can
multiply the rst equation by 3 and the second equation by -2 (it doesnt matter which one we make negative.)
3(2x 5y = 15)
6x 15y = 45
2(3x +7y = 8) +
6x 14y =16
29y = 29
y =1
Now nd x:
2(x) 5(1) = 15
2x +5 = 15
2x = 10
x = 5
Solution: (5, -1)
Check your answer:
2(5) 5(1) = 10+5 = 15
3(5) +7(1) = 157 = 8
This problem could also be solved by eliminating the y variables rst. To do this, nd the least common multiple
of the coefcients of y, 5 and 7. The least common multiple is 35, so we would multiply the rst equation by 7 and
the second equation by 5. Since one of them is already negative, we dont have to multiply by a negative.
Example B
155
7x +20y =9
2x 3y = 8
Solution: The rst step is to decide which variable to eliminate. Either one can be eliminated but sometimes it is
helpful to look at what we need to multiply by to eliminate each one and determine which is easier to eliminate.
In general, it is easier to work with smaller numbers so in this case it makes sense to eliminate x rst. The Least
Common Multiple (LCM) of 7 and 2 is 14. To get 14 as the coefcient of each term, we need to multiple the rst
equation by 2 and the second equation by 7:
2(7x +20y =9)
14x +40y =18

7(2x 3y = 8)
14x 21y = 56
19y = 38
y = 2
7x +20(2) =9
7x +40 =9
7x =49
x =7
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
Solve the following systems using linear combinations.
1)
x +y = 2
2x y =5
2)
2x 7y = 15
2x +y = 9
3)
x y = 27
2x +y = 9
156
4)
x 7y = 27
2x +y = 9
5)
x +3y = 31
3x 5y =5
6)
10x +y =6
7x 5y =13
7)
2x +4y = 18
x 5y = 9
8)
2x +6y = 8
3x +2y =23
9)
12x y = 2
2x +5y = 21
10)
2x +4y = 24
3x 2y =26
11)
3x +2y = 19
5x +4y = 23
12)
3x 9y = 13
x 3y = 7
13)
3x +2y =3
6x 5y = 4
157
14)
5x +4y = 12
3x +5y = 15
15)
3x +5y = 7
5x +4y =10
16)
2x +3y = 13
5x +2y =6
158
3.4
Special Types of Linear Systems
What You Will Learn
Identify linear systems by the number of solutions
Types of Solutions to Linear Systems
Solutions to a system of linear equations can have several forms:
One solution
No solutions
An innite number of solutions
All of the systems we have looked at so far have one solution This is because the lines crossed at a single point
when they were graphed. There are other possibilities, however, and this section will consider those.
Parallel Lines
A system with parallel lines will have no solutions.
Remember that parallel lines have the same slope. When graphed, the lines will have the same steepness with
different yintercepts. Therefore, parallel lines will never intersect, so they have no solution.
Algebraically, a system with no solutions looks like this when solved.
_
4y = 53x
6x +8y = 7
The rst equation in this system is almost solved for y. Substitution would be appropriate to solve this system.
_
4y = 53x
6x +8y = 7

_
y =
5
4
3
4
x
6x +8y = 7
159
3.4. Special Types of Linear Systems www.ck12.org
Using the Substitution Property, replace the yvariable in the second equation with its algebraic expression in
equation #1.
6x +8
_
5
4
3
4
x
_
= 7
Apply the Distributive Property. 6x +106x = 7
Add like terms. 10 = 7
You have solved the equation correctly, yet the answer does not make sense.
When solving a system of parallel lines, the nal equation will be untrue.
Because 10 ,= 7 and you have done your math correctly, you can say this system has no solutions.
Coincident Lines
Coincident lines are lines with the same slope and yintercept. The lines completely overlap, the graph will look
like the graph of one line.
When solving a system involving coincident lines, the solution has the following result.
_
x +y = 3
3x +3y = 9
Multiply the rst equation by 3:
_
3(x +y = 3)
3x +3y = 9

_
3x 3y =9
3x +3y = 9
Add the equations together.
0 = 0
There are no variables left and you KNOW you did the math correctly. However, this is a true statement.
When solving a system of coincident lines, the resulting equation will be without variables and the statement will be
true. You can conclude the system has an innite number of solutions.
Practice Exercises
Determine whether the following system of linear equations has zero, one, or innitely many solutions:
_
2y +6x = 20
y =3x +7
What kind of system is this?
Solution:
It is easier to compare equations when they are in the same form. We will rewrite the rst equation in slope-intercept
form.
2y +6x = 20 y +3x = 10 y =3x +10
Since the two equations have the same slope, but different y-intercepts, they are parallel lines. Parallel lines never
intersect, so they have no solutions.
160
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
Find the solution of each system of equations using the method of your choice. Please state whether the system has
one solution, no solutions or an innite number of solutions.
1.
2x 5y = 2
4x +y = 5
2.
3x
5
+y = 3
1.2x +2y = 6
3.
3x 4y = 13
y =3x 7
4.
3x 3y = 3
x y = 1
5.
0.5x y = 30
0.5x y =30
6.
4x 2y =2
3x +2y =12
7.
3x +2y = 4
2x +2y = 24
161
3.4. Special Types of Linear Systems www.ck12.org
8.
5x 2y = 3
2x 3y = 10
9.
3x 4y = 13
y =3x y
10.
5x 4y = 1
10x +8y =30
11.
4x +5y = 0
3x = 6y +4.5
12.
2y +4x = 8
y 2x =4
13.
x
y
2
=
3
2
3x +y = 6
14.
0.05x +0.25y = 6
x +y = 24
162
3.5
Applications of Linear Systems
What You Will Learn
How to solve real-world applications that involve linear systems.
Introduction
We will start this section by writing a system of equations from algebraic sentences.
Example A
The sum of two numbers is 9 and the difference of the same two numbers is -1. What are the two numbers?
We will use the variables x and y to stand for the two numbers. This means we can write the following equations.
x +y = 9
x y =1
If we add these two equations together, the ys cancel out and we can solve for x
2x = 8
x = 4
Put x back into the rst equation and solve for y.
5+y = 9
y = 4
Solving Real World Applications with Linear Systems
These problems can be challenging to solve. The hard part is usually setting up the equations after you read the
problem. It is important to think about what you trying to nd, to carefully dene variables for those things and to
set up equations using those variables. You can solve these equations using graphing, substitution or combination.
Heres an example.
Example B
The movie rental store CineStar offers customers two choices. Customers can pay a yearly membership of $45 and
then rent each movie for $2 or they can choose not to pay the membership fee and rent each movie for $3.50. How
many movies would you have to rent before the membership becomes the cheaper option?
163
3.5. Applications of Linear Systems www.ck12.org
Solution
Lets translate this problem into algebra. Since there are two different options to consider, we can write two different
equations and form a system.
The choices are membership and no membership. Well call the number of movies you rent x and the total cost
of renting movies for a year y.
TABLE 3.5:
at fee rental fee total
membership $45 2x y = 45+2x
no membership $0 3.50x y = 3.5x
The at fee is the dollar amount you pay per year and the rental fee is the dollar amount you pay when you rent a
movie. For the membership option the rental fee is 2x, since you would pay $2 for each movie you rented; for the
no membership option the rental fee is 3.50x, since you would pay $3.50 for each movie you rented.
Our system of equations is:
y = 45+2x
y = 3.50x
Heres a graph of the system:
Now we need to nd the exact intersection point. Since each equation is already solved for y, we can easily solve
the system with substitution. Substitute the second equation into the rst one:
y = 45+2x
3.50x = 45+2x 1.50x = 45 x = 30 movies
y = 3.50x
You would have to rent 30 movies per year before the membership becomes the better option.
164
This example shows a real situation where a consistent system of equations is useful in nding a solution. Remember
that for a consistent system, the lines that make up the system intersect at single point. In other words, the lines are
not parallel or the slopes are different.
In this case, the slopes of the lines represent the price of a rental per movie. The lines cross because the price of
rental per movie is different for the two options in the problem.
Example C
A baker sells plain cakes for $7 and decorated cakes for $11. On a busy Saturday the baker started with 120 cakes,
and sold all but three. His takings for the day were $991. How many plain cakes did he sell that day, and how many
were decorated before they were sold?
Solution:
TABLE 3.6:
plain cakes decorated cakes total
Cakes sold p d 1203 = 117
Cost of cakes 7p 11d $991
The system of equations that describes this problem is:
p+d = 117
7p+11d = 991
Lets solve this system by substituting the second equation into the rst equation:
p+d = 117 p = 117d
7p+11d = 991 7(117d) +11d = 991
8197d +11d = 991 819+4d = 991
4d = 172 d = 43
We can substitute d into the the rst equation to solve for p.
p = 117d = 117(43) = 74
The baker sold 74 plain cakes and 43 decorated cakes.
Video Overview
MEDIA
165
3.5. Applications of Linear Systems www.ck12.org
Homework
1. The sum of two number is 3 and the difference of the same two numbers is 7. What are the numbers?
2. Juan is considering two cell phone plans. The rst company charges $120 for the phone and $30 per month
for the calling plan that Juan wants. The second company charges $40 for the same phone but charges $45 per
month for the calling plan that Juan wants. After how many months would the total cost of the two plans be
the same?
3. Jamal placed two orders with an internet clothing store. The rst order was for 13 ties and 4 pairs of
suspenders, and totaled $487. The second order was for 6 ties and 2 pairs of suspenders, and totaled $232.
The bill does not list the per-item price, but all ties have the same price and all suspenders have the same price.
What is the cost of one tie and of one pair of suspenders?
4. Teri bought games and cakes. Games cost $12 each while cakes are only $3 each. If Teri spent $93 and only
ended up with 16 items, how many games and cakes did Teri buy?
166
3.6
Systems of Linear Inequalities
What You Will Learn
How to solve a system of linear inequalities by graphing
Solving Systems of Inequalities by Graphing
In the last chapter you learned how to graph a linear inequality in two variables. To do that, you graphed the equation
of the straight line on the coordinate plane. The line was solid for or signs (where the equals sign is included),
and the line was dashed for <or >signs (where the equals sign is not included). Then you shaded above the line (if
the inequality began with y > or y ) or below the line (if it began with y < or y ).
In this section, well see how to graph two or more linear inequalities on the same coordinate plane. The inequalities
are graphed separately on the same graph, and the solution for the system is the common shaded region between
all the inequalities in the system. One linear inequality in two variables divides the plane into two half-planes. A
system of two or more linear inequalities can divide the plane into more complex shapes.
Lets start by solving a system of two inequalities.
Example A
Solve the following system:
2x +3y 18
x 4y 12
Solution
Solving systems of linear inequalities means graphing and nding the intersections. So we graph each inequality,
and then nd the intersection regions of the solution.
First, lets rewrite each equation in slope-intercept form. (Remember that this form makes it easier to tell which
region of the coordinate plane to shade.) Our system becomes
3y 2x +18 y
2
3
x +6
4y x +12 y
x
4
3
Notice that the inequality sign in the second equation changed because we divided by a negative number!
For this rst example, well graph each inequality separately and then combine the results.
Heres the graph of the rst inequality:
167
3.6. Systems of Linear Inequalities www.ck12.org
The line is solid because the equals sign is included in the inequality. Since the inequality is less than or equal to,
we shade below the line.
And heres the graph of the second inequality:
168
The line is solid again because the equals sign is included in the inequality. We now shade above the line because y
is greater than or equal to.
When we combine the graphs, we see that the blue and red shaded regions overlap. The area where they overlap is
the area where both inequalities are true. Thus that area (shown below in purple) is the solution of the system.
169
The kind of solution displayed in this example is called unbounded, because it continues forever in at least one
direction (in this case, forever upward and to the left).
Example B
There are also situations where a system of inequalities has no solution. For example, lets solve this system.
y 2x 4
y > 2x +6
Solution
We start by graphing the rst line. The line will be solid because the equals sign is included in the inequality. We
must shade downwards because y is less than.
170
Next we graph the second line on the same coordinate axis. This line will be dashed because the equals sign is not
included in the inequality. We must shade upward because y is greater than.
It doesnt look like the two shaded regions overlap at all. The two lines have the same slope, so we know they are
parallel; that means that the regions indeed wont ever overlap since the lines wont ever cross. So this system of
inequalities has no solution.
But a system of inequalities can sometimes have a solution even if the lines are parallel. For example, what happens
if we swap the directions of the inequality signs in the system we just graphed?
To graph the system
171
y 2x 4
y < 2x +6
,
we draw the same lines we drew for the previous system, but we shade upward for the rst inequality and downward
for the second inequality. Here is the result:
You can see that this time the shaded regions overlap. The area between the two lines is the solution to the system.
Graph a System of More Than Two Linear Inequalities
When we solve a system of just two linear inequalities, the solution is always an unbounded regionone that
continues innitely in at least one direction. But if we put together a system of more than two inequalities, sometimes
we can get a solution that is boundeda nite region with three or more sides.
Lets look at a simple example.
Example C
Find the solution to the following system of inequalities.
3x y < 4
4y +9x < 8
x 0
y 0
Solution
Lets start by writing our inequalities in slope-intercept form.
172
y > 3x 4
y <
9
4
x +2
x 0
y 0
Now we can graph each line and shade appropriately. First we graph y > 3x 4 :
Next we graph y <
9
4
x +2 :
Finally we graph x 0 and y 0, and were left with the region below; this is where all four inequalities overlap.
173
The solution is bounded because there are lines on all sides of the solution region. In other words, the solution
region is a bounded geometric gure, in this case a triangle.
Notice, too, that only three of the lines we graphed actually form the boundaries of the region. Sometimes when we
graph multiple inequalities, it turns out that some of them dont affect the overall solution; in this case, the solution
would be the same even if wed left out the inequality y > 3x 4. Thats because the solution region of the system
formed by the other three inequalities is completely contained within the solution region of that fourth inequality;
in other words, any solution to the other three inequalities is automatically a solution to that one too, so adding that
inequality doesnt narrow down the solution set at all.
But that wasnt obvious until we actually drew the graph!
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
Find the solution region of the following systems of inequalities.
1.
x y <6
2y 3x +17
2.
4y 5x < 8
5x 168y
174
3.
5x y 5
2y x 10
4.
5x +2y 25
3x 2y 17
x 6y 27
5.
2x 3y 21
x +4y 6
3x +y 4
6.
12x 7y < 120
7x 8y 36
5x +y 12
175
www.ck12.org
CHAPTER
4
Unit 4 - Polynomials,
Exponents and Radicals
Chapter Outline
4.1 ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION OF POLYNOMIALS
4.2 EXPONENT PROPERTIES INVOLVING PRODUCTS
4.3 MULTIPLICATION OF POLYNOMIALS
4.4 SPECIAL PRODUCTS OF POLYNOMIALS
4.5 EXPONENT PROPERTIES INVOLVING QUOTIENTS
4.6 ZERO AND NEGATIVE EXPONENTS
4.7 DIVISION OF POLYNOMIALS BY MONOMIALS
4.8 DIVISION OF POLYNOMIALS BY POLYNOMIALS
4.9 SCIENTIFIC NOTATION
4.10 SQUARE ROOTS AND IRRATIONAL NUMBERS
4.11 PYTHAGOREAN THEOREM
4.12 MULTIPLICATION AND DIVISION OF RADICALS
4.13 ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION OF RADICALS
176
www.ck12.org Chapter 4. Unit 4 - Polynomials, Exponents and Radicals
4.1
AdditionandSubtractionof Polynomials
What You Will Learn
Write a polynomial expression in standard form.
Classify polynomial expression by degree
Simpliying polynomials
Add and subtract polynomials
Polynomial Expression
A polynomial is made up of different terms that contain positive integer powers of the variables. Here is an example
of a polynomial.
4x
3
+2x
2
3x +1
Each part of the polynomial that is added or subtracted is called a term of the polynomial. The example above is a
polynomial with four terms.
The numbers appearing in each term in front of the variable are called the coefcients. The number appearing all by
itself without a variable is called a constant.
In this case, the coefcient of x
3
is 4, the coefcient of x
2
is 2, the coefcient of x is -3 and the constant is 1.
Degrees of Polynomials and Standard Form
Each term in the polynomial has a degree. This is the power of the variable in that term.
4x
3
Has a degree of 3 and is called a cubic term or 3
rd
order term.
2x
2
Has a degree of 2 and is called the quadratic term or 2
nd
order term.
3x Has a degree of 1 and is called the linear term or 1
st
order term.
177
4.1. Addition and Subtraction of Polynomials www.ck12.org
1 Has a degree of 0 and is called the constant.
By denition, the degree of the polynomial is the same as the degree of the term with the highest degree. This
example is a polynomial of degree 3, which is also called a cubic polynomial. (Why do you think it is called a
cubic?).
Polynomials can have more than one variable. Here is another example of a polynomial.
t
4
6s
3
t
2
12st +4s
4
5
This is a polynomial because all exponents on the variables are positive integers. This polynomial has ve terms.
Lets look at each term more closely. Note: The degree of a term is the sum of the powers on each variable in the
term.
t
4
Has a degree of 4, so its a 4
th
order term
6s
3
t
2
th
order term.
12
st
nd
order term
4s
4
th
order term
-5 Is a constant, so its degree is 0.
Since the highest degree of a term in this polynomial is 5, then this is polynomial of degree 5 or a 5
th
order
polynomial.
A polynomial that has only one term has a special name. It is called a monomial (mono means one). A monomial
can be a constant, a variable, or a product of a constant and one or more variables. You can see that each term in a
polynomial is a monomial. A polynomial is the sum of monomials. Here are some examples of monomials.
b
2
..
This is a monomial
8
..
So is this
2ab
2
..
and this
1
4
x
4
..
and this
29xy
..
and this
Example 1
For the following polynomials, identify the coefcient on each term, the degree of each term and the degree of the
polynomial.
a) x
5
3x
3
+4x
2
5x +7
b) x
4
3x
3
y
2
+8x 12
Solution
a) x
5
3x
3
+4x
2
5x +7
The coefcients of each term in order are 1, -3, 4, -5 and the constant is 7.
The degrees of each term are 5, 3, 2, 1, and 0. Therefore, the degree of the polynomial is 5.
b) x
4
3x
3
y
2
+8x 12
The coefcients of each term in order are 1, -3, 8 and the constant is -12.
The degrees of each term are 4, 5, 1, and 0. Therefore, the degree of the polynomial is 5.
Example 2
Identify the following expressions as polynomials or non-polynomials.
a) 5x
2
2x
178
b) 3x
2
2x
2
c) x
x 1
d)
5
x
3
+1
e) 4x
1
3
f) 4xy
2
2x
2
y 3+y
3
3x
3
Solution
(a) 5x
2
2x This is a polynomial.
(b) 3x
2
2x
2
This is not a polynomial because it has a negative exponent.
(c) x
x 1 This is not a polynomial because is has a square root.

(d)
5
x
3
+1
This is not a polynomial because the power of x appears in the denominator.
(e) 4x
1
3
This is not a polynomial because it has a fractional exponent.
(f) 4xy
2
2x
y
3+y
3
3x
3
This is a polynomial.
You saw that each term in a polynomial has a degree. The degree of the highest term is also the degree of the
polynomial. Often, we arrange the terms in a polynomial so that the term with the highest degree is rst and it is
followed by the other terms in order of decreasing power. This is called standard form.
The following polynomials are in standard form.
4x
4
3x
3
+2x
2
x +1
a
4
b
3
2a
3
b
3
+3a
4
b5ab
2
+2
The rst term of a polynomial in standard form is called the leading term and the coefcient of the leading term is
called the leading coefcient.
The rst polynomial above has a leading term of 4x
4
and a leading coefcient of 4.
The second polynomial above has a leading term of a
4
b
3
and a leading coefcient of 1.
Example 3
Rearrange the terms in the following polynomials so that they are in standard form. Indicate the leading term and
leading coefcient of each polynomial.
(a) 73x
3
+4x
(b) aba
3
+2b
(c) 4b+4+b
2
Solution
(a) 73x
3
+4x is rearranged as 3x
3
+4x +7. The leading term is 3x
3
and the leading coefcient is -3.
(b) aba
3
+2b is rearranged as a
3
+ab+2b. The leading term is a
3
and the leading coefcient is -1.
(c) 4b+4+b
2
is rearranged as b
2
4b+4. The leading term is b
2
and the leading coefcient is 1.
179
Simplifying Polynomials
A polynomial is simplied if it has no terms that are alike. Like terms are terms in the polynomial that have the
same variable(s) with the same exponents, but they can have different coefcients.
2x
2
y and 5x
2
y are like terms.
6x
2
y and 6xy
2
are not like terms.
If we have a polynomial that has like terms, we simplify by combining them.
x
2
+6xy 4xy +y
2

Like terms
This sample polynomial simplied by combining the like terms 6xy4xy =2xy. We write the simplied polynomial
as
x
2
+2xy +y
2
Example 4
Simplify the following polynomials by collecting like terms and combining them.
(a) 2x 4x
2
+6+x
2
4+4x
(b) a
3
b
3
5ab
4
+2a
3
ba
3
b
3
+3ab
4
a
2
b
Solution
(a) 2x 4x
2
+6+x
2
4+4x
Rearrange the terms so that like terms are grouped together
= (4x
2
+x
2
) +(2x +4x) +(64)
Combine each set of like terms by adding or subtracting the coefcients
=3x
2
+6x +2
(b) a
3
b
3
5ab
4
+2a
3
ba
3
b
3
+3ab
4
a
2
b
Rearrange the terms so that like terms are grouped together:
= (a
3
b
3
a
3
b
3
) +(5ab
4
+3ab
4
) +2a
3
ba
2
b
Combine each set of like terms:
= 02ab
4
+2a
3
ba
2
b
=2ab
4
+2a
3
ba
2
b
Add and Subtract Polynomials
Polynomial addition
To add two or more polynomials, write their sum and then simplify by combining like terms.
Example 5
Add and simplify the resulting polynomials.
180
(a) Add 3x
2
4x +7 and 2x
3
4x
2
6x +5.
(b) Add x
2
2xy +y
2
and 2y
2
4x
2
and 10xy +y
3
.
Solution:
(a) Add 3x
2
4x +7 and 2x
3
4x
2
6x +5
= (3x
2
4x +7) +(2x
3
4x
2
6x +5)
Group like terms = 2x
3
+(3x
2
4x
2
) +(4x 6x) +(7+5)
Simplify = 2x
3
x
2
10x +12
(b) Add x
2
2xy +y
2
and 2y
2
3x
2
and 10xy +y
3
= (x
2
2xy +y
2
) +(2y
2
3x
2
) +(10xy +y
3
)
Group like terms = (x
2
3x
2
) +(y
2
+2y
2
) +(2xy +10xy) +y
3
Simplify = 2x
2
+3y
2
+8xy +y
3
Polynomial subtraction
To subtract one polynomial from another, add the opposite of each term of the polynomial you are subtracting.
Example 6
Subtract and simplify the resulting polynomials.
a) Subtract x
3
3x
2
+8x +12 from 4x
2
+5x 9.
b) Subtract 5b
2
2a
2
from 4a
2
8ab9b
2
.
Solution
a)
(4x
2
+5x 9) (x
3
3x
2
+8x +12) = (4x
2
+5x 9) +(x
3
+3x
2
8x 12)
Group like terms =x
3
(4x
2
+3x
2
) +(5x 8x) +(912)
Simplify =x
3
+7x
2
3x 21
b)
(4a
2
8ab9b
2
) (5b
2
2a
2
) = (4a
2
8ab9b
2
) +(5b
2
+2a
2
)
Group like terms = (4a
2
+2a
2
) +(9b
2
5b
2
) 8ab
Simplify = 6a
2
14b
2
8ab
Note: An easy way to check your work after adding or subtracting polynomials is to substitute a convenient value
in for the variable, and check that your answer and the problem both give the same value. For example, in part (b)
of Example 6, if we let a = 2 and b = 3, then we can check as follows.
181
Given Solution
(4a
2
8ab9b
2
) (5b
2
2a
2
) 6a
2
14b
2
8ab
(4(2)
2
8(2)(3) 9(3)
2
) (5(3)
2
2(2)
2
) 6(2)
2
14(3)
2
8(2)(3)
(4(4) 8(2)(3) 9(9)) (5(9) 2(4)) 6(4) 14(9) 8(2)(3)
(113) 37 2412648
150 150
Since both expressions evaluate to the same number when we substitute in arbitrary values for the variables, we can
be reasonably sure that our answer is correct. Note, when you use this method, do not choose 0 or 1 for checking
since these can lead to common problems.
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
Indicate which expressions are polynomials.
1. x
2
+3x
1
2
2.
1
3
x
2
y 9y
2
3. 3x
3
Express each polynomial in standard form. Give the degree of each polynomial.
1. 32x
2. 84x +3x
3
3. 5+2x 5x
2
+8x
3
4. x
2
9x
4
+12
Add and simplify.
1. (x +8) +(3x 5)
2. (2x
2
+4x 12) +(7x +x
2
)
3. (2a
2
b2a+9) +(5a
2
b4b+5)
4. (6.9a
2
2.3b
2
+2ab) +(3.1a2.5b
2
+b)
Subtract and simplify.
1. (t +15t
2
) (5t
2
+2t 9)
2. (y
2
+4y 5) (5y
2
+2y +7)
3. (5m
2
m) (3m
2
+4m5)
4. (2a
2
b3ab
2
+5a
2
b
2
) (2a
2
b
2
+4a
2
b5b
2
)
182
4.2
Exponent Properties InvolvingProducts
What You Will Learn
Meaning of exponents
Use the product of a power property.
Use the power of a product property.
Simplify expressions involving product properties of exponents.
Meaning of Exponents
In this chapter, we will discuss exponents, we will start with what the word exponent means.
Consider the area of the square shown right. We know that the area is given by:
But we also know that for any rectangle, Area = (width) (height), so we can see that:
Similarly, the volume of the cube is given by:
Volume = width depth height = x x x
But we also know that the volume of the cube is given by Volume = x
3
so clearly
x
3
= x x x
You probably know that the power (the small number to the top right of the x) tells you how many xs to multiply
together. In these examples the x is called the base and the power (or exponent) tells us how many factors of the
base there are in the full expression.
183
4.2. Exponent Properties Involving Products www.ck12.org
x
2
= x x
..
2 factors of x
x
7
= x x x x x x x
..
7 factors of x
x
3
= x x x
..
3 factors of x
x
n
= x x x
..
n factors of x
Example 1
Write in exponential form.
(a) 2 2
(b) (3)(3)(3)
(c) y y y y y
(d) (3a)(3a)(3a)(3a)
Solution
(a) 2 2 = 2
2
because we have 2 factors of 2
(b) (3)(3)(3) = (3)
3
because we have 3 factors of (3)
(c) y y y y y = y
5
because we have 5 factors of y
(d) (3a)(3a)(3a)(3a) = (3a)
4
because we have 4 factors of 3a
When we deal with numbers, we usually just simplify. Wed rather deal with 16 than with 2
4
. However, with
variables, we need the exponents, because wed rather deal with x
7
than with x x x x x x x.
Lets simplify Example 1 by evaluating the numbers.
Example 2
Simplify.
(a) 2 2
(b) (3)(3)(3)
(c) y y y y y
(d) (3a)(3a)(3a)(3a)
Solution
(a) 2 2 = 2
2
= 4
(b) (3)(3)(3) = (3)
3
=27
(c) y y y y y = y
5
(d) (3a)(3a)(3a)(3a) = (3a)
4
= 3
4
a
4
= 81a
4
Note: You must be careful when taking powers of negative numbers. Remember these rules.
(negative number) (positive number) = negative number
(negative number) (negative number) = positive number
For even powers of negative numbers, the answer is always positive. Since we have an even number of factors, we
make pairs of negative numbers and all the negatives cancel out.
184
(2)
6
= (2)(2)(2)(2)(2)(2) = (2)(2)
..
+4
(2)(2)
..
+4
(2)(2)
..
+4
= +64
For odd powers of negative numbers, the answer is always negative. Since we have an odd number of factors, we
can make pairs of negative numbers to get positive numbers but there is always an unpaired negative factor, so the
answer is negative:
Ex: (2)
5
= (2)(2)(2)(2)(2) = (2)(2)
..
+4
(2)(2)
..
+4
(2)
..
2
=32
Use the Product of Powers Property
What happens when we multiply one power of x by another? See what happens when we multiply x to the power 5
by x cubed. To illustrate better we will use the full factored form for each:
(x x x x x)
..
x
5
(x x x)
..
x
3
= (x x x x x x x x)
..
x
8
So x
5
x
3
= x
8
. You may already see the pattern to multiplying powers, but lets conrm it with another example.
We will multiply x squared by x to the power 4:
(x x)
..
x
2
(x x x x)
..
x
4
= (x x x x x x)
..
x
6
So x
2
x
4
= x
6
. Look carefully at the powers and how many factors there are in each calculation. 5 factors of x times
3 factors of x equals (5+3) = 8 factors of x. 2 factors of x times 4 factors of x equals (2+4) = 6 factors of x.
You should see that when we take the product of two powers of x, the number of factors of x in the answer is the
sum of factors in the terms you are multiplying. In other words the exponent of x in the answer is the sum of the
exponents in the product.
Product rule for exponents: x
n
x
m
= x
n+m
Example 3
Multiply x
4
x
5
.
Solution
x
4
x
5
= x
4+5
= x
9
When multiplying exponents of the same base, it is a simple case of adding the exponents. It is important that when
you use the product rule you avoid easy-to-make mistakes. Consider the following.
Example 4
Multiply 2
2
2
3
.
Solution
2
2
2
3
= 2
5
= 32
185
Note that when you use the product rule you DO NOT MULTIPLY BASES. In other words, you must avoid the
common error of writing
X
X
X
X
XX
2
2
2
3
= 4
5
. Try it with your calculator and check which is right!
Example 5
Multiply 2
2
3
3
.
Solution
2
2
3
3
= 4 27 = 108
In this case, the bases are different. The product rule for powers ONLY APPLIES TO TERMS THAT HAVE THE
SAME BASE. Common mistakes with problems like this include
X
X
X
X
XX
2
2
3
3
= 6
5
.
Use the Power of a Product Property
We will now look at what happens when we raise a whole expression to a power. Lets take x to the power 4 and
cube it. Again we will us the full factored form for each.
(x
4
)
3
= x
4
x
4
x
4
3 factors of x to the power 4.
(x x x x)
..
x
4
(x x x x)
..
x
4
(x x x x)
..
x
4
= (x x x x x x x x x x x x)
..
x
12
So (x
4
)
3
= x
12
. It is clear that when we raise a power of x to a new power, the powers multiply.
When we take an expression and raise it to a power, we are multiplying the existing powers of x by the power above
the parenthesis.
Power rule for exponents: (x
n
)
m
= x
nm
Power of a product
If we have a product inside the parenthesis and a power on the parenthesis, then the power goes on each element
inside. So that, for example, (x
2
y)
4
=)(x
2
)
4
(y)
4
= x
8
y
4
. Watch how it works the long way.
(x x y)
..
x
2
y
(x x y)
..
x
2
y
(x x y)
..
x
2
y
(x x y)
..
x
2
y
= (x x x x x x x x y y y y)
..
x
8
y
4
Power rule for exponents: (x
n
)
m
= x
nm
and (x
n
y
m
)
p
= x
np
y
mp
WATCH OUT! This does NOT work if you have a sum or difference inside the parenthesis. For example, (x +
y)
2
,= x
2
+y
2
. This is a commonly made mistake. It is easily avoidable if you remember what an exponent means
(x +y)
2
= (x +y)(x +y). We will learn how to simplify this expression in a later chapter.
Lets apply the rules we just learned to a few examples.
When we have numbers, we just evaluate and most of the time it is not really important to use the product rule and
the power rule.
Example 6
Simplify the following expressions.
(a) 3
4
3
7
(b) 2
6
2
(c) (4
2
)
3
186
Solution
In each of the examples, we want to evaluate the numbers.
(a) Use the product rule rst: 3
5
3
7
= 3
12
Then evaluate the result: 3
12
= 531, 441
OR
We can evaluate each part separately and then multiply them. 3
5
3
7
= 243 2, 187 = 531, 441.
(b) Use the product rule rst. 2
6
2 = 2
7
Then evaluate the result. 2
7
= 128
OR
We can evaluate each part separately and then multiply them. 2
6
2 = 64 2 = 128
(c) Use the power rule rst. (4
2
)
3
= 4
6
Then evaluate the result. 4
6
= 4096
OR
We evaluate inside the parenthesis rst. (4
2
)
3
= (16)
3
Then apply the power outside the parenthesis. (16)
3
= 4096
When we have just one variable in the expression then we just apply the rules.
Example 7
(a) x
2
x
7
(b) (y
3
)
5
Solution
(a) Use the product rule. x
2
x
7
= x
2+7
= x
9
(b) Use the power rule. (y
3
)
5
= y
35
= y
15
When we have a mix of numbers and variables, we apply the rules to the numbers or to each variable separately.
Example 8
(a) (3x
2
y
3
) (4xy
2
)
(b) (4xyz) (x
2
y
3
) (2yz
4
)
(c) (2a
3
b
3
)
2
Solution
(a) We group like terms together.
(3x
2
y
3
) (4xy
2
) = (3 4) (x
2
x) (y
3
y
2
)
We multiply the numbers and apply the product rule on each grouping.
12x
3
y
5
187
(b) We groups like terms together.
(4xyz) (x
2
y
3
) (2yz
4
) = (4 2) (x x
2
) (y y
3
y) (z z
4
)
We multiply the numbers and apply the product rule on each grouping.
8x
3
y
5
z
5
(c) We apply the power rule for each separate term in the parenthesis.
(2a
3
b
3
)
2
= 2
2
(a
3
)
2
(b
3
)
2
We evaluate the numbers and apply the power rule for each term.
4a
6
b
6
In problems that we need to apply the product and power rules together, we must keep in mind the order of operation.
Exponent operations take precedence over multiplication.
Example 9
(a) (x
2
)
2
x
3
(b) (2x
2
y) (3xy
2
)
3
(c) (4a
2
b
3
)
2
(2ab
4
)
3
Solution
(a) (x
2
)
2
x
3
We apply the power rule rst on the rst parenthesis.
(x
2
)
2
x
3
= x
4
x
3
Then apply the product rule to combine the two terms.
x
4
x
3
= x
7
(b) (2x
2
y) (3xy
2
)
3
We must apply the power rule on the second parenthesis rst.
(2x
2
y) (3xy
2
)
3
= (2x
2
y) (27x
3
y
6
)
Then we can apply the product rule to combine the two parentheses.
188
(2x
2
y) (27x
3
y
6
) = 54x
5
y
7
(c) (4a
2
b
3
)
2
(2ab
4
)
3
We apply the power rule on each of the parentheses separately.
(4a
2
b
3
)
2
(2ab
4
)
3
= (16a
4
b
6
) (8a
3
b
12
)
Then we can apply the product rule to combine the two parentheses.
(16a
4
b
6
) (8a
3
b
12
) = 128a
7
b
18
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
Write in exponential notation.
1. 4 4 4 4 4
2. 3x 3x 3x
3. (2a)(2a)(2a)(2a)
4. 6 6 6 x x y y y y
Find each number:
1. 5
4
2. (2)
6
3. (0.1)
5
4. (0.6)
3
Multiply and simplify.
1. 6
3
6
6
2. 2
2
2
4
2
6
3. 3
2
4
3
4. x
2
x
4
5. (2y
4
)(3y)
6. (4a
2
)(3a)(5a
4
)
189
Simplify.
1. (a
3
)
4
2. (xy)
2
3. (3a
2
b
3
)
4
4. (2xy
4
z
2
)
5
5. (8x)
3
(5x)
2
6. (4a
2
)(2a
3
)
4
7. (12xy)(12xy)
2
8. (2xy
2
)(x
2
y)
2
(3x
2
y
2
)
190
4.3
Multiplicationof Polynomials
What You Will Learn
Multiply a polynomial by a monomial
Multiply a polynomial by a binomial
Multiply a Polynomial by a Monomial
When multiplying polynomials we must remember the exponent rules that we learned in the previous sections.
The Product Rule x
n
x
m
= x
n+m
This says that if we multiply expressions that have the same base, we just add the exponents and keep the base
unchanged.
If the expressions we are multiplying have coefcients and more than one variable, we multiply the coefcients just
as we would any number and we apply the product rule on each variable separately.
(2x
2
y
3
) (3x
2
y) = (2 3) (x
2+2
) (y
3+1
) = 6x
4
y
4
To multiply monomials, we need to multiply the coefcients separately and then apply the exponent rules to each
variable separately. Lets try some examples.
Example 1
Multiply the following monomials.
a) (2x
2
)(5x
3
)
b) (3y
4
)(2y
2
)
c) (3xy
5
)(6x
4
y
2
)
d) (12a
2
b
3
c
4
)(3a
2
b
2
)
Solution
a) (2x
2
)(5x
3
) = (2 5) (x
2
x
3
) = 10x
2+3
= 10x
5
b) (3y
4
)(2y
2
) = (3 2) (y
4
y
2
) =6y
4+2
=6y
6
c) (3xy
5
)(6x
4
y
2
) = 18x
1+4
y
5+2
=18x
5
y
7
d) (12a
2
b
3
c
4
)(3a
2
b
2
) = 36a
2+2
b
3+2
c
4
= 36a
4
b
5
c
4
To multiply a polynomial by a monomial, we use the Distributive Property.
Example 2
Multiply
a) 3(x
2
+3x 5)
b) 4x(3x
2
7)
c) 7y(4y
2
2y +1)
191
4.3. Multiplication of Polynomials www.ck12.org
Solution
a) 3(x
2
+3x 5) = 3(x
2
) +3(3x) 3(5) = 3x
2
+9x 15
b) 4x(3x
2
7) = (4x)(3x
2
) +(4x)(7) = 12x
3
28x
c) 7y(4y
2
2y +1) = (7y)(4y
2
) +(7y)(2y) +(7y)(1) =28y
3
+14y
2
7y
Notice that the use of the Distributive Property simplies the problems to just multiplying monomials by monomials
and adding all the separate parts together.
Example 3
Multiply
a) 2x
3
(3x
4
+2x
3
10x
2
+7x +9)
b) 7a
2
bc
3
(5a
2
3b
2
9c
2
)
Solution
a)
2x
3
(3x
4
+2x
3
10x
2
+7x +9) = (2x
3
)(3x
4
) +(2x
3
)(2x
3
) +(2x
3
)(10x
2
) +(2x
3
)(7x) +(2x
3
)(9)
=6x
7
+4x
6
20x
5
+14x
4
+18x
3
b)
7a
2
bc
3
(5a
2
3b
2
9c
2
) = (7a
2
bc
3
)(5a
2
) +(7a
2
bc
3
)(3b
2
) +(7a
2
bc
3
)(9c
2
)
=35a
4
bc
3
+21a
2
b
3
c
3
+63a
2
bc
5
Multiply a Polynomial by a Binomial
Lets start by multiplying two binomials together. A binomial is a polynomial with two terms, so a product of two
binomials will take the form.
(a+b)(c +d)
The Distributive Property also applies in this situation. Lets think of the rst parenthesis as one term. The
Distributive Property says that the term in front of the parenthesis multiplies with each term inside the parenthesis
separately. Then, we add the results of the products.
(a+b)(c +d) = a (c +d) +b (c +d)
We see that we can apply the distributive property on each of the parenthesis in turn.
a (c +d) +b (c +d) = a c +a d +b c +b d (or ac +ad +bc +bd)
What you should notice is that when multiplying any two polynomials, every term in one polynomial is multiplied
by every term in the other polynomial.
A common phrase that describes this process is FOIL, this stands for First, Outside, Inside, Last. The terms that
come rst in each parenthesis are multiplied together, then the two outside terms, then the inside terms, then the last
terms in each parenthesis.
192
Lets look at some examples of multiplying polynomials.
Example 4
Multiply and simplify (2x +1)(x +3)
Solution
We must multiply each term in the rst polynomial with each term in the second polynomial.
Lets try to be systematic to make sure that we get all the products.
First, multiply the rst term in the rst parenthesis by all the terms in the second parenthesis.
We are now done with the rst term.
Now we multiply the second term in the rst parenthesis by all terms in the second parenthesis and add them to the
previous terms.
We are done with the multiplication and we can simplify.
(2x)(x) +(2x)(3) +(1)(x) +(1)(3) = 2x
2
+6x +x +3
= 2x
2
+7x +3
This way of multiplying polynomials is called in-line multiplication or horizontal multiplication.
Example 5
Multiply and simplify
(a) (4x 5)(x 20)
(b) (3x 2)(3x +2)
(c) (2x 3)(3x
2
+2x 5)
Solution
a)
(4x 5)(x 20) = (4x)(x) +(4x)(20) +(5)(x) +(5)(20)
= 4x
2
80x 5x +100 = 4x
2
85x +100
b)
(3x 2)(3x +2) = (3x)(3x) +(3x)(2) +(2)(3x) +(2)(2)
= 9x
2
+6x 6x 4 = 9x
2
4
193
4.3. Multiplication of Polynomials www.ck12.org
(c)
(2x 3)(3x
2
+2x 5) = (2x)(3x
2
) +(2x)(2x) +(2x)(5) +(3)(3x
2
) +(3)(2x) +(3)(5)
= 6x
3
+4x
2
10x 9x
2
6x +15 = 6x
3
5x
2
16x +15
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
Multiply the following monomials.
1. (2x)(7x)
2. (5a
2
b)(12a
3
b
3
)
3. (3xy
2
z
2
)(15x
2
yz
3
)
Multiply and simplify.
1. 2x(4x 5)
2. 9x
3
(3x
2
2x +7)
3. 3a
2
b(9a
2
4b
2
)
4. (x 3)(x +2)
5. (a
2
+2)(3a
2
4)
6. (7x 2)(9x 5)
7. (2x 1)(2x
2
x +3)
8. (3x +2)(9x
2
6x +4)
9. (a
2
+2a3)(a
2
3a+4)
194
4.4
Special Products of Polynomials
What You Will Learn
Find the square of a binomial
Find the product of binomials using sum and difference formula
Find the Square of a Binomial
A special binomial product is the square of a binomial. Consider the following multiplication.
(x +4)(x +4)
Since we are multiplying the same expression by itself that means that we are squaring the expression. This means
that:
(x +4)(x +4) = (x +4)
2
Lets multiply: (x +4)(x +4) = x
2
+4x +4x +16
And combine like terms: = x
2
+8x +16
Notice that the middle terms are the same. Is this a coincidence? In order to nd that out, lets square a general
linear binomial.
(a+b)
2
= (a+b)(a+b) = a
2
+ab+ab+b
2
= a
2
+2ab+b
2
It looks like the middle terms are the same again. So far we have squared the sum of binomials. Lets now square a
difference of binomials.
(ab)
2
= (ab)(ab) = a
2
abab+b
2
= a
2
2ab+b
2
We notice a pattern when squaring binomials. To square a binomial, add the square of the rst term, add or subtract
twice the product of the terms, and the square of the second term. You should remember these formulas:
Square of a Binomial
(a+b)
2
= a
2
+2ab+b
2
and (ab)
2
= a
2
2abb
2
Remember! A polynomial that is raised to an exponent means that we multiply the polynomial by itself however
many times the exponent indicates. For instance
195
4.4. Special Products of Polynomials www.ck12.org
(a+b)
2
= (a+b)(a+b)
Dont make the common mistake (a+b)
2
= a
2
+b
2
. To see why (a+b)
2
,= a
2
+b
2
try substituting numbers for a
and b into the equation (for example, a = 4 and b = 3), and you will see that it is not a true statement. The middle
term, 2ab, is needed to make the equation work.
We can apply the formulas for squaring binomials to any number of problems.
Example 1
Square each binomial and simplify.
(a) (x +10)
2
(b) (2x 3)
2
(c) (x
2
+4)
2
(d) (5x 2y)
2
Solution
Lets use the square of a binomial formula to multiply each expression.
a) (x +10)
2
If we let a = x and b = 10, then
(a
2
+ b) = a
2
+ 2a b + b
2

(x + 10)
2
= (x)
2
+2(x)(10) +(10)
2
= x
2
+20x +100
b) (2x 3)
2
If we let a = 2x and b = 3, then
(ab)
2
= a
2
2ab+b
2
(2x 3)
2
= (2x)
2
2(2x)(3) +(3)
2
= 4x
2
12x +9
c) (x +4)
2
If we let a = x
2
and b = 4, then
(x
2
+4)
2
= (x
2
)
2
+2(x
2
)(4) +(4)
2
= x
4
+8x
2
+16
d) (5x 2y)
2
If we let a = 5x and b = 2y, then
196
(5x 2y)
2
= (5x)
2
2(5x)(2y) +(2y)
2
= 25x
2
20xy +4y
2
Find the Product of Binomials Using Sum and Difference Patterns
Another special binomial product is the product of a sum and a difference of terms. For example, lets multiply the
following binomials.
(x +4)(x 4) = x
2
4x +4x 16
= x
2
16
Notice that the middle terms are opposites of each other, so they cancel out when we collect like terms. This is not
a coincidence. This always happens when we multiply a sum and difference of the same terms.
(a+b)(ab) = a
2
abb
2
= a
2
b
2
When multiplying a sum and difference of the same two terms, the middle terms cancel out. We get the square of
the rst term minus the square of the second term. You should remember this formula.
Sum and Difference Formula (also called Difference of the Squares or DOTS)
(a+b)(ab) = a
2
b
2
Lets apply this formula to a few examples.
Example 2
Multiply the following binomials and simplify.
(a) (x +3)(x 3)
(b) (5x +9)(5x 9)
(c) (2x
3
+7)(2x
3
7)
(d) (4x +5y)(4x 5y)
Solution
(a) Let a = x and b = 3, then
(a+b)(ab) = a
2
b
2

(x +3)(x 3) = (x)
2
(3)
2
= x
2
9
197
4.4. Special Products of Polynomials www.ck12.org
(b) Let a = 5x and b = 9, then
(a + b)(a b) = a
2
b
2

(5x +9)(5x 9) = (5x)
2
(9)
2
= 25x
2
81
(c) Let a = 2x
3
and b = 7, then
(2x
3
+7)(2x
3
7) = (2x
3
)
2
(7)
2
= 4x
6
49
(d) Let a = 4x and b = 5y, then
(4x +5y)(4x 5y) = (4x)
2
(5y)
2
= 16x
2
25y
2
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
Use the special product for squaring binomials to multiply these expressions.
1. (x +9)
2
2. (3x 7)
2
3. (4x
2
+y
2
)
2
4. (8x 3)
2
Use the special product of a sum and difference to multiply these expressions.
1. (2x 1)(2x +1)
2. (x 12)(x +12)
3. (5a2b)(5a+2b)
4. (ab1)(ab+1)
198
4.5
Exponent Properties InvolvingQuotients
What You Will Learn
Use the quotient of powers property.
Use the power of a quotient property.
Simplify expressions involving quotient properties of exponents.
Use the Quotient of Powers Property
You saw in a previous section that we can use exponent rules to simplify products of numbers and variables. In
this section, you will learn that there are similar rules you can use to simplify quotients. Lets take an example of a
quotient, x
7
divided by x
4
.
x
7
x
4
=
x x x x
x
=
x x x
1
= x
3
You should see that when we divide two powers of x, the number of factors of x in the solution is the difference
between the factors in the numerator of the fraction, and the factors in the denominator. In other words, when
dividing expressions with the same base, keep the base and subtract the exponent in the denominator from the
exponent in the numerator.
Quotient Rule for Exponents:
x
n
x
m
= x
nm
When we have problems with different bases, we apply the quotient rule separately for each base.
x
5
y
3
x
3
y
2
=
x x x
y y
y
=
x x
1

y
1
= x
2
y OR
x
5
y
3
x
3
y
2
= x
53
y
32
= x
2
y
Example 1
Simplify each of the following expressions using the quotient rule.
(a)
x
10
x
5
(b)
a
6
a
(c)
a
5
b
4
a
3
b
2
Solution
Apply the quotient rule.
(a)
x
10
x
5
= x
105
= x
5
(b)
a
6
a
= a
61
= a
5
(c)
a
5
b
4
a
3
b
2
= a
53
b
42
= a
2
b
2
Now lets see what happens if the exponent on the denominator is bigger than the exponent in the numerator.
199
4.5. Exponent Properties Involving Quotients www.ck12.org
Example 2
Divide. x
4
x
7
Apply the quotient rule.
x
4
x
7
= x
47
= x
3
A negative exponent!? What does that mean?
Lets do the division longhand by writing each term in factored form.
x
4
x
6
=

x
x x x
=
1
x x
=
1
x
2
We see that when the exponent in the denominator is bigger than the exponent in the numerator, we still subtract the
powers. This time we subtract the smaller power from the bigger power and we leave the xs in the denominator.
When you simplify quotients, to get answers with positive exponents you subtract the smaller exponent from the
bigger exponent and leave the variable where the bigger power was.
We also discovered what a negative power means x
3
=
1
x
3
. Well learn more on this in the next section!
Example 3
Simplify the following expressions, leaving all powers positive.
(a)
x
2
x
6
(b)
a
2
b
6
a
5
b
Solution
(a) Subtract the exponent in the numerator from the exponent in the denominator and leave the xs in the denominator.
x
2
x
6
=
1
x
62
=
1
x
4
(b) Apply the rule on each variable separately.
a
2
b
6
a
5
b
=
1
a
52
b
61
1
=
b
5
a
3
The Power of a Quotient Property
When we apply a power to a quotient, we can learn another special rule. Here is an example.
_
x
3
y
2
_
4
=
_
x
3
y
2
_
_
x
3
y
2
_
_
x
3
y
2
_
_
x
3
y
2
_
=
(x x x) (x x x) (x x x) (x x x)
(y y) (y y) (y y) (y y)
=
x
12
y
8
Notice that the power on the outside of the parenthesis multiplies with the power of the x in the numerator and the
power of the y in the denominator. This is called the power of a quotient rule.
Power Rule for Quotients
_
x
n
y
m
_
p
=
x
np
y
mp
200
Simplifying Expressions Involving Quotient Properties of Exponents
Lets apply the rules we just learned to a few examples.
When we have numbers with exponents and not variables with exponents, we evaluate.
Example 4
(a)
4
5
4
2
(b)
5
3
5
7
(c)
_
3
4
5
2
_
2
Solution
In each of the examples, we want to evaluate the numbers.
(a) Use the quotient rule rst.
4
5
4
2
= 4
52
= 4
3
Then evaluate the result.
4
3
= 64
OR
We can evaluate each part separately and then divide.
1024
16
= 64
(b) Use the quotient rule rst.
5
3
5
7
=
1
5
73
=
1
5
4
1
5
4
=
1
625
OR
We can evaluate each part separately and then reduce.
5
3
5
7
=
125
78125
=
1
625
201
It makes more sense to apply the quotient rule rst for examples (a) and (b). In this way the numbers we are
evaluating are smaller because they are simplied rst before applying the power.
(c) Use the power rule for quotients rst.
_
3
4
5
2
_
2
=
3
8
5
4
3
8
5
4
=
6561
625
OR
We evaluate inside the parenthesis rst.
_
3
4
5
2
_
2
=
_
81
25
_
2
Then apply the power outside the parenthesis.
_
81
25
_
2
=
6561
625
When we have just one variable in the expression, then we apply the rules straightforwardly.
Example 5: Simplify the following expressions:
(a)
x
12
x
5
(b)
_
x
4
x
_
5
Solution:
(a) Use the quotient rule.
x
12
x
5
= x
125
= x
7
(b) Use the power rule for quotients rst.
_
x
4
x
_
5
=
x
20
x
5
Then apply the quotient rule
x
20
x
5
= x
15
202
OR
Use the quotient rule inside the parenthesis rst.
_
x
4
x
_
5
= (x
3
)
5
Then apply the power rule.
(x
3
)
5
= x
15
When we have a mix of numbers and variables, we apply the rules to each number or each variable separately.
Example 6
(a)
6x
2
y
3
2xy
2
(b)
_
2a
3
b
3
8a
7
b
_
2
Solution
(a) We group like terms together.
6x
2
y
3
2xy
2
=
6
2
x
2
x

y
3
y
2
We reduce the numbers and apply the quotient rule on each grouping.
3xy >
(b) We apply the quotient rule inside the parenthesis rst.
_
2a
3
b
3
8a
7
b
_
2
=
_
b
2
4a
4
_
2
Apply the power rule for quotients.
_
b
2
4a
4
_
2
=
b
4
16a
8
In problems that we need to apply several rules together, we must keep in mind the order of operations.
Example 7
(a) (x
2
)
2
x
6
x
4
203
(b)
_
16a
2
4b
5
_
3
b
2
a
16
Solution
(a) We apply the power rule rst on the rst parenthesis.
(x
2
)
2
x
6
x
4
= x
4
x
6
x
4
Then apply the quotient rule to simplify the fraction.
x
4
x
6
x
4
= x
4
x
4
Apply the product rule to simplify.
x
4
x
2
= x
6
(b) Simplify inside the rst parenthesis by reducing the numbers.
_
4a
2
b
5
_
3
b
2
a
16
Then we can apply the power rule on the rst parenthesis.
_
4a
2
b
5
_
3
b
2
a
16
=
64a
6
b
15

b
2
a
16
Group like terms together.
64a
6
b
15

b
2
a
16
= 64
a
6
a
16
b
2
b
15
Apply the quotient rule on each fraction.
64
a
6
a
16
b
2
b
15
=
64
a
10
b
13
Video Overview
MEDIA
204
Homework
Evaluate the following expressions.
1.
5
6
5
2
2.
6
7
6
3
3.
3
4
3
10
4.
_
2
2
3
3
_
3
1.
a
3
a
2
2.
x
5
x
9
3.
_
a
3
b
4
a
2
b
_
3
4.
x
6
y
2
x
2
y
5
5.
6a
3
2a
2
6.
15x
5
5x
7.
_
18a
4
15a
10
_
4
8.
25yx
6
20y
5
x
2
9.
_
x
6
y
2
x
4
y
4
_
3
10.
_
6a
2
4b
4
_
2
5b
3a
11.
(3ab)
2
(4a
3
b
4
)
3
(6a
2
b)
4
12.
(2a
2
bc
2
)(6abc
3
)
4ab
2
c
205
4.6. Zero and Negative Exponents www.ck12.org
4.6
ZeroandNegative Exponents
What You Will Learn
Simplify expressions with zero exponents.
Simplify expressions with negative exponents.
Evaluate exponential expressions with no variables.
Simplify Expressions with Exponents of Zero
Let us look again at the quotient rule for exponents (that
x
n
x
m
= x
nm
) and consider what happens when n = m. Lets
take the example of x
4
divided by x
4
.
x
4
x
4
= x
(44)
= x
0
Now we arrived at the quotient rule by considering how the factors of x cancel in such a fraction. Lets do that again
with our example of x
4
divided by x
4
.
x
4
x
4
=
x
= 1
So x
0
= 1.
This works for any value of the exponent, not just 4.
x
n
x
n
= x
nn
= x
0
Since there is the same number of factors in the numerator as in the denominator, they cancel each other out and we
obtain x
0
= 1. The zero exponent rule says that any number raised to the power zero is one.
Zero Rule for Exponents: x
0
= 1, x ,= 0
Simplify Expressions With Negative Exponents
Again we will look at the quotient rule for exponents (that
x
n
x
m
= x
nm
) and this time consider what happens when
m > n. Lets take the example of x
4
divided by x
6
.
x
4
x
6
= x
(46)
= x
2
for x ,= 0.
By the quotient rule our exponent for x is -2. But what does a negative exponent really mean? Lets do the same
calculation long-hand by dividing the factors of x
4
by the factors of x
6
.
x
4
x
6
=

x
x x x
=
1
x x
=
1
x
2
206
So we see that x to the power -2 is the same as one divided by x to the power +2. Here is the negative power rule for
exponents.
Negative Power Rule for Exponents
1
x
n
= x
n
x ,= 0
You will also see negative powers applied to products and fractions. For example, here it is applied to a product.
(x
3
y)
2
= x
6
y
2
using the power rule
x
6
y
2
=
1
x
6
1
y
2
=
1
x
6
y
2
using the negative power rule separately on each variable
Here is an example of a negative power applied to a quotient.
_
a
b
_
3
=
a
3
b
3
using the power rule for quotients
a
3
b
3
=
a
3
1

1
b
3
=
1
a
3
b
3
1
using the negative power rule on each variable separately
1
a
3
b
3
1
=
b
3
a
3
simplifying the division of fractions
b
3
a
3
=
_
b
a
_
3
using the power rule for quotients in reverse.
The last step is not necessary but it helps dene another rule that will save us time. A fraction to a negative power is
ipped.
Negative Power Rule for Fractions
_
x
y
_
n
=
_
y
x
_
n
, x ,= 0, y ,= 0
In some instances, it is more useful to write expressions without fractions and that makes use of negative powers.
Example 1
Write the following expressions without fractions.
(a)
1
x
(b)
2
x
2
(c)
x
2
y
3
(d)
3
xy
Solution
We apply the negative rule for exponents
1
x
n
= x
n
on all the terms in the denominator of the fractions.
(a)
1
x
= x
1
(b)
2
x
2
= 2x
2
(c)
x
2
y
3
= x
2
y
3
(d)
3
xy
= 3x
1
y
1
Sometimes, it is more useful to write expressions without negative exponents.
Example 2
Write the following expressions without negative exponents.
(a) 3x
3
207
(b) a
2
b
3
c
1
(c) 4x
1
y
3
(d)
2x
2
y
3
Solution
We apply the negative rule for exponents
1
x
n
= x
n
on all the terms that have negative exponents.
(a) 3x
3
=
3
x
3
(b) a
2
b
3
c
1
=
a
2
b
3
c
(c) 4x
1
y
3
=
4y
3
x
(d)
2x
2
y
3
=
2y
3
x
2
Example 3
Simplify the following expressions and write them without fractions.
(a)
4a
2
b
3
2a
5
b
(b)
_
x
3y
2
_
3
x
2
y
4
Solution
(a) Reduce the numbers and apply quotient rule on each variable separately.
4a
2
b
3
6a
5
b
= 2 a
25
b
31
= 2a
3
b
2
(b) Apply the power rule for quotients rst.
_
2x
y
2
_
3
x
2
y
4
=
8x
2
y
6

x
2
y
4
Then simplify the numbers, use product rule on the xs and the quotient rule on the ys.
8x
3
y
6

x
2
y
4
= 2 x
3+2
y
16
= 2x
5
y
5
Example 4
Simplify the following expressions and write the answers without negative powers.
(a)
_
ab
2
b
3
_
2
(b)
x
3
y
2
x
2
y
2
Solution
(a) Apply the quotient rule inside the parenthesis.
_
ab
2
b
3
_
2
= (ab
5
)
2
208
Apply the power rule.
(ab
5
)
2
= a
2
b
10
=
a
2
b
10
(b) Apply the quotient rule on each variable separately.
x
3
y
2
x
2
y
2
= x
32
y
2(2)
= x
5
y
4
=
y
4
x
5
Evaluate Exponential Expressions with No Variables
The same rules apply, dont be tempted to multiply a base and its negative exponent as in example (d) below
Example 6
Evaluate the following expressions to a single number.
(a) 5
0
(b) 7
2
(c)
_
2
3
_
3
(d) 3
3
Solution
(a) 5
0
= 1 Remember that a number raised to the power 0 is always 1.
(b) 7
2
= 7 7 = 49
(c)
_
2
3
_
3
=
2
3
3
3
=
8
27
(d) 3
3
=
1
3
3
=
1
27
a common mistake on this problem is to multiply 3 by -3.
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
Simplify the following expressions, be sure that there arent any negative exponents in the answer.
1. x
1
y
2
2. x
4
3.
x
3
x
7
4.
x
3
y
5
z
7
209
5.
_
a
b
_
2
6. (3a
2
b
2
c
3
)
3
7. x
3
x
3
8.
x
4
x
5
9.
2x
4
x
4
10. 2
4
210
4.7
Divisionof Polynomials by Monomials
What You Will Learn
Divide a polynomial by a monomial.
Divide a Polynomial by a Monomial
Well start by dividing a polynomial by a monomial. To do this, we divide each term of the polynomial by the
monomial. When the numerator has more than one term, the monomial on the bottom of the fraction serves as the
common denominator to all the terms in the numerator.
Example 1
Divide.
a)
8x
2
4x+16
2
b)
3x
2
+6x1
x
c)
3x
2
18x+6
9x
Solution
a)
8x
2
4x+16
2
=
8x
2
2

4x
2
+
16
2
= 4x
2
2x +8
b)
3x
3
+6x1
x
=
3x
3
x
+
6x
x

1
x
= 3x
2
+6
1
x
c)
3x
2
18x+6
9x
=
3x
2
9x

18x
9x
+
6
9x
=
x
3
2+
2
3x
A common error is to cancel the denominator with just one term in the numerator.
Consider the quotient
3x+4
4
.
Remember that the denominator of 4 is common to both the terms in the numerator. In other words we are dividing
both of the terms in the numerator by the number 4.
The correct way to simplify is:
3x +4
4
=
3x
4
+
4
4
=
3x
4
+1
A common mistake is to cross out the number 4 from the numerator and the denominator, leaving just 3x. This is
incorrect, because the entire numerator needs to be divided by 4.
Example 2
Divide
5x
3
10x
2
+x25
5x
2
.
Solution
5x
3
10x
2
+x 25
5x
2
=
5x
3
5x
2
10x
2
5x
2
+
x
5x
2
25
5x
2
211
4.7. Division of Polynomials by Monomials www.ck12.org
The negative sign in the denominator changes all the signs of the fractions:
5x
3
5x
2
+
10x
2
5x
2

x
5x
2
+
25
5x
2
=x +2
1
5x
+
5
x
2
Video Overview of Dividing a Polynomial by a Monomial
MEDIA
Homework
Divide the following polynomials:
1.
2x+4
2
2.
x4
x
3.
5x35
5x
4.
x
2
+2x5
x
5.
4x
2
+12x36
4x
6.
2x
2
+10x+7
2x
2
7.
x
3
x
2x
2
8.
5x
4
9
3x
9.
x
3
12x
2
+3x4
12x
2
10.
36x+x
3
9x
3
212
4.8
Divisionof Polynomials by Polynomials
What You Will Learn
To divide one polynomial by another using long division.
Long Division
We will be solving problems like the following:
2x 3 ) 2x
3
3x
2
8x+12
This question is asking 2x3 times what would be 2x
3
3x
2
8x+12? This is done with a procedure very similar
to long division with numbers.
The rst question to ask yourself is how many times does 2x go into 2x
3
? The answer is x
2
times.
x
2
2x 3 ) 2x
3
3x
2
8x +12
2x
3
3x
2
0
Place x
2
above the x
2
term in the polynomial.
Multiply x
2
by both terms in the divisor (2x and -3) and place them until their like terms. Subtract from the dividend
(2x
3
3x
2
8x +12). Pull down the next two terms and repeat.
x
2
4
2x 3 ) 2x
3
3x
2
8x+12
2x
3
3x
2
8x+12
8x+12
8x divided by 2x =4
After multiplying both terms in the divisor by -4, place that under the terms you brought down. When subtracting
we notice that everything cancels out. Therefore, just like we thought, x
2
4 is a factor.
When dividing polynomials, not every divisor will go in evenly to the dividend. If there is a remainder, write it as a
fraction over the divisor.
Example A
(2x
3
6x
2
+5x 20) (x
2
5)
213
4.8. Division of Polynomials by Polynomials www.ck12.org
Solution: Set up the problem using a long division bar.
x
2
5 ) 2x
3
6x
2
+5x20
How many times does x
2
go into 2x
3
? 2x times.
2x
x
2
5 ) 2x
3
6x
2
+5x20
2x
3
10x
2
4x
2
+5x20
Multiply 2x by the divisor. Subtract that from the dividend.
Repeat the previous steps. Now, how many times does x
2
go into 4x
2
? 4 times.
2x +4
x
2
5 ) 2x
3
6x
2
+5x20
2x
3
10x
2
4x
2
+5x20
4x
2
20
5x
At this point, we are done. x
2
cannot go into 5x because it has a higher degree. Therefore, 5x is a remainder. The
complete answer would be 2x +4+
5x
x
2
5
.
Example B
(3x
4
+x
3
17x
2
+19x 6) (x
2
2x +1). Determine if x
2
2x +1 goes evenly into 3x
4
+x
3
17x
2
+19x 6. If
so, try to factor the divisor and quotient further.
Solution: First, do the long division. If x
2
2x +1 goes in evenly, then the remainder will be zero.
3x
2
+7x 6
x
2
2x +1 ) 3x
4
+x
3
17x
2
+19x6
3x
4
6x
3
3x
2
7x
3
20x
2
+19x
7x
3
14x
2
+7x
6x
2
+12x6
6x
2
+12x6
0
This means that x
2
2x +1 and 3x
2
+7x 6 both go evenly into 3x
4
+x
3
17x
2
+19x 6.
Practice Exercises
1. (5x
4
+6x
3
12x
2
3) (x
2
+3)
214
2. Is (x +4) a factor of x
3
2x
2
51x 108? If so, nd any other factors.
Answers
1. Make sure to put a placeholder in for the xterm.
5x
2
+6x 27
x
2
+3 ) 5x
4
+6x
3
12x
2
+0x 3
5x
4
+15x
2
6x
3
27x
2
+0x
6x
3
+18x
27x
2
18x 3
27x
2
81
18x+78
The nal answer is 5x
2
+6x 27
18x78
x
2
+3
.
2. Divide (x +4) into x
3
2x
2
51x 108 and if the remainder is zero, it is a factor.
x
2
6x 27
x +4 ) x
3
2x
2
51x108
x
3
+4x
2
6x
2
51x
6x
2
24x
27x108
27x108
0
x +4 is a factor.
Video Overview of Dividing a Polynomial by a Polynomial
MEDIA
Divide the following polynomials using long division.
1. (2x
3
+5x
2
7x 6) (x +1)
2. (x
4
10x
3
+15x 30) (x 5)
3. (2x
4
8x
3
+4x
2
11x 1) (x
2
1)
4. (3x
3
4x
2
+5x 2) (3x +2)
215
4.8. Division of Polynomials by Polynomials www.ck12.org
5. (3x
4
5x
3
21x
2
30x +8) (x 4)
6. (2x
5
5x
3
+6x
2
15x +20) (2x
2
+3)
216
4.9
Scientic Notation
What You Will Learn
Write numbers in scientic notation.
Evaluate expressions in scientic notation.
Introduction Powers of 10
Consider the number six hundred and forty three thousand, two hundred and ninety seven. We write it as 643,297
and each digits position has a value assigned to it. You may have seen a table like this before.
hundred-thousands ten-thousands thousands hundreds tens units (ones)
6 4 3 2 9 7
We have seen that when we write an exponent above a number it means that we have to multiply a certain number of
factors of that number together. We have also seen that a zero exponent always gives us one, and negative exponents
make fractional answers. Look carefully at the table above. Do you notice that all the column headings are powers
of ten? Here they are listed.
100, 000 = 10
5
10, 000 = 10
4
1, 000 = 10
3
100 = 10
2
10 = 10
1
Even the units column is really just a power of ten. Unit means 1 and 1 = 10
0
.
If we divide 643,297 by 100,000 we get 6.43297. If we multiply this by 100,000 we get back to our original number.
But we have just seen that 100,000 is the same as 10
5
, so if we multiply 6.43297 by 10
5
we should also get our
original answer. In other words
6.4329710
5
= 643, 297
So we have found a new way of writing numbers! What do you think happens when we continue the powers of ten?
Past the units column down to zero we get into decimals, here the exponent becomes negative.
Writing Numbers Greater Than One in Scientic Notation
Scientic notation numbers are always written in the following form.
217
4.9. Scientic Notation www.ck12.org
a10
b
Where 1 a < 10 and b, the exponent, is an integer. This notation is especially useful for numbers that are either
very small or very large. When we use scientic notation to write numbers, the exponent on the 10 determines the
position of the decimal point.
Look at the following examples.
1.0710
4
= 10, 700
1.0710
3
= 1, 070
1.0710
2
= 107
1.0710
1
= 10.7
1.0710
0
= 1.07
1.0710
1
= 0.107
1.0710
2
= 0.0107
1.0710
3
= 0.00107
1.0710
4
= 0.000107
Look at the rst term of the list and examine the position of the decimal point in both expressions.
So the exponent on the ten acts to move the decimal point over to the right. An exponent of 4 moves it 4 places and
an exponent of 3 would move it 3 places.
Example 1
Write the following numbers in scientic notation.
(a) 63
(b) 9,654
(c) 653,937,000
(d) 1,000,000,006
218
(a) 63 = 6.310 = 6.310
1
(b) 9, 654 = 9.6541, 000 = 9.65410
3
(c) 653, 937, 000 = 6.53937000100, 000, 000 = 6.5393710
8
(d) 1, 000, 000, 006 = 1.0000000061, 000, 000, 000 = 1.00000000610
9
Example 2
The Sun is approximately 93 million miles for Earth. Write this distance in scientic notation.
This time we will simply write out the number long-hand (with a decimal point) and count decimal places.
Solution
93, 000, 000, 0
..
7 decimal places
= 9.310
7
miles
A Note on Signicant Figures
We often combine scientic notation with rounding numbers. If you look at Example 2, the distance you are given
has been rounded. It is unlikely that the distance is exactly 93 million miles! Looking back at the numbers in
Example 1, if we round the nal two answers to 2 signicant gures (2 s.f.) they become:
1(c) 6.510
8
1(d) 1.010
9
Note that the zero after the decimal point has been left in for Example 1(d) to indicate that the result has been
rounded. It is important to know when it is OK to round and when it is not.
Writing Numbers Less Than One in Scientic Notation
We have seen how we can use scientic notation to express large numbers, but it is equally good at expressing
extremely small numbers. Consider the following example.
Example 3
The time taken for a light beam to cross a football pitch is 0.0000004 seconds. Express this time in scientic notation.
We will proceed in a similar way as before.
0.0000004 = 40.0000001 = 4
1
10, 000, 000
= 4
1
10
7
= 410
7
So...
Just as a positive exponent on the ten moves the decimal point that many places to the right, a negative exponent
moves the decimal place that many places to the left.
Example 4
Express the following numbers in scientic notation.
(a) 0.003
219
(b) 0.000056
(c) 0.00005007
(d) 0.00000000000954
Lets use the method of counting how many places we would move the decimal point before it is after the rst
non-zero number. This will give us the value for our negative exponent.
(a) 0.003
..
3 decimal places
= 310
3
(b) 0.000056
..
5 decimal places
= 5.610
5
(c) 0.00005007
..
5 decimal places
= 5.00710
5
(d) 0.0000000000954
..
12 decimal places
= 9.5410
12
Evaluating Expressions in Scientic Notation
When we are faced with products and quotients involving scientic notation, we need to remember the rules for
exponents that we learned earlier. It is relatively straightforward to work with scientic notation problems if you
remember to deal with all the powers of 10 together. The following examples illustrate this.
Example 5
Evaluate the following expressions and write your answer in scientic notation.
(a) (3.210
6
) (8.710
11
)
(b) (5.210
4
) (3.810
19
)
(c) (1.710
6
) (2.710
11
)
The key to evaluating expressions involving scientic notation is to keep the powers of 10 together and deal with
them separately. Remember that when we use scientic notation, the leading number must be between 1 and 10.
We need to move the decimal point over one place to the left. See how this adds 1 to the exponent on the 10.
(a)
(3.210
6
) (8.710
11
) = 3.28.7
..
27.84
10
6
10
11
..
10
17
(3.210
6
) (8.710
11
) = 2.78410
1
10
17
Solution
(3.210
6
) (8.710
11
) = 2.78410
18
(b)
(5.210
4
) (3.810
19
) = 5.23.8
..
19.76
10
4
10
19
..
10
23
= 1.97610
1
10
23
Solution
(5.210
4
) (3.810
19
) = 1.97610
22
220
(c)
(1.710
6
) (2.710
11
) = 1.72.7
..
4.59
10
6
10
11
..
10
5
Solution
(1.710
6
) (2.710
11
) = 4.5910
5
Example 6
Evaluate the following expressions. Round to 3 signicant gures and write your answer in scientic notation.
(a) (3.210
6
) (8.710
11
)
(b) (5.210
4
) (3.810
19
)
(c) (1.710
6
) (2.710
11
)
It will be easier if we convert to fractions and THEN separate out the powers of 10.
(a)
(3.210
6
) (8.710
11
) =
3.210
6
8.710
11
Next we separate the powers of 10.
=
3.2
8.7
10
6
10
11
Evaluate each fraction (round to 3 s.f.):
= 0.36810(611) Remember how to write scientic notation!
= 3.6810
1
10
5
Solution
(3.210
6
) (8.710
11
) = 3.8610
6
(rounded to 3 signicant gures)
(b)
(5.210
4
) (3.810
19
) =
5.210
4
3.810
19
Separate the powers of 10.
=
5.2
3.8
10
4
10
19
Evaluate each fraction (round to 3 s.f.).
= 1.3710((4) (19))
= 1.3710
15
Solution
(5.210
4
) (3.810
19
) = 1.3710
15
(c)
(1.710
6
) (2.710
11
) =
1.710
6
2.710
11
Next we separate the powers of 10.
=
1.7
2.7
10
6
10
11
Evaluate each fraction (round to 3 s.f.).
= 0.63010
(6(11))
Remember how to write scientic notation!
= 6.3010
1
10
17
Solution
(1.710
6
) (2.710
11
) = 6.3010
16
Note that the nal zero has been left in to indicate that the result has been rounded.
221
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
1. Write the numerical value of the following.
a. 3.10210
2
b. 7.410
4
c. 1.7510
3
d. 2.910
5
e. 9.9910
9
2. Write the following numbers in scientic notation.
a. 120,000
b. 1,765,244
c. 12
d. 0.00281
e. 0.000000027
3. Evaluate
(a) (410
2
) (210
3
)
(b) (810
9
) (410
3
)
(c) (310
2
) (210
2
)
222
4.10
Square Roots andIrrational Numbers
What You Will Learn
Square Roots
Rational and Irrational Numbers
Simplifying Square Roots
Square Roots
The square root of a number n is any number such that s
2
= n.
Every positive number has two square roots, the positive and the negative. The symbol used to represent the square
root is

x. It is assumed that this is the positive square root of x. To show both the positive and negative values, you
can use the symbol , read plus or minus.
For example:
81 = 9 means the positive square root of 81.
81 =9 means the negative square root of 81.
81 =9 means the positive or negative square root of 81.

Example A
A square measures 324 square meters. How long is one side of the square?
Solution: The area of a square is s
2
= Area. The value of Area can be replaced with 324.
s
2
= 324
The value of s represents the square root of 324.
s =
324 = 18
The square is 18 meters long by 18 meters wide.
Approximating Square Roots
When the square root of a number is a whole number, this number is called a perfect square. 9 is a perfect square
because

9 = 3.
Not all square roots are whole numbers. Many square roots are irrational numbers, meaning there is no rational
number equivalent. For example, 2 is the square root of 4 because 22 = 4. The number 7 is the square root of 49
because 77 = 49. What is the square root of 5?
There is no whole number multiplied by itself that equals ve, so

5 is not a whole number. To nd the value of
5, we can use estimation.

223
4.10. Square Roots and Irrational Numbers www.ck12.org
To estimate the square root of a number, look for the perfect integers less than and greater than the value, and then
estimate the decimal.
Example B
Estimate

5.
Solution: The perfect square below 5 is 4 and the perfect square above 5 is 9. Therefore, 4 < 5 < 9. Therefore,

5
is between

4 and

9, or 2 <
5 < 3. Because 5 is closer to 4 than 9, the decimal is a low value:

5 2.2.
For example, suppose you do not have a calculator and you need to nd

18. You know there is no whole number
squared that equals 18, so

18 is an irrational number. The value is between

16 = 4 and

25 = 5. However, we
need to nd a more simplied value of

18.
Begin by writing the prime factorization of

18.

18 =
92 =
2.

9 = 3 but

2 does not have a
whole number value. Therefore, the simplied value of

18 is 3
2.
You can check your answer on a calculator by nding the decimal approximation for each square root.
Example C
Find the simplied value of

75.
Solution:
75 =
253 =
25
3 = 5
3
Guided Practice
The area of a square is 50 square feet. What are the lengths of its sides?
Solution:
We know that the formula for the area of a square is a = s
2
. Using this formula:
a = s
2
50 = s
2
50 =
s
2
50 = s
Now we will simplify:
50 =
25 2 = 5
2.
The length of each side of the square is 5
2 feet.
Video Overview of Square Roots
224
MEDIA
Video Overview of Simplifying Square Roots
MEDIA
Homework
Find the following square roots. Give your answer in the simplest form.
1.

25
2.

24
3.

20
4.

200
5.

2000
6.
_
1
4
7.
_
9
4
8.

0.16
9.

0.1
10.

0.01
Use a calculator to nd the following square roots. Round to two decimal places.
1.

13
2.

99
3.

123
4.

2
5.

2000
6.

0.25
7.

1.35
8.

0.37
9.

0.7
10.

0.01
225
4.11. Pythagorean Theorem www.ck12.org
4.11
PythagoreanTheorem
What You Will Learn
Pythagorean Theorem
Pythagorean Theorem
One of the most important theorems in history is Pythagoreans Theorem. Put it words, it states, The sum of the
square of each leg of a right triangle is equal to the square of the hypotenuse.
Lets review basic right triangle anatomy.
The two segments forming the right angle (90
) are called the legs of the right triangle. The segment opposite the
right angle is called the hypotenuse.
So, the Pythagorean Theorem states, (leg
1
)
2
+(leg
2
)
2
= (hypotenuse)
2
:
a
2
+b
2
= c
2
Or, to nd the hypotenuse, c =
_
a
2
+b
2
.
This theorem will give you practice in using square roots
Homework
Find the missing length of each right triangle.
1. a = 12, b = 16, c =?
2. a =?, b = 20, c = 30
3. a = 4, b =?, c = 11
226
4.
5.
6.
7. One leg of a right triangle is 4 feet less than the hypotenuse. The other leg is 12 feet. Find the lengths of the
three sides of the triangle.
8. One leg of a right triangle is 3 more than twice the length of the other. The hypotenuse is 3 times the length
of the short leg. Find the lengths of the three legs of the triangle.
227
4.12. Multiplication and Division of Radicals www.ck12.org
4.12
MultiplicationandDivisionof Radicals
What You Will Learn
Multiply radicals
Divide radicals
Multiply Radicals
Example A
Simplify

3
12.
Solution:
12 =
36 = 6
Example B
3(
6+5) =
18+5
3
which simplies to
3
2+5
3
Divide Radicals
Dividing radicals is more complicated. A radical in the denominator of a fraction is not considered simplied by
mathematicians. In order to simplify the fraction, you must rationalize the denominator.
To rationalize the denominator means to remove any radical signs from the denominator of the fraction using
multiplication.
Remember:
a =
a
2
= a
Example B
Simplify
2
3
.
Solution:
We must clear the denominator of its radical using the property above. Remember, what you do to one piece of a
fraction, you must do to all pieces of the fraction.
2
3
=
2
3
2
=
2
3
3
228
Video Overview or Rationalizing the Denominator
MEDIA
Homework
Multiply the following expressions.
1.

6
_
10+
8
_
2.
_
b
__
a+
b
_
3.
_
2
x +5
__
2
x +5
_
Rationalize the denominator.
1.
7
15
2.
9
10
3.
2x
5x
4.
3y
5. The volume of a spherical balloon is 950cm
3
. Find the radius of the balloon. (Volume of a sphere =
4
3
R
3
)
6. A rectangular picture is 9 inches wide and 12 inches long. The picture has a frame of uniform width. If the
combined area of picture and frame is 180in
2
, what is the width of the frame?
7. The volume of a soda can is 355 cm
3
. The height of the can is four times the radius of the base. Find the
radius of the base of the cylinder.
229
4.13. Addition and Subtraction of Radicals www.ck12.org
4.13
AdditionandSubtractionof Radicals
What You Will Learn
Add and Subtract Radicals
Add and Subtract Radiclas
To add or subtract radicals, they must have the same square root associated with them
a
n
x +b
n
x = (a+b)
n
x
Example A
Add: 3
5+6
5.
Solution:
The value
5 is considered a like term. Using the rule above:

3
5+6
5 = (3+6)
5 = 9
5
Example B
Simplify 2
13+6
12.
Solution:
The square roots are not like terms, so there can be no further simplication.
In some cases, the radical may need to be reduced before addition/subtraction is possible.
Example C
Simplify 4
3+2
12.
Solution:
12 simplies to 2
3.
4
3+2
12 4
3+2
_
2
3
_
4
3+4
3 = 8
3
230
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
Simplify the following expressions as much as possible.
1. 3
86
32
2.

180+6
405
3.

6
27+2
54+3
48
4.

84
98
5.

48+
27
231
www.ck12.org
CHAPTER
5
Unit 5 - Quadratic Functions
Chapter Outline
5.1 MONOMIAL FACTORS OF POLYNOMIALS
5.2 FACTORING QUADRATIC EXPRESSIONS
5.3 FACTORING POLYNOMIALS WHERE A DOES NOT EQUAL 1
5.4 FACTORING THE DIFFERENCE OF TWO SQUARES (DOTS)
5.5 SOLVE QUADRATIC EQUATIONS BY FACTORING
5.6 SOLVE QUADRATIC EQUATIONS BY SQUARE ROOTS
5.7 SOLVE QUADRATIC EQUATIONS BY COMPLETING THE SQUARE
5.8 SOLVING QUADRATIC EQUATIONS BY THE QUADRATIC FORMULA
5.9 GRAPHS OF QUADRATIC FUNCTIONS
5.10 VERTEX FORM OF A QUADRATIC EQUATION
5.11 APPLICATIONS OF QUADRATIC EQUATIONS
232
www.ck12.org Chapter 5. Unit 5 - Quadratic Functions
5.1
Monomial Factors of Polynomials
What You Will Learn
Greatest Common Factor (GCF)
Factoring out the GCF from a polynomial
Greatest Common Factor (GCF)
The GCF is the highest number that divides exactly into two or more numbers . For example, the GCF of 12 and 18
is 6 because that is the largest number that divides exactly into both numbers. If you are looking for the GCF of a
term that also includes variables, you need to also factor out the highest common power of the variable.
Find the GCF of 8x
2
and 24x
3
Solution
The GCF is 8x
2
because 8 is the largest number that divides evenly into both numbers and x
2
is the highest common
power of the variable.
Factoring Out the GCF From a Polynomial
When a GCF is factored from a polynomial, you divide each term by the common factor. What is left over remains
in parentheses.
Example B
Factor:
a. 15x 25
b. 3a+9b+6
Solution:
1. We see that the factor of 5 divides evenly from all terms.
15x 25 = 5(3x 5)
2. We see that the factor of 3 divides evenly from all terms.
233
5.1. Monomial Factors of Polynomials www.ck12.org
3a+9b+6 = 3(a+3b+2)
Now we will use examples where variables also need to be factored out.
Example C
Find the greatest common factor.
a
3
3a
2
+4a
Solution:
Notice that the factor a appears in all terms of a
3
3a
2
+4a but each term has a different power of a. The common
factor is the lowest power that appears in the expression. In this case the factor is a.
Lets rewrite: a
3
3a
2
+4a = a(a
2
) +a(3a) +a(4)
Factor a to get a(a
2
3a+4).
Example C
5x
3
y 15x
2
y
2
+25xy
3
Solution:
The common factor is 5xy.
When we factor 5xy, we obtain 5xy(x
2
3xy +5y
2
).
Practice Exercises
16x
2
y
3
z
2
+4x
3
yz +8x
2
y
4
z
5
Solution:
First, look at the coefcients to see if they share any common factors. They do: 4.
Next, look for the lowest power of each variable, because that is the most you can factor out. The lowest power of x
is x
2
. The lowest powers of y and z are to the rst power.
This means we can factor out 4x
2
yz. Now, we have to determine what is left in each term after we factor out 4x
2
yz:
16x
2
y
3
z
2
+4x
3
yz +8x
2
y
4
z
5
= 4x
2
yz(4y
2
z +x +2y
3
z
4
)
Video Overview
MEDIA
234
Homework
Factor the common factor from the following polynomials.
1. 36a
2
+9a
3
6a
7
2. yx
3
y
2
+12x +16y
3. 3x
3
21x
4. 5x
6
+15x
4
5. 4x
3
+10x
2
2x
6. 10x
6
+12x
5
4x
4
7. 12xy +24xy
2
+36xy
3
8. 5a
3
7a
9. 45y
12
+30y
10
10. 16xy
2
z +4x
3
y
235
5.2. Factoring Quadratic Expressions www.ck12.org
5.2
FactoringQuadratic Expressions
What You Will Learn
Factor quadratic trinomials in standard form.
Write Quadratic Expressions in Standard Form
Quadratic polynomials are polynomials of 2
nd
degree. The standard form of a quadratic polynomial is written as
ax
2
+bx +c
Here a, b, and c stand for constant numbers. Factoring these polynomials depends on the values of these constants.
Factor when a = 1, b is Positive, and c is Positive
Lets rst consider the case where a = 1, b is positive and c is positive. The quadratic trinomials will take the
following form.
x
2
+bx +c
You know from multiplying binomials that when you multiply two factors (x +m)(x +n) you obtain a quadratic
polynomial. Lets try an example and see what happens. We use The Distributive Property.
(x +2)(x +5) = x
2
+5x +2x +10
To simplify this polynomial we would combine the like terms in the middle by adding them.
(x +2)(x +5) = x
2
+7x +10
To factor we need to do this process in reverse. This means that we start with x
2
+7x +10 and we need to nd two
numbers that multiply to 10 and add to 7.
Lets try some specic examples.
Example 1
Factor x
2
+5x +6
Solution We are looking for an answer that is a product of two binomials in parentheses.
(x + )(x + )
236
To ll in the blanks, we want two numbers m and n that multiply to 6 and add to 5. A good strategy is to list the
possible ways we can multiply two numbers to give us 6 and then see which of these pairs of numbers add to 5. The
number six can be written as the product of.
6 = 1 6 and 1+6 = 7
6 = 2 3 and 2+3 = 5 This is the correct choice.
So the answer is (x +2)(x +3).
We can check to see if this is correct by multiplying (x +2)(x +3).
x + 2
x + 3
3x + 6
x
2
+ 2x
x
2
+ 5x + 9
The answer checks out.
Example 2
Factor x
2
+7x +12
Solution
We are looking for an answer that is a product of two parentheses (x + )(x + ).
The number 12 can be written as the product of the following numbers.
12 = 1 12 and 1+12 = 13
12 = 2 6 and 2+6 = 8
The answer is (x +3)(x +4).
Example 3
Factor x
2
+8x +12.
Solution
We are looking for an answer that is a product of the two parentheses (x + )(x + ).
12 = 1 12 and 1+12 = 13
12 = 3 4 and 3+4 = 7
237
Example 4
Factor x
2
+12x +36.
Solution
36 = 1 36 and 1+36 = 37
36 = 2 18 and 2+18 = 20
36 = 3 12 and 3+12 = 15
36 = 4 9 and 4+9 = 13
36 = 6 6 and 6+6 = 12 This is the correct choice
Factor when a = 1, b is Negative and c is Positive
Now lets see how this method works if the middle coefcient (b) is negative.
Example 5
Factor x
2
6x +8.
Solution
8 = 1 8 and 1+8 = 9 Notice that these are two different choices.
But also,
8 = (1) (8) and 1+(8) =9 Notice that these are two different choices.
8 = 2 4 and 2+4 = 6
But also,
8 = (2) (4) and 2+(4) =6 This is the correct choice.
The answer is (x 2)(x 4)
We can check to see if this is correct by multiplying (x 2)(x 4).
x 2
x 4
4x + 8
x
2
2x
x
2
6x + 8
238
Example 6
Factor x 17x +16
Solution
We are looking for an answer that is a product of two parentheses: (x )(x ).
The number 16 can be written as the product of the following numbers:
16 = 1 16 and 1+16 = 17
16 = (1) (16) and 1+(16) =17 This is the correct choice.
16 = 2 8 and 2+8 = 10
16 = (2) (8) and 2+(8) =10
16 = 4 4 and 4+4 = 8
16 = (4) (4) and 4+(4) =8
The answer is (x 1)(x 16).
Factor when a = 1 and c is Negative
Now lets see how this method works if the constant term is negative.
Example 7
Factor x
2
+2x 15
Solution
We are looking for an answer that is a product of two parentheses (x )(x ).
In this case, we must take the negative sign into account. The number -15 can be written as the product of the
following numbers.
15 =1 15 and 1+15 = 14 Notice that these are two different choices.
And also,
15 = 1 (15) and 1+(15) =14 Notice that these are two different choices.
15 =3 5 and 3+5 = 2 This is the correct choice.
15 = 3 (5) and 3+(5) =2
The answer is (x 3)(x +5).
We can check to see if this is correct by multiplying (x 3)(x +5).
239
x 3
x + 5
5x 15
x
2
3x
x
2
+ 2x 15
Example 8
Factor x
2
10x 24
Solution
We are looking for an answer that is a product of two parentheses (x )(x ).
The number -24 can be written as the product of the following numbers.
24 =1 24 and 1+24 = 23
24 = 1 (24) and 1+(24) =23
24 =2 12 and 2+12 = 10
24 = 2 (12) and 2+(12) =10 This is the correct choice.
24 =3 8 and 3+8 = 5
24 = 3 (8) and 3+(8) =5
24 =4 6 and 4+6 = 2
24 = 4 (6) and 4+(6) =2
Example 9
Factor x
2
+34x 35
Solution
We are looking for an answer that is a product of two parentheses (x )(x )
The number -35 can be written as the product of the following numbers:
35 =1 35 and 1+35 = 34 This is the correct choice.
35 = 1 (35) and 1+(35) =34
35 =5 7 and 5+7 = 2
35 = 5 (7) and 5+(7) =2
Video Overview
240
MEDIA
Homework
Factor the following quadratic polynomials.
1. x
2
+10x +9
2. x
2
+15x +50
3. x
2
+10x +21
4. x
2
+16x +48
5. x
2
11x +24
6. x
2
13x +42
7. x
2
14x +33
8. x
2
9x +20
9. x
2
+5x 14
10. x
2
+6x 27
11. x
2
+7x 78
12. x
2
+4x 32
13. x
2
12x 45
14. x
2
5x 50
15. x
2
3x 40
16. x
2
5x +24
241
5.3. Factoring Polynomials where a does not equal 1 www.ck12.org
5.3
FactoringPolynomials where a does not
equal 1
What You Will Learn
Factor a quadratic trinomial where a ,= 1
Factor Quadratic Trinomials Where a ,= 1
Factoring by grouping is a very useful method for factoring quadratic trinomials where a ,= 1.
To factor a quadratic polynomial where a ,= 1, we follow the following steps.
a. We nd the product ac.
b. We look for two numbers that multiply to give ac and add to give b.
c. We rewrite the middle term using the two numbers we just found.
d. We factor the expression by grouping.
Lets apply this method to the following examples.
Example 6
Factor the following quadratic trinomials by grouping.
a) 3x
2
+8x +4
b) 6x
2
11x +4
c) 5x
2
6x +1
Solution
Lets follow the steps outlined above.
a) 3x
2
+8x +4
Step 1 ac = 3 4 = 12
Step 2 The number 12 can be written as a product of two numbers in any of these ways:
12 = 1 12 and 1+12 = 13
12 = 3 4 and 3+4 = 7
Step 3 Re-write the middle term as: 8x = 2x +6x, so the problem becomes the following.
3x
2
+8x +4 = 3x
2
+2x +6x +4
Step 4: Factor an x from the rst two terms and 2 from the last two terms.
242
x(3x +2) +2(3x +2)
Now factor the common binomial (3x +2).
(3x +2)(x +2)
Our answer is (3x +2)(x +2).
To check if this is correct we multiply (3x +2)(x +2).
3x + 2
x + 2
6x + 4
3x
2
+ 2x
3x
2
+ 8x + 4
b) 6x
2
11x +4
Step 1 ac = 6 4 = 24
Step 2 The number 24 can be written as a product of two numbers in any of these ways.
24 = 1 24 and 1+24 = 25
24 =1 (24) and 1+(24) =25
24 = 2 12 and 2+12 = 14
24 =2 (12) and 2+(12) =14
24 = 3 8 and 3+8 = 11
24 =3 (8) and 3+(8) =11 This is the correct choice.
24 = 4 6 and 4+6 = 10
24 =4 (6) and 4+(6) =10
Step 3 Re-write the middle term as 11x =3x 8x, so the problem becomes
6x
2
11x +4 = 6x
2
3x 8x +4
Step 4 Factor by grouping. Factor a 3x from the rst two terms and factor -4 from the last two terms.
3x(2x 1) 4(2x 1)
Now factor the common binomial (2x 1).
243
5.3. Factoring Polynomials where a does not equal 1 www.ck12.org
(2x 1)(3x 4)
Our answer is (2x 1)(3x 4).
c) 5x
2
6x +1
Step 1 ac = 5 1 = 5
5 = 1 5 and 1+5 = 6
5 =1 (5) and 1+(5) =6 This is the correct choice
Step 3 Rewrite the middle term as 6x =x 5x. The problem becomes
5x
2
6x +1 = 5x
2
x 5x +1
Step 4 Factor by grouping: factor an x from the rst two terms and a factor of -1 from the last two terms
x(5x 1) 1(5x 1)
(5x 1)(x 1).
Our answer is (5x 1)(x 1).
Video Overview using Grouping
MEDIA
Video Overview using Guess and Check
MEDIA
244
Homework
Factor completely.
1. 2x
2
+16x +30
2. x
3
+17x
2
70x
3. 2x
2
512
4. 12x
3
+12x
2
+3x
Factor the following quadratic binomials by grouping.
1. 4x
2
+25x 21
2. 6x
2
+7x +1
3. 4x
2
+8x 5
4. 3x
2
+16x +21
245
5.4. Factoring the Difference of Two Squares (DOTS) www.ck12.org
5.4
Factoringthe Difference of TwoSquares
(DOTS)
What You Will Learn
Factor the difference of two squares.
Factor the Difference of Two Squares
We use the sum and difference formula to factor a difference of two squares. A difference of two squares can be a
quadratic polynomial in this form.
a
2
b
2
Both terms in the polynomial are perfect squares. In a case like this, the polynomial factors into the sum and
difference of the square root of each term.
a
2
b
2
= (a+b)(ab)
In these problems, the key is guring out what the a and b terms are. Lets do some examples of this type.
Example 1
Factor the difference of squares.
a) x
2
9
b) x
2
100
c) x
2
1
Solution
a) Rewrite as x
2
9 as x
2
3
2
. Now it is obvious that it is a difference of squares.
The difference of squares formula is a
2
b
2
= (a+b)(ab)
Lets see how our problem matches with the formula x
2
3
2
= (x +3)(x 3)
The answer is x
2
9 = (x +3)(x 3).
We can check to see if this is correct by multiplying (x +3)(x 3).
x + 3
x 3
3x 9
x
2
+3x
x
2
+0x 9
246
We could factor this polynomial without recognizing that it is a difference of squares. With the methods we learned
in the last section we know that a quadratic polynomial factors into the product of two binomials.
(x )(x )
We need to nd two numbers that multiply to -9 and add to 0, since the middle term is missing.
We can write -9 as the following products
9 =1 9 and 1+9 = 8
9 = 1 (9) and 1+(9) =8
9 = 3 (3) and 3+(3) = 0 This is the correct choice
We can factor x
2
9 as (x +3)(x 3), which is the same answer as before.
You can always factor using methods for factoring trinomials, but it is faster if you can recognize special products
such as the difference of squares.
b) Rewrite x
2
100 as x
2
10
2
. This factors as (x +10)(x 10).
c) Rewrite x
2
1 as x
2
1
2
. This factors as (x +1)(x 1).
Example 2
a) 16x
2
25
b) 4x
2
81
c) 49x
2
64
Solution
a) Rewrite 16x
2
25 as (4x)
2
5
2
. This factors as (4x +5)(4x 5).
b) Rewrite 4x
2
81 as (2x)
2
9
2
c) Rewrite 49x
2
64 as (7x)
2
8
2
Example 3
Factor the difference of squares:
a) x
2
y
2
b) 9x
2
4y
2
c) x
2
y
2
1
Solution
a) x
2
y
2
factors as (x +y)(x y).
b) Rewrite 9x
2
4y
2
as (3x)
2
(2y)
2
. This factors as (3x +2y)(3x 2y).
c) Rewrite as x
2
y
2
1 as (xy)
2
1
2
. This factors as (xy +1)(xy 1).
Example 4
247
5.4. Factoring the Difference of Two Squares (DOTS) www.ck12.org
a) x
4
25
b) 16x
4
y
2
c) x
2
y
8
64z
2
Solution
a) Rewrite x
4
25 as (x
2
)
2
5
2
. This factors as (x
2
+5)(x
2
5).
b) Rewrite 16x
4
y
2
as (4x
2
)
2
y
2
. This factors as (x
2
+5)(x
2
5).
c) Rewrite x
2
y
8
64z
2
as (xy
2
)
2
(8z). This factors as (xy
2
+8z)(xy
2
8z).
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
Factor the following difference of squares.
1. x
2
4
2. x
2
36
3. x
2
+100
4. x
2
400
5. 9x
2
4
6. 25x
2
49
7. 36x
2
+25
8. 16x
2
81y
2
248
5.5
Solve Quadratic Equations by Factoring
What You Will Learn
Solving a Quadratic Polynomial Equation by Factoring
Solve Quadratic Polynomial Equations by Factoring
With the methods we learned in the last two sections, we can factor many kinds of quadratic polynomials. This is
very helpful when we want to solve polynomial equations such as
ax
2
+bx +c = 0
To solve a quadratic equation like this, perform the following steps:
Step 1
If necessary, rewrite the equation in standard form so that
Quadratic expression = 0.
Step 2
Factor the polynomial completely.
Step 3
Use the Zero-Product rule to set each factor equal to zero.
Step 4
Solve each equation from Step 3.
Step 5
Check your answers by substituting your solutions into the original equation.
We will do a few examples that show how to solve quadratic polynomials using the factoring methods we just
learned.
Example 1
Solve the following polynomial equations.
a) x
2
+7x +6 = 0
b) x
2
8x =12
c) x
2
= 2x +15
Solution
a) x
2
+7x +6 = 0
Rewrite This is not necessary since the equation is in the correct form already.
Factor We can write 6 as a product of the following numbers.
249
5.5. Solve Quadratic Equations by Factoring www.ck12.org
6 = 2 3 and 2+3 = 5
x
2
+7x +6 = 0 factors as (x +1)(x +6) = 0
Set each factor equal to zero
x +1 = 0 or x +6 = 0
Solve
x =1 or x =6
Check Substitute each solution back into the original equation.
x =1 (1)
2
+7(1) +6 = 17+6 = 0 Checks out.
x =6 (6)
2
+7(6) +6 = 3642+6 = 0 Checks out.
b) x
2
8x =12
Rewrite x
2
8x =12 is rewritten as x
2
8x +12 = 0.
Factor We can write 12 as a product of the following numbers.
12 = 1 12 and 1+12 = 13
12 =1 (12) and 1+(12) =13
12 = 2 6 and 2+6 = 8
12 = 3 4 and 3+4 = 7
12 =3 (4) and 3+(4) =7
x
2
8x +12 = 0 factors as (x 2)(x 6) = 0
Set each factor equal to zero.
x 2 = 0 or x 6 = 0
Solve.
x = 2 or x = 6
250
x = 2 (2)
2
8(2) = 416 =12 Checks out.
x = 2 (6)
2
8(6) = 3648 =12 Checks out.
c) x
2
= 2x +15
Rewrite x
2
= 2x +15 is re-written as x
2
2x 15 = 0.
Factor We can write -15 as a product of the following numbers.
15 = 1 (15) and 1+(15) =14
15 =1 (15) and 1+(15) = 14
15 =3 5 and 3+5 = 2
15 = 3 (5) and 3+(5) =2 This is the correct choice.
x
2
2x 15 = 0 factors as (x +3)(x 5) = 0.
Set each factor equal to zero
x +3 = 0 or x 5 = 0
Solve
x =3 or x = 5
x =3 (3)
2
= 2(3) +15 9 = 0 Checks out.
x = 5 (5)
2
= 2(5) +15 25 = 25 Checks out.
Example 2
Lets try this procedure with one of the more complicated factoring examples from a previous section.
6x
2
11x +4
Step 1 ac = 6 4 = 24
24 = 1 24 and 1+24 = 25
24 =1 (24) and 1+(24) =25
24 = 2 12 and 2+12 = 14
24 =2 (12) and 2+(12) =14
24 = 3 8 and 3+8 = 11
24 = 4 6 and 4+6 = 10
24 =4 (6) and 4+(6) =10
251
5.5. Solve Quadratic Equations by Factoring www.ck12.org
Step 3 Re-write the middle term as 11x =3x 8x, so the problem becomes
6x
2
11x +4 = 6x
2
3x 8x +4
Step 4 Factor by grouping. Factor a 3x from the rst two terms and factor -4 from the last two terms.
3x(2x 1) 4(2x 1)
(2x 1)(3x 4)
This gives us the factored form of the equation, now we set each factor equal to zero and solve for x
2x 1 = 0, adding one to each side gives 2x = 1, dividing each side by 2 gives x =
1
2
3x 4 = 0, adding four to each side gives 3x = 4, dividing each side by 3 gives x =
4
3
So the answers are
1
2
and
4
3
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
Solve the following quadratic equations using factoring.
1. x
2
11x +30 = 0
2. x
2
+4x = 21
3. x
2
+49 = 14x
4. x
2
64 = 0
5. x
2
24x +144 = 0
6. 4x
2
25 = 0
7. x
2
+26x =169
8. 4x
2
8x 5 = 0
9. 3x
2
+19x =6
252
5.6
Solve Quadratic Equations by Square
Roots
What You Will Learn
Solve quadratic equations involving perfect squares.
Solve quadratic equations with irrational answers
Solve Quadratic Equations Involving Perfect Squares
So far you know how to solve quadratic equations by factoring. However, this method works only if a quadratic
polynomial can be factored. Unfortunately, in practice, most quadratic polynomials are not factorable. In this
section you will continue learning new methods that can be used in solving quadratic equations. In particular, we
will examine equations in which we can take the square root of both sides of the equation in order to arrive at the
result.
Lets rst examine quadratic equation of the type
x
2
c = 0
We can solve this equation by isolating the x
2
term: x
2
= c
Once the x
2
term is isolated we can take the square root of both sides of the equation. Remember that when we take
the square root we get two answers: the positive square root and the negative square root:
x =
c and x =
c
Often this is written as x =
c.
Example 1
Solve the following quadratic equations
a) x
2
4 = 0
b) x
2
25 = 0
Solution
a) x
2
4 = 0
Isolate the x
2
x
2
= 4
Take the square root of both sides x =
4 and x =
4
Answer x = 2 and x =2
b) x
2
25 = 0
Isolate the x
2
x
2
= 25
25 and x =
25
253
5.6. Solve Quadratic Equations by Square Roots www.ck12.org
Another type of equation where we can nd the solution using the square root is
ax
2
c = 0
We can solve this equation by isolating the x
2
term
ax
2
= c
x
2
=
c
a
Now we can take the square root of both sides of the equation.
x =
_
c
a
and x =
_
c
a
Often this is written as x =
_
c
a
.
Example 2
Solve the following quadratic equations.
a) 9x
2
16 = 0
b) 81x
2
1 = 0
Solution
a) 9x
2
16 = 0
Isolate the x
2
. 9x
2
= 16
x
2
=
16
9
Take the square root of both sides. x =
_
16
9
and x =
169
Answer: x =
4
3
and x =
4
3
b) 81x
2
1 = 0
Isolate the x
2
81x
2
= 1
x
2
=
1
81
_
1
81
and x =
_
1
81
Answer x =
1
9
and x =
1
9
254
As you have seen previously, some quadratic equations have no real solutions.
Example 3
a) x
2
+1 = 0
b) 4x
2
+9 = 0
Solution
a) x
2
+1 = 0
Isolate the x
2
x
2
=1
Take the square root of both sides: x =
1 and x =
1
Answer Square roots of negative numbers do not give real number results, so there are no real solutions to this
equation.
b) 4x
2
+9 = 0
Isolate the x
2
4x
2
=9
x
2
=
9
4
_
9
4
and x =
_
9
4
Answer There are no real solutions.
We can also use the square root function in some quadratic equations where one side of the equation is a perfect
square. This is true if an equation is of the form
(x 2)
2
= 9
Both sides of the equation are perfect squares. We take the square root of both sides.
x 2 = 3 and x 2 =3
Solve both equations
Example 4
a) (x 1)
2
= 4
b) (x +3)
2
= 1
Solution
a) (x 1)
2
= 4
Take the square root of both sides. x 1 = 2 and x 1 =2
Solve each equation. x = 3 and x =1
255
b) (x +3)
2
= 1
Take the square root of both sides. x +3 = 1 and x +3 =1
Solve each equation. x =2 and x =4
It might be necessary to factor the right hand side of the equation as a perfect square before applying the method
outlined above.
Example 5
a) x
2
+8x +16 = 25
b) 4x
2
40x +25 = 9
Solution
a) x
2
+8x +16 = 25
Factor the right hand side. x
2
+8x +16 = (x +4)
2
so (x +4)
2
= 25
Take the square root of both sides. x +4 = 5 and x +4 =5
Solve each equation. x = 1 and x =9
b) 4x
2
20x +25 = 9
Factor the right hand side. 4x
2
20x +25 = (2x 5)
2
so (2x 5)
2
= 9
Take the square root of both sides. 2x 5 = 3 and 2x 5 =3
Solve each equation. 2x = 8 and 2x = 2
Answer x = 4 and x = 1
Solving Quadratic Equations with Irrational Answers
We use the methods we learned so far in this section to nd approximate solutions to quadratic equations. We can
get approximate solutions when taking the square root does not give an exact answer.
Example 6
a) x
2
3 = 0
b) 2x
2
9 = 0
Solution
a)
Isolate the x
2
. x
2
= 3
3 and x =
3
256
Answer x 1.73 and x 1.73
b)
Isolate the x
2
. 2x
2
= 9 so x
2
=
9
2
_
9
2
and x =
_
9
2
Example 7
a) (2x +5)
2
= 10
b) x
2
2x +1 = 5
Solution.
a)
Take the square root of both sides. 2x +5 =
10 and 2x +5 =
10
Solve both equations. x =
5+
10
2
and x =
5
10
2
b)
Factor the right hand side. (x 1)
2
= 5
Take the square root of both sides. x 1 =
5 and x 1 =
5
Solve each equation. x = 1+
5 and x = 1
5
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
1. x
2
1 = 0
2. x
2
100 = 0
3. x
2
+16 = 0
4. 9x
2
1 = 0
5. 4x
2
49 = 0
257
6. 64x
2
9 = 0
7. x
2
81 = 0
8. 25x
2
36 = 0
9. x
2
+9 = 0
10. x
2
16 = 0
11. x
2
36 = 0
12. 16x
2
49 = 0
13. (x 2)
2
= 1
14. (x +5)
2
= 16
15. (2x 1)
2
4 = 0
16. (3x +4)
2
= 9
17. (x 3)
2
+25 = 0
18. x
2
6 = 0
19. x
2
20 = 0
20. 3x
2
+14 = 0
21. (x 6)
2
= 5
22. (4x +1)
2
8 = 0
23. x
2
10x +25 = 9
24. x
2
+18x +81 = 1
25. 4x
2
12x +9 = 16
26. (x +10)
2
= 2
27. x
2
+14x +49 = 3
28. 2(x +3)
2
= 8
29. Susan drops her camera in the river from a bridge that is 400 feet high. How long is it before she hears the
splash?
30. It takes a rock 5.3 seconds to splash in the water when it is dropped from the top of a cliff. How high is the
cliff in meters?
31. Nisha drops a rock from the roof of a building 50 feet high. Ashaan drops a quarter from the top story window,
40 feet high, exactly half a second after Nisha drops the rock. Which hits the ground rst?
258
5.7
Solve Quadratic Equations by Completing
the Square
What You Will Learn
Solve quadratic equations by completing the square
Solve Quadratic Equations by completing the Square
Completing the square is another technique used to solve quadratic equations. When completing the square, the goal
is to make a perfect square trinomial and factor it.
Example A
Solve x
2
8x 1 = 10.
Solution:
1. Write the polynomial so that x
2
and x are on the left side of the equation and the constants on the right. This is
only for organizational purposes, but it really helps. Leave a little space after the xterm.
x
2
8x = 11
2. Now, complete the square. Determine what number would make a perfect square trinomial with x
2
8x +c. To
do this, divide the xterm by 2 and square that number, or
_
b
2
_
2
.
_
b
2
_
2
=
_
8
2
_
2
= 4
2
= 16
3. Add this number to both sides in order to keep the equation balanced.
x
2
8x+16 = 11+16
4. Factor the left side to the square of a binomial and simplify the right.
(x 4)
2
= 27
5. Solve by using square roots.
x 4 =3
3
x = 43
3
Completing the square enables you to solve any quadratic equation using square roots. Through this process, we can
make an unfactorable quadratic equation solvable, like the one above. It can also be used with quadratic equations
that have imaginary solutions.
259
5.7. Solve Quadratic Equations by Completing the Square www.ck12.org
Example B
Solve x
2
+12x +37 = 0
Solution: First, this is not a factorable quadratic equation. Therefore, the only way we know to solve this equation
is to complete the square. Follow the steps from Example A.
1. Organize the polynomial, xs on the left, constant on the right.
x
2
+12x =37
2. Find
_
b
2
_
2
and add it to both sides.
_
b
2
_
2
=
_
12
2
_
2
= 6
2
= 36
x
2
+12x +36 =37+36
3. Factor the left side and solve.
(x +6)
2
=1
x +6 =i
x =6i
Example C
Solve x
2
11x 15 = 0.
Solution: This is not a factorable equation. Use completing the square.
1. Organize the polynomial, xs on the left, constant on the right.
x
2
11x = 15
2. Find
_
b
2
_
2
and add it to both sides.
_
b
2
_
2
=
_
11
2
_
2
=
121
4
x
2
11x +
121
4
= 15+
121
4
3. Factor the left side and solve.
260
_
x
11
2
_
2
=
60
4
+
121
4
_
x
11
2
_
2
=
181
4
x
11
2
=
181
2
x =
11
2

181
2
Practice Exercies
1. Find the value of c that would make x
2
2x +c a perfect square trinomial. Then, factor the trinomial.
Solve the following quadratic equations by completing the square.
2. x
2
+10x +21 = 0
3. x 5x = 12
Answers
1. c =
_
b
2
_
2
=
_
2
2
_
2
= 1
2
= 1. The factors of x
2
2x +1 are (x 1)(x 1) or (x 1)
2
.
2. Use the steps from the examples above.
x
2
+10x +21 = 0
x
2
+10x =21
x
2
+10x +
_
10
2
_
2
=21+
_
10
2
_
2
x
2
+10x +25 =21+25
(x +5)
2
= 4
x +5 =2
x =52
x =7, 3
3. Use the steps from the examples above.
261
5.7. Solve Quadratic Equations by Completing the Square www.ck12.org
x
2
5x = 12
x
2
5x +
_
5
2
_
2
= 12+
_
5
2
_
2
x
2
5x +
25
4
=
48
4
+
25
4
_
x
5
2
_
2
=
73
4
x
5
2
=
73
2
x =
5
2
73
2
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
Determine the value of c that would complete the perfect square trinomial.
1. x
2
+4x +c
2. x
2
2x +c
3. x
2
+16x +c
Rewrite the perfect square trinomial as a square of a binomial.
4. x
2
+6x +9
5. x
2
7x +
49
4
6. x
2
1
2
x +
1
16
Solve the following quadratic equations by completing the square.
7. x
2
+6x 15 = 0
8. x
2
+10x +29 = 0
9. x
2
14x +9 =60
10. x
2
+3x +18 =2
11. x
2
9x 5 = 23
12. x
2
20x = 60
Solve the following quadratic equations by factoring, square roots, or completing the square.
262
13. x
2
+x 30 = 0
14. x
2
18x +90 = 0
15. x
2
+15x +56 = 0
16. x
2
+3x 24 = 12
17. (x 2)
2
20 =45
18. x
2
+24x +44 =19
19. Solve x
2
+7x 44 = 0 by factoring and completing the square. Which method do you prefer?
20. Challenge Solve x
2
+
17
8
x 2 =9.
263
5.8. Solving Quadratic Equations by the Quadratic Formula www.ck12.org
5.8
SolvingQuadratic Equations by the
Quadratic Formula
What You Will Learn
Deriving the quadratic formula
Solve quadratic equations using the quadratic formula.
Identify and choose methods for solving quadratic equations.
Deriving the Quadratic Formula
In this section, you will solve quadratic equations using the Quadratic Formula. Most of you are already familiar
with this formula from previous mathematics courses. It is probably the most used method for solving quadratic
equations. For a quadratic equation in standard form
ax
2
+bx +c = 0
The solutions are found using the following formula.
x =
b
b
2
4ac
2a
We will start by explaining where this formula comes from and then show how it is applied. This formula is derived
by solving a general quadratic equation using the method of completing the square that you learned in the previous
section.
264
We start with a general quadratic equation. ax
2
+bx +c = 0
Subtract the constant term from both sides. ax
2
+bx =c
Divide by the coefcient of the x
2
term. x
2
+
b
a
x =
c
a
Rewrite. x
2
+2
_
b
2a
_
x =
c
a
Add the constant
_
b
2a
_
2
to both sides. x
2
+2
_
b
2a
_
x +
_
b
2a
_
2
=
c
a
+
b
2
4a
2
Factor the perfect square trinomial.
_
x +
b
2a
_
2
=
4ac
4a
2
+
b
2
4a
2
Simplify.
_
x +
b
2a
_
2
=
b
2
4ac
4a
2
Take the square root of both sides. x +
b
2a
=
_
b
2
4ac
4a
2
and x +
b
2a
=
_
b
2
4ac
4a
2
Simplify. x +
b
2a
=
_
b
2
4ac
2a
and x +
b
2a
=
_
b
2
4ac
2a
x =
b
2a
+
_
b
2
4ac
2a
x =
b
2a
_
b
2
4ac
2a
x =
b+
b
2
4ac
2a
x =
b
b
2
4ac
2a
This can be written more compactly as x =
b
b
2
4ac
2a
.
You can see that the familiar formula comes directly from applying the method of completing the square. Applying
the method of completing the square to solve quadratic equations can be tedious. The quadratic formula is a more
straightforward way of nding the solutions.
Solve Quadratic Equations Using the Quadratic Formula
Applying the quadratic formula basically amounts to plugging the values of a, b and c into the quadratic formula.
Example 1
Solve the following quadratic equation using the quadratic formula.
a) 2x
2
+3x +1 = 0
b) x
2
6x +5 = 0
c) 4x
2
+x +1 = 0
Solution
Start with the quadratic formula and plug in the values of a, b and c.
265
a)
Quadratic formula x =
b
b
2
4ac
2a
Plug in the values a = 2, b = 3, c = 1. x =
3
_
(3)
2
4(2)(1)
2(2)
Simplify. x =
3
98
4
=
3
1
4
Separate the two options. x =
3+1
4
and x =
31
4
Solve. x =
2
4
=
1
2
and x =
4
4
=1
Answer x =
1
2
and x =1
b)
Quadratic formula. x =
b
b
2
4ac
2a
Plug in the values a = 1, b =6, c = 5. x =
(6)
_
(6)
2
4(1)(5)
2(1)
Simplify. x =
6
3620
2
=
6
16
2
6+4
2
and x =
64
2
Solve x =
10
2
= 5 and x =
2
2
= 1
Answer x = 5 and x = 1
c)
b
b
2
4ac
2a
Plug in the values a =4, b = 1, c = 1. x =
1
_
(1)
2
4(4)(1)
2(4)
Simplify. x =
1
1+16
8
=
1
17
8
1+
17
8
and x =
1
17
8
Solve. x .39 and x .64
Answer x .39 and x .64
Often when we plug the values of the coefcients into the quadratic formula, we obtain a negative number inside the
square root. Since the square root of a negative number does not give real answers, we say that the equation has no
real solutions. In more advanced mathematics classes, you will learn how to work with complex (or imaginary)
solutions to quadratic equations.
Example 2
Solve the following quadratic equation using the quadratic formula x
2
+2x +7 = 0
Solution:
266
a)
b
b
2
4ac
2a
2
_
(2)
2
4(1)(7)
2(1)
Simplify. x =
2
428
2
=
2
24
2
Answer There are no real solutions.
To apply the quadratic formula, we must make sure that the equation is written in standard form. For some problems,
we must rewrite the equation before we apply the quadratic formula.
Example 3
Solve the following quadratic equation using the quadratic formula.
a) x
2
6x = 10
b) 8x
2
= 5x +6
Solution:
a)
Rewrite the equation in standard form. x
2
6x 10 = 0
b
b
2
4ac
2a
Plug in the values a = 1, b =6, c =10. x =
(6)
_
(6)
2
4(1)(10)
2(1)
Simplify. x =
6
36+40
2
=
6
76
2
6+
76
2
and x =
6
76
2
Solve. x 7.36 and x 1.36
b)
Rewrite the equation in standard form. 8x
2
+5x +6 = 0
b
b
2
4ac
2a
5
_
(5)
2
4(8)(6)
2(8)
Simplify. x =
5
25192
16
=
5
167
16
Answer no real solutions
Identify and Choose Methods for Solving Quadratic Equations.
In mathematics, you will need to solve quadratic equations that describe application problems or that are part of
more complicated problems. You learned four ways of solving a quadratic equation.
267
Factoring.
Taking the square root.
Completing the square
Quadratic formula.
Usually you will not be told which method to use. You will have to make that decision yourself. However, here are
some guidelines to which methods are better in different situations.
Factoring is always best if the quadratic expression is easily factorable. It is always worthwhile to check if you can
factor because this is the fastest method. Many expressions are not factorable so this method is not used very often
in practice.
Taking the square root is best used when there is no x term in the equation.
Completing the square isnt typically used unless you are fond of it. It is most useful for deriving the quadratic
formula.
Quadratic formula is the method that is used most often for solving a quadratic equation. When solving directly
by taking square root and factoring does not work, this is the method that most people prefer to use.
If you are using factoring or the quadratic formula make sure that the equation is in standard form.
Example 4
Solve each quadratic equation
a) x
2
4x 5 = 0
b) x
2
= 8
c) 4x
2
+x = 2
d) 25x
2
9 = 0
e) 3x
2
= 8x
Solution
a) This expression if easily factorable so we can factor and apply the zero-product property:
Factor. (x 5)(x +1) = 0
Apply zero-product property. x 5 = 0 and x +1 = 0
Solve. x = 5 and x =1
b) Since the expression is missing the x term we can take the square root:
8 and x =
8
Answer x = 2.83 and x =2.83
c) Rewrite the equation in standard form.
It is not apparent right away if the expression is factorable, so we will use the quadratic formula.
268
b
b
2
4ac
2a
Plug in the values a =4, b = 1, c =2. x =
1
_
1
2
4(4)(2)
2(4)
Simplify. x =
1
132
8
=
1
31
8
Answer no real solution
d) This problem can be solved easily either with factoring or taking the square root. Lets take the square root in this
case.
Add 9 to both sides of the equation. 25x
2
= 9
Divide both sides by 25. x
2
=
9
25
_
9
25
and x =
_
9
25
Simplify. x =
3
5
and x =
3
5
Answer x =
3
5
and x =
3
5
e)
Rewrite the equation in standard form 3x
2
8x = 0
Factor out common x term. x(3x 8) = 0
Set both terms to zero. x = 0 and 3x = 8
Solve. x = 0 and x =
8
3
= 2.67
Answer x = 0 and x = 2.67
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
Solve the following quadratic equations using the quadratic formula.
1. x
2
+4x 21 = 0
269
2. x
2
6x = 12
3. 3x
2
1
2
x =
3
8
4. 2x
2
+x 3 = 0
5. x
2
7x +12 = 0
6. 3x
2
+5x = 0
7. 4x
2
= 0
8. x
2
+2x +6 = 0
Solve the following quadratic equations using the method of your choice.
9. x
2
x = 6
10. x
2
12 = 0
11. 2x
2
+5x 3 = 0
12. x
2
+7x 18 = 0
13. 3x
2
+6x =10
14. 4x
2
+4000x = 0
15. 3x
2
+12x +1 = 0
16. x
2
+6x +9 = 0
17. 81x
2
+1 = 0
18. 4x
2
+4x = 9
19. 36x
2
21 = 0
20. x
2
2x 3 = 0
270
5.9
Graphs of Quadratic Functions
What You Will Learn
Graphing quadratic functions.
Compare graphs of quadratic functions
Graphing Quadratic Functions
The graphs of quadratic functions are curved lines called parabolas. You dont have to look hard to nd parabolic
shapes around you. Here are a few examples.
The path that a ball or a rocket takes through the air.
Water owing out of a drinking fountain.
The shape of a satellite dish.
The shape of the mirror in car headlights or a ashlight.
Lets see what a parabola looks like by graphing the simplest quadratic function, y = x
2
.
We will graph this function by making a table of values. Since the graph will be curved we need to make sure that
we pick enough points to get an accurate graph.
TABLE 5.1:
x y = x
2
3 (3)
2
= 9
-2 (2)
2
= 4
-1 (1)
2
= 1
0 (0)
2
= 0
1 (1)
2
= 1
2 (2)
2
= 4
3 (3)
2
= 9
We plot these points on a coordinate graph.
271
5.9. Graphs of Quadratic Functions www.ck12.org
To draw the parabola, draw a smooth curve through all the points. (Do not connect the points with straight lines).
Lets graph a few more examples.
Example 1
Graph the following parabolas.
a) y = 2x
2
b) y =x
2
c) y = x
2
2x +3
Solution
a) y = 2x
2
+4x +1
Make a table of values.
TABLE 5.2:
x y = 2x
2
+4x +1
3 2(3)
2
+4(3) +1 = 7
-2 2(2)
2
+4(2) +1 = 1
-1 2(1)
2
+4(1) +1 =1
0 2(0)
2
+4(0) +1 = 1
1 2(1)
2
+4(1) +1 = 7
2 2(2)
2
+4(2) +1 = 17
3 2(3)
2
+4(3) +1 = 31
Notice that the last two points have large yvalues. We will not graph them since that will make our yscale too
big. Now plot the remaining points and join them with a smooth curve.
272
b) y =x
2
+3
TABLE 5.3:
x y =x
2
+3
3 (3)
2
+3 =6
-2 (2)
2
+3 =1
-1 (1)
2
+3 = 2
0 (0)
2
+3 = 3
1 (1)
2
+3 = 2
2 (2)
2
+3 =1
3 (3)
2
+3 =6
Plot the points and join them with a smooth curve.
Notice that it makes an upside down parabola. Our equation has a negative sign in front of the x
2
term. The sign
of the coefcient of the x
2
term determines whether the parabola turns up or down.
If the coefcient of x
2
; is positive, then the parabola turns up.
If the coefcient of x
2
; is negative, then the parabola turns down.
c) y = x
2
8x +3
273
TABLE 5.4:
x y = x
2
8x +3
3 (3)
2
8(3) +3 = 36
-2 (2)
2
8(2) +3 = 23
-1 (1)
2
8(1) +3 = 12
0 (0)
2
8(0) +3 = 3
1 (1)
2
8(1) +3 =4
2 (2)
2
8(2) +3 =9
3 (3)
2
8(3) +3 =12
Lets not graph the rst two points in the table since the values are very big. Plot the points and join them with a
smooth curve.
This does not look like the graph of a parabola. What is happening here? If it is not clear what the graph looks like
choose more points to graph until you can see a familiar curve. For negative values of x it looks like the values of y
are getting bigger and bigger. Lets pick more positive values of x beyond x = 3.
TABLE 5.5:
x y = x
2
8x +3
1 (1)
2
8(1) +3 = 12
0 (0)
2
8(0) +3 = 3
1 (1)
2
8(1) +3 =4
0 (0)
2
8(0) +3 = 3
1 (1)
2
8(1) +3 =4
2 (2)
2
8(2) +3 =9
3 (3)
2
8(3) +3 =12
4 (4)
2
8(4) +3 =13
5 (5)
2
8(5) +3 =12
6 (6)
2
8(6) +3 =9
7 (7)
2
8(7) +3 =4
8 (8)
2
8(8) +3 = 3
Plot the points again and join them with a smooth curve.
274
We now see the familiar parabolic shape. We could have graphed fewer points if we knew where the middle of the
curve, or the vertex, is. To nd that, use the equation x =
b
2a
In this example, b is -8 and a is 1, so the number in
the middle of the table should be
8
21
or 4, which it is.
Compare Graphs of Quadratic Functions
The general form (or standard form) of a quadratic function is:
y = ax
2
+bx +c
Here a, b and c are the coefcients. Remember a coefcient is just a number (i.e. a constant term) that goes before
a variable or it can be alone. You should know that if you have a quadratic function, its graph is always a parabola.
While the graph of a quadratic is always the same basic shape, we have different situations where the graph could
be upside down. It could be shifted to different locations or it could be fatter or skinnier. These situations are
determined by the values of the coefcients. Lets see how changing the coefcient changes the orientation, location
or shape of the parabola.
Orientation
Does the parabola open up or down?
The answer to that question is pretty simple:
If a is positive, the parabola opens up.
If a is negative, the parabola opens down.
The following plot shows the graphs of y = x
2
and y = x
2
. You see that the parabola has the same shape in both
graphs, but the graph of y = x
2
is right-side-up and the graph of y =x
2
is upside-down.
275
Dilation
Changing the value of the coefcient a makes the graph fatter or skinnier. Lets look at how graphs compare for
different positive values of a. The plot on the left shows the graphs of y = x
2
and y = 3x
2
. The plot on the right
shows the graphs of y =x
2
and y =
_
1
3
_
x
2
.
Notice that the larger the value of a is, the skinnier the graph is. For example, in the rst plot, the graph of y = 3x
2
is skinnier than the graph of y = x
2
. Also, the smaller a is (i.e. the closer to 0), the fatter the graph is. For example,
in the second plot, the graph of y =
_
1
3
_
x
2
is fatter than the graph of y = x
2
. This might seem counter-intuitive, but
if you think about it, it should make sense. Lets look at a table of values of these graphs and see if we can explain
why this happens.
TABLE 5.6:
x y = x
2
y = 3x
2
y =
1
3
x
2
3 (3)
2
= 9 3(3)
2
= 27 (3)
2
3
= 3
-2 (2)
2
= 4 3(2)
2
= 12 (2)
2
3
=
4
3
-1 (1)
2
= 1 3(1)
2
= 3 (1)
2
3
=
1
3
0 (0)
2
= 0 3(0)
2
= 0 (0)
2
3
= 0
1 (1)
2
= 1 3(1)
2
= 3 (1)
2
3
=
1
3
2 (2)
2
= 4 3(2)
2
= 12 (2)
2
3
=
4
3
3 (3)
2
= 9 3(3)
2
= 27 (3)
2
3
= 3
From the table, you can see that the values of y =3x
2
are bigger than the values of y =x
2
. This is because each value
276
of y gets multiplied by 3. As a result, the parabola will be skinnier because it grows three times faster than y = x
2
.
On the other hand, you can see that the values of y =
_
1
3
_
x
2
are smaller than the values of y = x
2
. This is because
each value of y gets divided by 3. As a result, the parabola will be fatter because it grows at one third the rate of
y = x
2
.
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
Graph the following functions by making a table of values. Use the vertex to help you pick values for the table.
1. y = 4x
2
4
2. y =x
2
+x +12
3. y = 2x
2
+10x +8
4. y =
1
2
x
2
2x
5. y = x 2x
2
277
5.10. Vertex Form of a Quadratic Equation www.ck12.org
5.10
Vertex Formof a Quadratic Equation
Here youll learn how to nd the vertex, the x-intercepts, and the y-intercept of parabolas that are written in vertex
form. Youll also learn how to graph such parabolas. Finally, youll rewrite quadratic functions in vertex form.
What You Will Learn
Vertex form of a quadratic equation
Sketching graphs using the vertex and the x and y intercepts.
Vertex Form of a Quadratic Equation
Probably one of the best applications of the method of completing the square is using it to rewrite a quadratic function
in vertex form. The vertex form of a quadratic function is
y k = a(x h)
2
This form is very useful for graphing because it gives the vertex of the parabola explicitly. The vertex is at the point
(h, k).
Sketching Graphs using the Vertex and the x and y Intercepts
It is also simple to nd the xintercepts from the vertex form: just set y = 0 and take the square root of both sides
of the resulting equation.
To nd the yintercept, set x = 0 and simplify.
Example A
Find the vertex, the x intercepts and the y intercept of the following parabolas:
a) y 2 = (x 1)
2
b) y +8 = 2(x 3)
2
Solution
a) y 2 = (x 1)
2
Vertex: (1, 2)
To nd the xintercepts,
Set y = 0 : 2 = (x 1)
2
Take the square root of both sides :

2 = x 1 and
2 = x 1
The solutions are not real so there are no x intercepts.
278
To nd the yintercept,
Set x = 0 : y 2 = (1)
2
Simplify : y 2 = 1 y = 3
b) y +8 = 2(x 3)
2
Rewrite : y (8) = 2(x 3)
2
Vertex : (3, 8)
Set y = 0 : 8 = 2(x 3)
2
Divide both sides by 2 : 4 = (x 3)
2
Take the square root of both sides : 4 = x 3 and 4 = x 3
Simplify : x = 7 and x =1
Set x = 0 : y +8 = 2(3)
2
Simplify : y +8 = 18 y = 10
To graph a parabola, we only need to know the following information:
the vertex
the xintercepts
the yintercept
whether the parabola turns up or down (remember that it turns up if a > 0 and down if a < 0)
Example B
Graph the parabola given by the function y +1 = (x +3)
2
.
Solution
Rewrite : y (1) = (x (3))
2
Vertex : (3, 1) vertex : (3, 1)
Set y = 0 : 1 = (x +3)
2
Take the square root of both sides : 1 = x +3 and 1 = x +3
Simplify : x =2 and x =4
x intercepts : (2, 0) and (4, 0)
279
Set x = 0 : y +1 = (3)
2
Simplify: y = 8 y intercept : (0, 8)
And since a > 0, the parabola turns up.
Graph all the points and connect them with a smooth curve:
Example C
Graph the parabola given by the function y =
1
2
(x 2)
2
.
Solution:
Rewrite y (0) =
1
2
(x 2)
2
Vertex: (2, 0) vertex:(2, 0)
Set y = 0 : 0 =
1
2
(x 2)
2
Multiply both sides by 2 : 0 = (x 2)
2
Take the square root of both sides : 0 = x 2
Simplify : x = 2 x intercept:(2, 0)
Note: there is only one xintercept, indicating that the vertex is located at this point, (2, 0).
280
Set x = 0 : y =
1
2
(2)
2
Simplify: y =
1
2
(4) y =2 y intercept:(0, 2)
Since a < 0, the parabola turns down.
Change a Quadratic Equation to Vertex Form
Change y = x
2
10x +16 into vertex form.
Solution: To change an equation from standard form into vertex form, you must complete the square. Review the
Completing the Square Lesson if needed. The major difference is that you will not need to solve this equation.
y = x
2
10x +16
y 16+25 = x
2
10x +25 Move 16 to the other side and add
_
b
2
_
2
to both sides.
y +9 = (x 5)
2
Simplify left side and factor the right side
y = (x 5)
2
9 Subtract 9 from both sides to get y by itself.
Watch this video for help with the Examples above.
MEDIA
CK-12 Foundation: 1007 Graph Quadratic Functions in Vertex Form
281
Vocabulary
The vertex form of a quadratic function is
y k = a(x h)
2
This form is very useful for graphing because it gives the vertex of the parabola explicitly. The vertex is at the point
(h, k).
To nd the xintercepts from the vertex form: just set y = 0 and take the square root of both sides of the
resulting equation.
To nd the yintercept, set x = 0 and simplify.
Guided Practice
Graph the parabola given by the function y = 4(x +2)
2
1.
Solution:
Rewrite y (1) = 4(x +2)
2
Simplify y +1 = 4(x +2)
2
Vertex: (2, 1) vertex:(2, 1)
Set. y = 0 : 0 = 4(x +2)
2
1
Subtract 1 from each side : 1 = 4(x +2)
2
Divide both sides by 4 :
1
4
= (x +2)
2
Take the square root of both sides :
1
2
=(x +2)
Separate :
1
2
=(x +2)
1
2
= x +2)
Simplify : x =2.5 x =1.5
The xintercepts are (2.5, 0) and (1.5, 0).
Set x = 0 : y = 4(0+2)
2
1
Simplify: y = 15 y = 15 y intercept:(0, 15)
Since a < 0, the parabola turns up.
282
Explore More
Rewrite each quadratic function in vertex form.
1. y = x
2
6x
2. y +1 =2x
2
x
3. y = 9x
2
+3x 10
4. y =32x
2
+60x +10
For each parabola, nd the vertex; the x and yintercepts; and if it turns up or down. Then graph the parabola.
5. y 4 = x
2
+8x
6. y =4x
2
+20x 24
7. y = 3x
2
+15x
8. y +6 =x
2
+x
9. x
2
10x +25 = 9
10. x
2
+18x +81 = 1
11. 4x
2
12x +9 = 16
12. x
2
+14x +49 = 3
13. 4x
2
20x +25 = 9
14. x
2
+8x +16 = 25
283
5.11. Applications of Quadratic Equations www.ck12.org
5.11
Applications of Quadratic Equations
What You Will Learn
Solve real world problems using quadratic equations
Solve Real World Problems using Quadratic Equations
Now that we know most of the problem solving strategies for quadratic equations, we can see how these methods
apply to solving real world problems.
Example A - Pythagorean Theorem
One leg of a right triangle is 3 feet longer than the other leg. The hypotenuse is 15 feet. Find the dimensions of the
right triangle.
Solution
Let x = the length of one leg of the triangle, then the other leg will measure x +3.
Lets draw a diagram.
Use the Pythagorean Theorem (leg
1
)
2
+(leg
2
)
2
= (hypotenuse)
2
or a
2
+b
2
= c
2
.
Here a and b are the lengths of the legs and c is the length of the hypotenuse.
Lets substitute the values from the diagram.
a
2
+b
2
= c
2
x
2
+(x +3)
2
= 15
2
In order to solve, we need to get the polynomial in standard form. We must rst distribute, collect like terms and
re-write in the form polynomial = 0.
284
x
2
+x
2
+6x +9 = 225
2x
2
+6x +9 = 225
2x
2
+6x 216 = 0
Factor the common monomial 2(x +3x 108) = 0.
To factor the trinomial inside the parenthesis we need to numbers that multiply to -108 and add to 3. It would take a
long time to go through all the options so lets try some of the bigger factors.
108 =12 and 12+9 =3
108 = 12 (9) and 12+(9) = 3 This is the correct choice.
We factor as: 2(x 9)(x +12) = 0.
Set each term equal to zero and solve
x 9 = 0 x +12 = 0
or
x = 9 x =12
It makes no sense to have a negative answer for the length of a side of the triangle, so the answer must be the
following.
Answer x = 9 for one leg, and x +3 = 12 for the other leg.
Check 9
2
+12
2
= 81+144 = 225 = 15
2
so the answer checks.
Example B - Number Problems
The product of two positive numbers is 60. Find the two numbers if one of the numbers is 4 more than the other.
Solution
Let x = one of the numbers and x +4 equals the other number.
The product of these two numbers equals 60. We can write the equation.
x(x +4) = 60
In order to solve we must write the polynomial in standard form. Distribute, collect like terms and re-write in the
form polynomial = 0.
x
2
+4x = 60
x
2
+4x 60 = 0
Factor by nding two numbers that multiply to -60 and add to 4. List some numbers that multiply to -60:
285
5.11. Applications of Quadratic Equations www.ck12.org
60 =4 15 and 4+15 = 11
60 = 4 (15) and 4+(15) =11
60 =5 12 and 5+12 = 7
60 = 5 (12) and 5+(12) =7
60 =6 10 and 6+10 = 4 This is the correct choice
60 = 6 (10) and 6+(10) =4
The expression factors as (x +10)(x 6) = 0.
Set each term equal to zero and solve.
x +10 = 0 x 6 = 0
or
x =10 x = 6
Since we are looking for positive numbers, the answer must be the following.
Answer x = 6 for one number, and x +4 = 10 for the other number.
Check 6 10 = 60 so the answer checks.
Example C - Area of a rectangle
A rectangle has sides of x +5 and x 3. What value of x gives and area of 48?
Solution:
Make a sketch of this situation.
Area of the rectangle = lengthwidth
(x +5)(x 3) = 48
In order to solve, we must write the polynomial in standard form. Distribute, collect like terms and rewrite in the
form polynomial = 0.
x
2
+2x 15 = 48
x
2
+2x 63 = 0
Factor by nding two numbers that multiply to -63 and add to 2. List some numbers that multiply to -63.
286
63 =7 9 and 7+9 = 2 This is the correct choice
63 = 7 (9) and 7+(9) =2
The expression factors as (x +9)(x 7) = 0.
Set each term equal to zero and solve.
x +9 = 0 x 7 = 0
or
x =9 x = 7
Since we are looking for positive numbers the answer must be x = 7.
Answer The width is x 3 = 4 and the length is x +5 = 12.
Check 4 12 = 48 so the answer checks out.
Homework
Solve the following application problems:
1. One leg of a right triangle is 7 feet longer than the other leg. The hypotenuse is 13 feet. Find the dimensions
of the right triangle.
2. A rectangle has sides of x +2 and x 1. What value of x gives an area of 108?
3. The product of two positive numbers is 120. Find the two numbers if one numbers is 7 more than the other.
4. Framing Warehouse offers a picture framing service. The cost for framing a picture is made up of two parts.
The cost of glass is $1 per square foot. The cost of the frame is $2 per linear foot. If the frame is a square,
what size picture can you get framed for $20?
287
www.ck12.org
CHAPTER
6
Unit 6 - Exponential
Functions, Sequences and Modeling
Chapter Outline
6.1 EXPONENTIAL GROWTH
6.2 EXPONENTIAL DECAY
6.3 ARITHMETIC SEQUENCES AND LINEAR FUNCTIONS
6.4 GEOMETRIC SEQUENCES AND EXPONENTIAL FUNCTIONS
6.5 DESCRIBING THE PATTERN AND WRITING A RECURSIVE RULE FOR A SE-
QUENCE
6.6 LINEAR, EXPONENTIAL, AND QUADRATIC MODELS
6.7 REFERENCES
288
www.ck12.org Chapter 6. Unit 6 - Exponential Functions, Sequences and Modeling
6.1
Exponential Growth
What You Will Learn
Graph an exponential growth function.
Compare graphs of exponential growth functions.
Solve real-world problems involving exponential growth.
Introduction
Exponential functions are different than other functions you have seen before because now the variable appears as
the exponent (or power) instead of the base. In this section, we will be working with functions where the base is a
constant number and the exponent is the variable. Here is an example.
y = 2
x
This particular function describes something that doubles each time x increases by one. Lets look at a particular
situation where this might occur.
A colony of bacteria has a population of three thousand at noon on Sunday. During the next week, the colonys
population doubles every day. What is the population of the bacteria colony at noon on Saturday?
Lets make a table of values and calculate the population each day.
Day 0(Sunday) 1(Monday) 2(Tuesday) 3(Wednesday) 4(Thursday) 5(Friday) 6(Saturday)
Population (in thousands) 3 6 12 24 48 96 192
To get the population of bacteria for the next day we simply multiply the current days population by 2.
We start with a population of 3 (thousand): P = 3
To nd the population on Monday we double P = 3 2
The population on Tuesday will be double that on Monday P = 3 2 2
The population on Wednesday will be double that on Tuesday P = 3 2 2 2
Thursday is double that on Wednesday P = 3 2 2 2 2
Friday is double that on Thursday P = 3 2 2 2 2 2
Saturday is double that on Friday P = 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
You can see that this function describes a population that is multiplied by 2 each time a day passes.
If we dene x as the number of days since Sunday at noon, then we can write the following.
P = 3.2
x
This is a formula that we can use to calculate the population on any day.
For instance, the population on Saturday at noon will be P = 3.2
6
= 3.64 = 192 (thousand) bacteria.
We used x = 6, since Saturday at noon is six days after Sunday at noon.
In general exponential function takes the form:
289
6.1. Exponential Growth www.ck12.org
y = A b
x
where A is the initial amount and b is the factor that the amount gets multiplied by each time x is increased
by one.
Graph Exponential Functions
Lets start this section by graphing some exponential functions. Since we dont yet know any special properties of
exponential functions, we will graph using a table of values.
Example 1
Graph the equation using a table of values y = 2
x
.
Solution
Lets make a table of values that includes both negative and positive values of x.
To evaluate the positive values of x, we just plug into the function and evaluate.
x = 1, y = 2
1
= 2
x = 2, y = 2
2
= 2 2 = 4
x = 3, y = 2
3
= 2 2 2 = 8
TABLE 6.1:
x y
3
1
8
-2
1
4
-1
1
2
0 1
1 2
2 4
3 8
For x = 0, we must remember that a number to the power 0 is always 1.
x = 0, y = 2
0
= 1
To evaluate the negative values of x, we must remember that x to a negative power means one over x to the same
positive power.
x =1, y = 2
1
=
1
2
1
=
1
2
x =2, y = 2
2
=
1
2
2
=
1
4
x =3, y = 2
3
=
1
2
3
=
1
8
When we plot the points on the coordinate axes we get the graph below. Exponentials always have this basic shape.
That is, they start very small and then, once they start growing, they grow faster and faster, and soon they become
extremely big!
290
You may have heard people say that something is growing exponentially. This implies that the growth is very quick.
An exponential function actually starts slow, but then grows faster and faster all the time. Specically, our function
y above doubled each time we increased x by one.
This is the denition of exponential growth. There is a consistent xed period during which the function will double
or triple, or quadruple. The change is always a xed proportion.
Compare Graphs of Exponential Growth Functions
Lets graph a few more exponential functions and see what happens as we change the constants in the functions. The
basic shape of the exponential function should stay the same. But, it may become steeper or shallower depending on
the constants we are using.
We mentioned that the general form of the exponential function is y = A b
x
where A is the initial amount and b is
the factor that the amount gets multiplied by each time x is increased by one. Lets see what happens for different
values of A.
Example 2
Graph the exponential function y = 3 2
x
and compare with the graph of y = 2
x
.
Solution
Lets make a table of values for y = 3 2
x
.
TABLE 6.2:
x y = 3 2
x
2 y = 3 2
2
= 3
1
2
2
=
3
4
-1 y = 3 2
1
= 3
1
2
1
=
3
2
0 y = 3 2
0
= 3
1 y = 3 2
1
= 6
2 y = 3 2
2
= 3 4 = 12
3 y = 3 2
3
= 3 8 = 24
Now lets use this table to graph the function.
291
We can see that the function y = 3 2
x
is bigger than function y = 2
x
. In both functions, the value of y doubled every
time x increases by one. However, y = 3 2
x
starts with a value of 3, while y = 2
x
starts with a value of 1, so it makes
sense that y = 3 2
x
would be bigger as its values of y keep getting doubled.
You might think that if the initial value A is less than one, then the corresponding exponential function would be less
than y = 2
x
. This is indeed correct. Lets see how the graphs compare for A =
1
3
.
Example 3
Graph the exponential function y =
1
3
2
x
and compare with the graph of y = 2
x
.
Solution
Lets make a table of values for y =
1
3
2
x
.
TABLE 6.3:
x y =
1
3
2
x
2 y =
1
3
2
2
=
1
3
1
2
2
=
1
12
-1 y =
1
3
2
1
=
1
3
1
2
1
=
1
6
0 y =
1
3
2
0
=
1
3
1 y =
1
3
2
1
=
2
3
2 y =
1
3
2
2
=
1
3
4 =
4
3
3 y =
1
3
2
3
=
1
3
8 =
8
3
Now lets use this table to graph the function.
As expected, the exponential function y =
1
3
2
x
is smaller that the exponential function y = 2
x
.
292
Now, lets compare exponential functions whose bases are different.
The function y = 2
x
has a base of 2. That means that the value of y doubles every time x is increased by 1.
The function y = 3
x
has a base of 3. That means that the value of y triples every time x is increased by 1.
The function y = 5
x
has a base of 5. That means that the value of y gets multiplies by a factor of 5 every time x is
increased by 1.
The function y = 10
x
has a base of 10. That means that the value of y gets multiplied by a factor of 10 every time x
is increased by 1.
What do you think will happen as the base number is increased? Lets nd out.
Example 4
Graph the following exponential functions of the same graph y = 2
x
, y = 3
x
, y = 5
x
, y = 10
x
.
Solution
To graph these functions we should start by making a table of values for each of them.
TABLE 6.4:
x y = 2
x
y = 3
x
y = 5
x
y = 10
x
2
1
4
1
9
1
25
1
100
-1
1
2
1
3
1
5
1
10
0 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 5 10
2 4 9 25 100
3 8 27 125 1000
Now lets graph these functions.
Notice that for x = 0 the values for all the functions are equal to 1. This means that the initial value of the functions
is the same and equal to 1. Even though all the functions start at the same value, they increase at different rates. We
can see that the bigger the base is the faster the values of y will increase. It makes sense that something that triples
each time will increase faster than something that just doubles each time.
Finally, lets examine what the graph of an exponential looks like if the value of A is negative.
Example 5
Graph the exponential function y =5 2
x
.
Solution
293
Lets make a table of values.
TABLE 6.5:
x y =5 2
x
2
5
4
-1
5
2
0 -5
1 -10
2 -20
3 -40
Now lets graph the function.
This result should not be unexpected. Since the initial value is negative and doubles with time, it makes sense that
the value of y increasess, but in a negative direction. Notice that the shape of the graph remains that of a typical
exponential function, but is now a mirror image about the horizontal axis (i.e. upside down).
Solve Real-World Problems Involving Exponential Growth
We will now examine some real-world problems where exponential growth occurs.
Example 6
The population of a town is estimated to increase by 15% per year. The population today is 20 thousand. Make a
graph of the population function and nd out what the population will be ten years from now.
Solution
First, we need to write a function that describes the population of the town. The general form of an exponential
function is.
y = A b
x
Dene y as the population of the town.
Dene x as the number of years from now.
A is the initial population, so A = 20 (thousand)
Finally, we must nd what b is. We are told that the population increases by 15% each year.
To calculate percents, it is necessary to change them into decimals. 15% is equivalent to 0.15.
294
15% of A is equal to 0.15A. This represents the increase in population from one year to the next.
In order to get the total population for the following year we must add the current population to the increase in
population. In other words A+0.15A = 1.15A. We see from this that the population must be multiplied by a factor
of 1.15 each year.
This means that the base of the exponential is b = 1.15.
The formula that describes this problem is y = 20 (1.15)
x
Now lets make a table of values.
TABLE 6.6:
x y = 20 (1.15)
x
10 4.9
-5 9.9
0 20
5 40.2
10 80.9
Notice that we used negative values of x in our table of values. Does it make sense to think of negative time? In this
case x =5 represents what the population was ve years ago, so it can be useful information. The question asked
in the problem was What will be the population of the town ten years from now?
To nd the population exactly, we use x = 10 in the formula. We found y = 20 (1.15)
10
= 89, 911.
Example 7
Peter earned $1500 last summer. If he deposited the money in a bank account that earns 5% interest compounded
yearly, how much money will he have after ve years?
Solution
This problem deals with interest which is compounded yearly. This means that each year the interest is calculated on
the amount of money you have in the bank. That interest is added to the original amount and next year the interest is
calculated on this new amount. In this way, you get paid interest on the interest.
Lets write a function that describes the amount of money in the bank. The general form of an exponential function
is
295
y = A b
x
Dene y as the amount of money in the bank.
Dene x as the number of years from now.
A is the initial amount, so A = 1500.
Now we must nd what b is.
We are told that the interest is 5% each year.
Change percents into decimals 5% is equivalent to 0.05.
5% of A is equal to 0.05A This represents the interest earned per year.
In order to get the total amount of money for the following year, we must add the interest earned to the initial amount.
A+0.05A = 1.05A
We see from this that the amount of money must be multiplied by a factor of 1.05 each year.
This means that the base of the exponential is b = 1.05
The formula that describes this problem is y = 1500 (1.05)
x
To nd the total amount of money in the bank at the end of ve years, we simply use x = 5 in our formula.
Answer y = 1500 (1.05)
5
= $1914.42
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
Graph the following exponential functions by making a table of values.
1. y = 3
x
2. y = 5 3
x
3. y = 40 4
x
4. y = 3 10
x
Solve the following problems.
5. A chain letter is sent out to 10 people telling everyone to make 10 copies of the letter and send each one to a
new person. Assume that everyone who receives the letter sends it to ten new people and that it takes a week
for each cycle. How many people receive the letter on the sixth week?
6. Nadia received $200 for her 10
th
birthday. If she saves it in a bank with a 7.5% interest compounded yearly,
how much money will she have in the bank by her 21
st
birthday?
296
6.2
Exponential Decay
What You Will Learn
Graph an exponential decay function.
Compare graphs of exponential decay functions.
Solve real-world problems involving exponential decay.
Introduction
In the last section, we looked at graphs of exponential functions. We saw that exponentials functions describe a
quantity that doubles, triples, quadruples, or simply gets multiplied by the same factor. All the functions we looked
at in the last section were exponentially increasing functions. They started small and then became large very fast. In
this section, we are going to look at exponentially decreasing functions. An example of such a function is a quantity
that gets decreased by one half each time. Lets look at a specic example.
For her fth birthday, Nadias grandmother gave her a full bag of candy. Nadia counted her candy and found out
that there were 160 pieces in the bag. As you might suspect Nadia loves candy so she ate half the candy on the rst
day. Her mother told her that if she eats it at that rate it will be all gone the next day and she will not have anymore
until her next birthday. Nadia devised a clever plan. She will always eat half of the candy that is left in the bag each
day. She thinks that she will get candy every day and her candy will never run out. How much candy does Nadia
have at the end of the week? Would the candy really last forever?
Lets make a table of values for this problem.
Day 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
No. of Candies 160 80 40 20 10 5 2.5 1.25
You can see that if Nadia eats half the candies each day, then by the end of the week she only has 1.25 candies left
in her bag.
Lets write an equation for this exponential function.
Nadia started with 160 pieces. y = 160
After the rst she has
1
2
of that amount. y = 160
1
2
After the second day she has
1
2
of the last amount. y = 160
1
2
1
2
You see that in order to get the amount of candy left at the end of each day we keep multiplying by
1
2
.
We can write the exponential function as
y = 160
1
2
x
297
6.2. Exponential Decay www.ck12.org
Notice that this is the same general form as the exponential functions in the last section.
y = A b
x
Here A = 160 is the initial amount and b =
1
2
is the factor that the quantity gets multiplied by each time. The
difference is that now b is a fraction that is less than one, instead of a number that is greater than one.
This is a good rule to remember for exponential functions.
If b is greater than one, then the exponential function increased, but
If b is less than one (but still positive), then the exponential function decreased
Lets now graph the candy problem function. The resulting graph is shown below.
So, will Nadias candy last forever? We saw that by the end of the week she has 1.25 candies left so there doesnt
seem to be much hope for that. But if you look at the graph you will see that the graph never really gets to zero.
Theoretically there will always be some candy left, but she will be eating very tiny fractions of a candy every day
after the rst week!
This is a fundamental feature of an exponential decay function. Its value get smaller and smaller and approaches
zero but it never quite gets there. In mathematics we say that the function asymptotes to the value zero. This means
that it approaches that value closer and closer without ever actually getting there.
Graph an Exponential Decay Function
The graph of an exponential decay function will always take the same basic shape as the one in the previous gure.
Lets graph another example by making a table of values.
Example 1
Graph the exponential function y = 5
_
1
2
_
x
Solution
Lets start by making a table of values.
298
TABLE 6.7:
x y = 5
_
1
2
_
x
3 y = 5
_
1
2
_
3
= 5.2
3
= 40
-2 y = 5
_
1
2
_
2
= 5.2
2
= 20
-1 y = 5
_
1
2
_
1
= 5.2
1
= 10
0 y = 5
_
1
2
_
0
= 5.1 = 5
1 y = 5
_
1
2
_
1
=
5
2
2 y = 5
_
1
2
_
2
=
5
4
Remember that a fraction to a negative power is equivalent to its reciprocal to the same positive power.
We said that an exponential decay function has the same general form as an exponentially increasing function, but
that the base b is a positive number less than one. When b can be written as a fraction, we can use the Property of
Negative Exponents that we discussed in Section 8.3 to write the function in a different form.
For instance, y = 5
_
1
2
_
x
is equivalent to 5 2
x
.
These two forms are both commonly used so it is important to know that they are equivalent.
Example 2
Graph the exponential function y = 8 3
x
.
Solution
Here is our table of values and the graph of the function.
TABLE 6.8:
x y = 8 3
x
3 y = 8.3
(3)
= 8 3
3
= 216
-2 y = 8.3
(2)
= 8 3
2
= 72
-1 y = 8.3
(1)
= 8 3
1
= 24
0 y = 8 3
0
= 8
1 y = 8 3
1
=
8
3
2 y = 8 3
2
=
8
9
299
Compare Graphs of Exponential Decay Functions
You might have noticed that an exponentially decaying function is very similar to an exponentially increasing
function. The two types of functions behave similarly, but they are backwards from each other.
The increasing function starts very small and increases very quickly and ends up very, very big. While the decreasing
function starts very big and decreases very quickly to soon become very, very small. Lets graph two such functions
together on the same graph and compare them.
Example 3
Graph the functions y = 4
x
and y = 4
x
on the same coordinate axes.
Solution
Here is the table of values and the graph of the two functions.
Looking at the values in the table we see that the two functions are backwards of each other in the sense that the
values for the two functions are reciprocals.
TABLE 6.9:
x y = 4
x
y = 4
x
3 y = 4
3
=
1
64
y = 4
(3)
= 64
-2 y = 4
2
=
1
16
y = 4
(2)
= 16
-1 y = 4
1
=
1
4
y = 4
(1)
= 4
0 y = 4
0
= 1 y = 4
0
= 1
1 y = 4
1
= 4 y = 4
1
=
1
4
2 y = 4
2
= 16 y = 4
2
=
1
16
3 y = 4
3
= 64 y = 4
3
=
1
64
Here is the graph of the two functions. Notice that the two functions are mirror images of each others if the mirror
is placed vertically on the yaxis.
300
Solve Real-World Problems Involving Exponential Decay
Exponential decay problems appear in several application problems. Some examples of these are half-life problems,
and depreciation problems. Lets solve an example of each of these problems.
Example 4 Half-Life
A radioactive substance has a half-life of one week. In other words, at the end of every week the level of radioactivity
is half of its value at the beginning of the week. The initial level of radioactivity is 20 counts per second.
a) Draw the graph of the amount of radioactivity against time in weeks.
b) Find the formula that gives the radioactivity in terms of time.
c) Find the radioactivity left after three weeks
Solution
Lets start by making a table of values and then draw the graph.
TABLE 6.10:
time radioactivity
0 20
1 10
2 5
3 2.5
4 1.25
5 0.625
301
Exponential decay ts the general formula
y = A b
x
In this case
y is the amount of radioactivity
x is the time in weeks
A = 20 is the starting amount
b =
1
2
since the substance losses half its value each week
The formula for this problem is: y = 20
_
1
2
_
x
or y = 20 2
x
.
Finally, to nd out how much radioactivity is left after three weeks, we use x = 3 in the formula we just found.
y = 20
_
1
2
_
3
=
20
8
= 2.5
Example 5 Depreciation
The cost of a new car is $32,000. It depreciates at a rate of 15% per year. This means that it looses 15% of each
value each year.
Draw the graph of the cars value against time in year.
Find the formula that gives the value of the car in terms of time.
Find the value of the car when it is four years old.
Solution
Lets start by making a table of values. To ll in the values we start with 32,000 at time t = 0. Then we multiply the
value of the car by 85% for each passing year. (Since the car looses 15% of its value, that means that it keeps 85%
of its value). Remember that 85% means that we multiply by the decimal 0.85.
TABLE 6.11:
Time Value(Thousands)
0 32
1 27.2
2 23.1
302
Time Value(Thousands)
3 19.7
4 16.7
5 14.2
Now draw the graph
Lets start with the general formula
y = A b
x
In this case:
y is the value of the car
x is the time in years
A = 32 is the starting amount in thousands
b = 0.85 since we multiply the amount by this factor to get the value of the car next year
The formula for this problem is y = 32 (0.85)
x
.
Finally, to nd the value of the car when it is four years old, we use x = 4 in the formula we just found.
y = 32 (0.85)
4
= 16.7 thousand dollars or $16,704 if we dont round.
Video Overview
MEDIA
303
Homework
Graph the following exponential decay functions.
1. y =
1
5
x
2. y = 4
_
2
3
_
x
3. y = 3
x
4. y =
3
4
6
x
Solve the following application problems.
5. The cost of a new ATV (all-terrain vehicle) is $7200. It depreciates at 18% per
year.
Draw the graph of the vehicles value against time in years.
Find the formula that gives the value of the ATV in terms of time.
Find the value of the ATV when it is ten year old.
6. A person is infected by a certain bacterial infection. When he goes to the doctor the population of bacteria is
2 million. The doctor prescribes an antibiotic that reduces the bacteria population to
1
4
of its size each day.
(a) Draw the graph of the size of the bacteria population against time in days.
(b) Find the formula that gives the size of the bacteria population in term of time.
(c) Find the size of the bacteria population ten days after the drug was rst taken.
(d) Find the size of the bacteria population after 2 weeks (14 days)
304
6.3
Arithmetic Sequences andLinear Func-
tions
What You Will Learn
Arithmetic Sequence
How it relates to a linear function
Arithmetic Sequence
Look at this sequence.
You probably saw a pattern right away. If there were another set of boxes, youd probably guess at how many there
would be.
If you saw this same pattern in terms of numbers, it would look like this:
2, 4, 6, 8, 10
This set of numbers is called a sequence ; it is a series of numbers that follow a pattern.
If there was another set of boxes, youd probably guess there would be 12, right? Just like if you added another
number to the sequence, youd write 12. You noticed that there was a difference of 2 between each two numbers, or
terms, in the sequence.
When we have a sequence with a xed number between each of the terms, we call this sequence an arithmetic
sequence .
Take a look at this one.
What is the common difference between each of the terms in the sequence?
The difference is 5 between each number.
305
6.3. Arithmetic Sequences and Linear Functions www.ck12.org
This is an arithmetic sequence. You can see that you have to be a bit of a detective to gure out the number
patterns.
Finding the difference between two terms in a sequence is one way to look at sequences. We have used tables of
values for several types of equations and we have used those tables of values to create graphs. Graphs are helpful
because they are visual representations of the same numbers. When values rise, we can see them rise on a graph.
Lets use the same ideas, then, to graph arithmetic sequences.
Take a look at this one.
Graph the sequence 2, 5, 8, 11, 14, 17,...
First convert it into a table of values with independent values being the term number and the dependent values being
the actual term.
Use this table to create a graph.
306
You can see the pattern clearly in the graph. That is one of the wonderful things about graphing arithmetic sequences.
In the graph that we created in the example, each term was expressed as a single point. This is called discrete data
only the exact points are shown. This type of data is usually involves things that are counted in whole numbers
like people or boxes. Depending on what type of situation you are graphing, you may choose to connect the points
with a line. The line demonstrates that there are data points between the points that we have graphed. This is called
continuous data and usually involves things like temperature or length that can change fractionally.
We can write an equation to describe this data if we compare it to the linear functions we learned in a previous
section . To nd the equation for the function, we start with the general form of a linear function: y = mx+b. Since
m is the slope of the line, its also the quantity by which y increases every time the value of x increases by one. In
this case, the slope is 3. The y intercept is the value of y when x is 0. To nd the y value when x is zero, we will
need to subtract 3 from 2, this will give us -1 for the y intercept. The constant b is the value of the function when
x = 0. Therefore, the function is y = 3x 1.
So, we can graph sequences and classify them as either discrete or continuous data. Yet another possibility is
continuing a sequence in either direction by adding terms that follow the same pattern.
Identify the pattern in the following sequences.
Example A
3, 7, 11, 15
Solution: Add four
Example B
18, 8, 2
307
6.3. Arithmetic Sequences and Linear Functions www.ck12.org
Solution: Subtract 10
Example C
81, 86, 91, 96
Solution: Add ve
MEDIA
Homework
Directions: (a) Write the common difference for each sequence. If there is not a pattern, indicate this in your answer.
(b) If there is a common difference, write a linear equation for each sequence.
1. -9, -7, -5, -3, -1
2. 5.05, 5.1, 5.15, 5.2, 5.25
3. 3, 6, 10, 15, 21, 28
4. 17, 14, 11, 8, 5, 2
5. 10, 9, 8, 7, 6
6. 3, 5, 7, 9, 11
7. 3, 9, 27
8. 4, 8, 16, 32
9. 2, 3, 5, 9
10. 5, 11, 23, 47
11. 16, 8, 4, 2
12. 5, 10, 15, 20
13. 3, 6, 9, 12
308
6.4
Geometric Sequences andExponential
Functions
What You Will Learn
Geometric Sequence
How it relates to an exponential function
Geometric Sequence
Which would you prefer: being given one million dollars, or one penny the rst day, double that penny the next day,
and then double the previous days pennies and so on for a month?
At rst glance you would think that a million dollars would be more. However, lets use geometric sequences before
we decide to see how the pennies add up. You start with a penny the rst day and keep doubling each day until the
end of the month (30 days).
1
st
Day 1 penny = 2
0
2
nd
Day 2 pennies = 2
1
3
rd
Day 4 pennies = 2
2
4
th
Day 8 pennies = 2
3
30
th
Day = 2
29
2
29
= 536, 870, 912 pennies or $5,368,709.12, which is well over ve times greater than $1,000,000.00.
Geometric Sequence: a sequence of numbers in which each number in the sequence is found by multiplying the
previous number by a xed amount called the common ratio.
n
th
term in a geometric sequence: a
n
= a
1
r
n1
(a
1
= rst term, r = common ratio)
The Common Ratio of a Geometric Sequence
The common ratio, r, in any geometric sequence can be found by dividing any term by the preceding term. If we
know the common ratio in a sequence then we can nd any term in the sequence.
Example A
Find the eighth term in the geometric sequence.
309
6.4. Geometric Sequences and Exponential Functions www.ck12.org
1, 2, 4,...
Solution:
First we need to nd the common ratio: r =
2
1
= 2.
The eighth term is given by the formula 2 = 1 2
7
= 128.
In other words, to get the eighth term we started with the rst term, which is 1, and multiplied by two seven times.
Graphing Geometric Sequences
Exponential graphs and geometric sequence graphs look very much alike. Exponential graphs are continuous,
however, and the sequence graphs are discrete with distinct points (1
st
term and 2
nd
term, etc). If we graph the
sequence describing the doubline of pennies, it looks like this.
FIGURE 6.1
Each time the xvalue increases by one, the yvalue is multiplied by 2. Since the ratio is always the same, the
function is exponential.
To nd the equation for the function that represents these values, we start with the general form of an exponential
function, y = a b
x
.
Here b is the ratio between the values of y each time x is increased by one. The constant a is the value of the sequence
when x =0, which is the rst day in this example. Therefore, the function is y = 1 2
x
or y = 2
x
Example B
A courtier presented the Indian king with a beautiful, hand-made chessboard. The king asked what he would like in
return for his gift and the courtier surprised the king by asking for one grain of rice on the rst square, two grains
on the second, four grains on the third, etc. The king readily agreed and asked for the rice to be brought (from
Meadows et al. 1972, p.29 via Porritt 2005). How many grains of rice does the king have to put on the last square?
310
Solution:
A chessboard is an 88 square grid, so it contains a total of 64 squares.
The courtier asked for one grain of rice on the rst square, 2 grains of rice on the second square, 4 grains of rice on
the third square and so on. We can write this as a geometric sequence.
1, 2, 4,...
The numbers double each time, so the common ratio is r = 2.
The problem asks how many grains of rice the king needs to put on the last square. What we need to nd is the 64
th
term in the sequence. This means multiplying the starting term, 1, by the common ratio 64 times in a row. Lets use
the formula.
a
n
= a
1
r
n1
, where a
n
is the n
th
term, a
1
Is the rst term and r is the common ratio.
a
64
= 1 2
63
= 9, 223, 372, 036, 854, 775, 808 grains of rice.
Practice Exercise
Find the next number in the geometric sequence: 0.01 , 0.06 , 0.36 , 2.16 , 12.96 , ...
Solution:
The common ratio is:
0.06
0.01
= 6.
Since the rst value in the sequence is 0.01, the geometric sequence is
a
n
= 0.01(6)
n1
and since we are looking for the 6th term
a
6
= 0.01(6)
61
= 0.01(6)
5
= 77.76.
The next number in the sequence is 77.76.
Video Overview
MEDIA
311
6.4. Geometric Sequences and Exponential Functions www.ck12.org
Homework
1. Dene a geometric sequence.
2. Using the chessboard example, how many grains of rice should be placed on the:
a. Fourth square?
b. Tenth square?
c. Twenty-fth square?
d. 60
th
square?
3. Is the following an example of a geometric sequence? Explain your answer. 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, ...
4. Use the Petri dish example from the Concept. At what time are 25,000 bacteria in the dish?
Determine the constant ratio, r, for each geometric sequence.
5. 8, 6,...
6. 2, 4, 8, 16,...
7. 9, 3,
1
3
,
1
9
, ...
8. 2, 8, 32, 128
Determine the rst ve terms of each geometric sequence.
9. a
1
= 2, r = 3
10. a
1
= 90, r =
1
3
11. a
1
= 6, r =2
Find the missing terms in each geometric sequence.
12. 3, ____, 48, 192, ____
13. 81, ____, ____, ____, 1
14.
9
4
, ____, ____,
2
3
, ____
Find the indicated term of each geometric sequence.
15. a
1
= 4, r = 2 Find a
6
.
16. a
1
=7, r =
3
4
Find a
4
.
17. a
1
=10, r =3 Find a
10
.
18. A ball is tossed from a height of four feet. Each bounce is 80% as high as the previous bounce.
a. Write an equation to represent the situation.
b. How high is the ball after the fth bounce?
19. An ant walks past several stacks of Lego blocks. There is one block in the rst stack, three blocks in the
second stack, and nine blocks in the third stack. In fact, in each successive stack there are triple the number of
blocks there were in the previous stack.
a. How many blocks are in the eighth stack?
b. When is the stack 343 blocks high?
20. A super-ball has a 75% rebound ratio. When you drop it from a height of 20 feet, it bounces and bounces and
bounces...
312
a. How high does the ball bounce after it strikes the ground for the third time?
b. How high does the ball bounce after it strikes the ground for the seventeenth time?
21. Anne goes bungee jumping off a bridge above water. On the initial jump, the bungee cord stretches by 120
feet. On the next bounce, the stretch is 60% of the original jump and each additional bounce stretches the rope
by 60% of the previous stretch.
a. What will the rope stretch be on the third bounce?
b. What will the rope stretch be on the 12
th
bounce?
22. A virus population doubles every 30 minutes. It begins with a population of 30.
a. How many viral cells will be present after 5 hours?
b. When will it reach 1,000,000 cells? Round to the nearest half-hour.
313
6.5. Describing the Pattern and Writing a Recursive Rule for a Sequence www.ck12.org
6.5
Describingthe PatternandWritinga Recur-
sive Rule for a Sequence
What You Will Learn
Recursive Rule
Use recursive rules to describe arithmetic and geometric sequences
Recursive Rule
A recursive rule for a sequence is a formula which tells us how to progress from one term to the next in a sequence.
Generally, the variable n is used to represent the term number. In other words, n takes on the values 1 (rst term), 2
(second term), 3 (third term), etc. The variable, a
n
represents the n
th
term and a
n1
represents the term preceding a
n
.
Example sequence: 4, 7, 11, 16, . . . , a
n1
, a
n
In the above sequence, a
1
= 4, a
2
= 7, a
3
= 11 and a
4
= 16.
Example A
Describe the pattern and write a recursive rule for the sequence: 9, 11, 13, 15, . . .
Solution: First we need to determine what the pattern is in the sequence. If we subtract each term from the one
following it, we see that there is a common difference of 29. We can therefore use a
n1
and a
n
to write a recursive
rule as follows: a
n
= a
n1
+29
Example B
Write a recursive rule for the sequence: 3, 9, 27, 81, . . .
Solution: In this sequence, each term is multiplied by 3 to get the next term. We can write a recursive rule:
a
n
= 3a
n1
Example C
Write a recursive rule for the sequence: 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, . . .
Solution: This is a special sequence called the Fibonacci sequence. In this sequence each term is the sum of the
previous two terms. We can write the recursive rule for this sequence as follows: a
n
= a
n2
+a
n1
.
Practice Exercises
Write the recursive rules for the following sequences.
1. 1, 2, 4, 8, . . .
2. 1, 2, 5, 8, . . .
3. 1, 2, 4, 7, . . .
314
Answers
1. In this sequence each term is double the previous term so the recursive rule is: a
n
= 2a
n1
2. This time three is subtracted each time to get the next term: a
n
= a
n1
3.
3. This one is a little trickier to express. Try looking at each term as shown below:
a
1
= 1
a
2
= a
1
+1
a
3
= a
2
+2
a
4
= a
3
+3
.
.
.
a
n
= a
n1
+(n1)
Video Overview for Arithmetic Sequences
MEDIA
Video Overview for Geometric Sequence
MEDIA
Homework
Describe the pattern and write a recursive rule for the following sequences.
1.
1
4
,
1
2
, 1, 2. . .
2. 5, 11, 17, 23, . . .
3. 33, 28, 23, 18, . . .
4. 1, 4, 16, 64, . . .
5. 21, 30, 39, 48, . . .
6. 100, 75, 50, 25, . . .
7. 243, 162, 108, 72, . . .
8. 128, 96, 72, 54, . . .
315
6.5. Describing the Pattern and Writing a Recursive Rule for a Sequence www.ck12.org
9. 1, 5, 10, 16, 23, . . .
10. 0, 2, 2, 4, 6, . . .
11. 3, 5, 8, 12, . . .
12. 0, 2, 6, 12, . . .
13. 4, 9, 14, 19, . . .
14.
1
2
,
2
3
,
3
4
,
4
5
. . .
15. 4, 5, 9, 14, 23, . . .
316
6.6
Linear, Exponential, andQuadratic Models
What You Will Learn
Identify functions using differences and ratios
Write equations for functions
Perform exponential and quadratic regressions with a graphing calculator
Solve real world problems by comparing function models
Introduction
In this course weve learned about three types of functions, linear, quadratic and exponential.
Linear functions take the form y = mx +b.
Quadratic functions take the form y = ax
2
+bx +c.
Exponential functions take the form y = a b
x
.
In real-world applications, the function that describes some physical situation is not given; it has to be found before
the problem can be solved. For example, scientic data such as observations of planetary motion are often collected
as a set of measurements given in a table. Part of the scientists job is to gure out which function best ts the data.
In this section, youll learn some methods that are used to identify which function describes the relationship between
the variables in a problem.
Identify Functions Using Differences or Ratios
One method for identifying functions is to look at the difference or the ratio of different values of the dependent
variable. For example, if the difference between values of the dependent variable is the same each time we
change the independent variable by the same amount, then the function is linear .
Example A
Determine if the function represented by the following table of values is linear.
TABLE 6.12:
x y
2 4
1 1
0 2
1 5
2 8
If we take the difference between consecutive yvalues, we see that each time the xvalue increases by one, the
yvalue always increases by 3.
Since the difference is always the same, the function is linear. This might remind you of the arithmetic sequence
317
6.6. Linear, Exponential, and Quadratic Models www.ck12.org
discussion we had earlier in this section, a linear function is always having the same value added to go from term to
term.
When we look at the difference of the yvalues, we have to make sure that we examine entries for which the
xvalues increase by the same amount.
For example, examine the values in this table:
TABLE 6.13:
x y
0 5
1 10
3 20
4 25
6 35
At rst glance this function might not look linear, because the difference in the yvalues is not always the same. But
if we look closer, we can see that when the yvalue increases by 10 instead of 5, its because the xvalue increased
by 2 instead of 1. Whenever the xvalue increases by the same amount, the yvalue does too, so the function is
linear.
Another way to think of this is in mathematical notation. We can say that a function is linear if
y
2
y
1
x
2
x
1
is always the
same for any two pairs of x and yvalues. Notice that the expression we used here is simply the denition of the
slope of a line.
Differences can also be used to identify quadratic functions. For a quadratic function, when we increase the
xvalues by the same amount, the difference between yvalues will not be the same. However, the difference
of the differences of the yvalues will be the same.
Here are some examples of quadratic relationships represented by tables of values:
In this quadratic function, y = x
2
, when we increase the xvalue by one, the value of y increases by different values.
However, it increases at a constant rate, so the difference of the difference is always 2.
318
In this quadratic function, y = 2x
2
3x +1, when we increase the xvalue by one, the value of y increases by
different values. However, the increase is constant: the difference of the difference is always 4.
To identify exponential functions, we use ratios instead of differences. If the ratio between values of the dependent
variable is the same each time we change the independent variable by the same amount, then the function is
exponential.
Example B
Determine if the function represented by each table of values is exponential.
a)
b)
319
a) If we take the ratio of consecutive yvalues, we see that each time the xvalue increases by one, the yvalue is
multiplied by 3. Since the ratio is always the same, the function is exponential.
b) If we take the ratio of consecutive yvalues, we see that each time the xvalue increases by one, the yvalue is
multiplied by
1
2
. Since the ratio is always the same, the function is exponential.
Write Equations for Functions
Once we identify which type of function ts the given values, we can write an equation for the function by starting
with the general form for that type of function. In this section, we will do this using algebra. It can be tricky to nd
the equation for a function by hand, in the next section, we will use the graphing calculator to nd the equations to
describe the functions.
Example C
Determine what type of function represents the values in the following table.
TABLE 6.14:
x y
0 5
1 1
2 -3
3 -7
4 -11
Solution
Lets rst check the difference of consecutive values of y.
320
If we take the difference between consecutive yvalues, we see that each time the xvalue increases by one, the
yvalue always decreases by 4. Since the difference is always the same, the function is linear.
To nd the equation for the function, we start with the general form of a linear function: y = mx +b. Since m is the
slope of the line, its also the quantity by which y increases every time the value of x increases by one. The constant
b is the value of the function when x = 0. Therefore, the function is y =4x +5.
Example D
TABLE 6.15:
x y
0 0
1 5
2 20
3 45
4 80
5 125
6 180
Solution
Here, the difference between consecutive yvalues isnt constant, so the function is not linear. Lets look at those
differences more closely.
TABLE 6.16:
x y
0 0
1 5 50 = 5
2 20 205 = 15
3 45 4520 = 25
4 80 8045 = 35
5 125 12580 = 45
321
x y
6 180 180125 = 55
When the xvalue increases by one, the difference between the yvalues increases by 10 every time. Since the
difference of the differences is constant, the function describing this set of values is quadratic.
To nd the equation for the function that represents these values, we start with the general form of a quadratic
function: y = ax
2
+bx +c.
We need to use the values in the table to nd the values of the constants: a, b and c.
The value of c represents the value of the function when x = 0, so c = 0.
Plug in the point (1, 5) : 5 = a+b
Plug in the point (2, 20) : 20 = 4a+2b 10 = 2a+b
To nd a and b, we solve the system of equations: 5 = a+b
10 = 2a+b
Solve the rst equation for b : 5 = a+b b = 5a
Plug the rst equation into the second: 10 = 2a+5a
Solve for a and b a = 5 and b = 0
Therefore the equation of the quadratic function is y = 5x
2
.
It can be difcult to nd the equation of the functions by hand, later on in this section, we will use the graphing
calculator to nd the equations that t experimental data
Example E
TABLE 6.17:
x y
0 400
1 500
2 25
3 6.25
4 1.5625
Solution
The differences between consecutive yvalues arent the same, and the differences between those differences arent
the same either. So lets check the ratios instead.
322
Each time the xvalue increases by one, the yvalue is multiplied by
1
4
. Since the ratio is always the same, the
function is exponential.
To nd the equation for the function that represents these values, we start with the general form of an exponential
function, y = a b
x
.
Here b is the ratio between the values of y each time x is increased by one. The constant a is the value of the function
when x = 0. Therefore, the function is y = 400
_
1
4
_
x
.
Perform exponential and quadratic regressions with a graphing calculator
Earlier, you learned how to perform linear regression with a graphing calculator to nd the equation of a straight line
that ts a linear data set. In this section, youll learn how to perform exponential and quadratic regression to nd
equations for curves that t non-linear data sets.
Example A
The following table shows how many miles per gallon a car gets at different speeds.
TABLE 6.18:
Speed (mph) Miles per gallon
30 18
35 20
40 23
45 25
50 28
55 30
60 29
65 25
70 25
Using a graphing calculator:
a) Draw the scatterplot of the data.
b) Find the quadratic function of best t.
323
c) Draw the quadratic function of best t on the scatterplot.
d) Find the speed that maximizes the miles per gallon.
e) Predict the miles per gallon of the car if you drive at a speed of 48 mph.
Solution
Step 1: Input the data.
Input the values of x in the rst column (L
1
) and the values of y in the second column (L
2
). ( Note: in order to clear
a list, move the cursor to the top so that L
1
or L
2
is highlighted. Then press [CLEAR] and then [ENTER].)
Step 2: Draw the scatterplot.
First press [Y=] and clear any function on the screen by pressing [CLEAR] when the old function is highlighted.
Press [STATPLOT] [STAT] and [Y=] and choose option 1.
Choose the ON option; after TYPE, choose the rst graph type (scatterplot) and make sure that the Xlist and Ylist
names match the names on top of the columns in the input table.
Press [GRAPH] and make sure that the window is set so you see all the points in the scatterplot. In this case, the
settings should be 30 x 80 and 0 y 40. You can set the window size by pressing the [WINDOW] key at the
top.
Step 3: Perform quadratic regression.
Press [STAT] and use the right arrow to choose [CALC].
Choose Option 5 (QuadReg) and press [ENTER]. You will see QuadReg on the screen.
Type in L
1
, L
2
after QuadReg and press [ENTER]. The calculator shows the quadratic function: y = 0.017x
2
+
1.9x 25
Step 4: Graph the function.
Press [Y=] and input the function you just found.
Press [GRAPH] and you will see the curve t drawn over the data points.
324
To nd the speed that maximizes the miles per gallon, use [TRACE] and move the cursor to the top of the parabola.
You can also use [CALC] [2nd] [TRACE] and option 4:Maximum, for a more accurate answer. The speed that
maximizes miles per gallon is 56 mph.
Finally, plug x = 48 into the equation you found: y =0.017(48)
2
+1.9(48) 25 = 27.032 miles per gallon.
Note: The image above shows our function plotted on the same graph as the data points from the table. One thing
that is clear from this graph is that predictions made with this function wont make sense for all values of x. For
example, if x < 15, this graph predicts that we will get negative mileage, which is impossible. Part of the skill of
using regression on your calculator is being aware of the strengths and limitations of this method of tting functions
to data.
Example B
The following table shows the amount of money an investor has in an account each year for 10 years.
TABLE 6.19:
Year Value of account
1996 $5000
1997 $5400
1998 $5800
1999 $6300
2000 $6800
2001 $7300
2002 $7900
2003 $8600
2004 $9300
2005 $10000
2006 $11000
Using a graphing calculator:
a) Draw a scatterplot of the value of the account as the dependent variable, and the number of years since 1996 as
the independent variable.
b) Find the exponential function that ts the data.
c) Draw the exponential function on the scatterplot.
d) What will be the value of the account in 2020?
Solution
1
2
).
First press [Y=] and clear any function on the screen.
Press [GRAPH] and choose Option 1.
Choose the ON option and make sure that the Xlist and Ylist names match the names on top of the columns in the
input table.
Press [GRAPH] make sure that the window is set so you see all the points in the scatterplot. In this case the settings
325
should be 0 x 10 and 0 y 11000.
Step 3: Perform exponential regression.
Press [STAT] and use the right arrow to choose [CALC].
Choose Option 0 and press [ENTER]. You will see ExpReg on the screen.
Press [ENTER]. The calculator shows the exponential function: y = 4975.7(1.08)
x
Step 4: Graph the function.
Press [Y=] and input the function you just found. Press [GRAPH].
Finally, plug x = 20201996 = 24 into the function: y = 4975.7(1.08)
24
= $31551.81
In 2020, the account will have a value of $31551.81.
Note: The function above is the curve that comes closest to all the data points. It wont return yvalues that are
exactly the same as in the data table, but they will be close. It is actually more accurate to use the curve t values
than the data points.
Example C
The following table shows the number of students enrolled in public elementary schools in the US (source: US
Census Bureau). Make a scatterplot with the number of students as the dependent variable, and the number of years
since 1990 as the independent variable. Find which curve ts this data the best and predict the school enrollment in
the year 2007.
TABLE 6.20:
Year Number of students (millions)
1990 26.6
1991 26.6
1992 27.1
1993 27.7
1994 28.1
1995 28.4
1996 28.1
1997 29.1
1998 29.3
2003 32.5
Solution
We need to perform linear, quadratic and exponential regression on this data set to see which function represents the
values in the table the best.
1
2
).
Set the window size: 0 x 10 and 20 y 40.
Here is the scatterplot:
326
Step 3: Perform Regression.
Linear Regression
The function of the line of best t is y = 0.51x +26.1. Here is the graph of the function on the scatterplot:
Quadratic Regression
The quadratic function of best t is y = 0.064x
2
.067x+26.84. Here is the graph of the function on the scatterplot:
327
Exponential Regression
The exponential function of best t is y = 26.2(1.018)
x
. Here is the graph of the function on the scatterplot:
From the graphs, it looks like the quadratic function is the best t for this data set. Well use this function to predict
school enrollment in 2007.
x = 20071990 = 17 so y = 0.064(17)
2
.067(17) +26.84 which is 44.2 million students.
Video Overview
328
MEDIA
Homework
Determine whether the data in the following tables can be represented by a linear function.
TABLE 6.21:
x y
4 10
-3 7
-2 4
-1 1
0 -2
1 -5
TABLE 6.22:
x y
2 4
-1 3
0 2
1 3
2 6
3 11
TABLE 6.23:
x y
0 50
1 75
2 100
3 125
4 150
5 175
Determine whether the data in the following tables can be represented by a quadratic function.
TABLE 6.24:
x y
10 10
-5 2.5
0 0
5 2.5
329
x y
10 10
15 22.5
TABLE 6.25:
x y
1 4
2 6
3 6
4 4
5 0
6 -6
TABLE 6.26:
x y
3 -27
-2 -8
-1 -1
0 0
1 1
2 8
3 27
Determine whether the data in the following tables can be represented by an exponential function.
TABLE 6.27:
x y
0 200
1 300
2 1800
3 8300
4 25800
5 62700
TABLE 6.28:
x y
0 120
1 180
2 270
3 405
4 607.5
5 911.25
330
TABLE 6.29:
x y
0 4000
1 2400
2 1440
3 864
4 518.4
5 311.04
Determine what type of function represents the values in the following tables and nd the equation of each function.
TABLE 6.30:
x y
0 400
1 500
2 625
3 781.25
4 976.5625
TABLE 6.31:
x y
9 -3
-7 -2
-5 -1
-3 0
-1 1
1 2
TABLE 6.32:
x y
3 14
-2 4
-1 -2
0 -4
1 -2
2 4
3 14
331
6.7. References www.ck12.org
6.7
References
1. . . CC BY-NC-SA
332
www.ck12.org Chapter 7. Appendix A - One Variable Statistics
CHAPTER
7
Appendix A - One Variable
Statistics
Chapter Outline
7.1 DOT PLOTS, FREQUENCY TABLES, HISTOGRAMS AND BAR GRAPHS
7.2 MEASURES OF CENTRAL TENDENCY (MEAN, MEDIAN AND MODE)
7.3 BOX AND WHISKER PLOTS
7.4 SHAPE, CENTER AND SPREAD
333
7.1. Dot Plots, Frequency Tables, Histograms and Bar Graphs www.ck12.org
7.1
Dot Plots, Frequency Tables, Histograms
andBar Graphs
What You Will Learn
Dot Plots
Frequency Tables
Histograms
Bar Graphs
Dot Plots
A dot plot consists of a horizontal scale (a number line) on which dots are placed to show the numerical values of
the data. If a data value repeats the dots are piled up at that location. One dot for each repitition. We say that the
dot plot displays the distribution of the data.
A dot plot is easier to look at compared to a long list of numbers. By examining the dot plot in the gray box, you can
see that the numbers 25 and 40 are repeated the most. You can see that the number 50 is repeated the least. Not only
that but you can count very easily how many times each number is repeated. A dot plot is a good way of organizing
numbers and values.
Here are two dot plots. Students were surveyed and asked what they thought their grade would be on a math
exam. The results of the survey are in green. Then the students took the math test and the scores were plotted on
the top graph in purple. The blue line is the halfway point between the scores. What conclusions can we make based
on looking at the two dot plots?
334
1. The students tended to think that they would score lower than they actually did.
2. Counting the dots, more people scored above 15, where in the survey, more students thought they would score
below 15.
3. In the survey, only 14 students thought they would score above 25. On the actual test, 24 people scored above
a 25.
4. On the actual math test, scores were spread out a lot more than in the survey scores.
These are only a few of the comparisons you could make by looking at the dot plots.
Example 1
The following tables show the number of cars sold each month in one year for two separate dealers. Create a dot
plot for each of the following tables of data using the same grid. Give three inferences based on the graphs and how
they overlap.
First we look at the lowest and highest number of cars sold for both because the graph must be able to handle
all data. The lowest number is 23 and the highest is 38. The horizontal axis is made to include 23 - 38. The
vertical axis is left to increase by 1s.
335
Plot the individual data points for each of the tables. Use two colors to represent the two dealers. Make sure
you use a key.
Three inferences based on the dot plots of both sets of data are:
1. Macs sold more cars than Sids.
2. Mac and Sid had three months where they sold the same amount of cars.
3. The maximum number of cars sold in one month by Sid was 35 and the maximum number of cars sold by Mac
was 38.
Create your own dot plots with the applet from http://www.shodor.org/interactivate/activities/PlopIt/ . Just enter
your data and see what the dot plot looks like.
Frequency Tables and Histograms
Frequency tables are a great way to record and organize data. Once you have created a frequency table, we can make
a histogram to present a visual display of the information in the frequency table.
A frequency table is created by making a table with three separate columns. One column is designated for intervals.
The amount of intervals is determined by the range in data values. If the range in data values is not that great, the
intervals will be small. If the range in data values is great, the intervals will be larger. It is important that the intervals
are of equal size and do not overlap.
Another column is created for tallied results. This is where you tally the number of times you see a data value from
each interval.
In the last column, add the tally marks to determine the frequency results.
Lets look at how we can apply this information.
The data below depicts the amount of time (in minutes) 20 middle school students spent on the computer each day.
Arrange the data on a frequency table.
336
10, 32, 8, 55, 5, 0, 30, 20, 25, 45, 40, 60, 45, 15, 5, 56, 47, 12, 15, 20
Step 1: Make a table with three separate columns.
Intervals
Tallied results
Frequency results
Step 2: Looking at the data, tally the number of times a data value occurs.
Step 3: Add the tally marks to record the frequency.
TABLE 7.1:
Number of Minutes on the Com-
puter
Tally Frequency
0 5 I I I 3
6 10 I I 2
11 15 I I I 3
16 20 I I 2
21 25 I 1
26 30 I 1
31 35 I 1
36 40 I 1
41 45 I I 2
46 50 I 1
51 55 I 1
56 60 I I 2
Now we can make a histogram from this data.
1. Draw the horizontal (x) and vertical (y) axis.
2. Give the graph the title Minutes Spent on the Computer.
3. Label the horizontal axis Minutes. List the intervals across the horizontal axis.
4. Title the vertical axis Frequency. Label the axis by halves (0.5).
5. For each interval on the horizontal access, draw a vertical column to the appropriate frequency value. Recall that
on a histogram, there are no spaces in between vertical columns.
337
Bar Graphs
Bar graphs are similar to histograms, except the entries on the x axis arent numbers, they are things. In this example,
the entries on the x axis will be the names of US presidents.
The data table below depicts the ages of twenty of our nations presidents at the time of Inauguration. Create a bar
graph to display the data.
338
To create a bar graph, rst draw a horizontal (x) and vertical (y) axis.
Label the horizontal axis with each presidents last name.
Label the vertical axis with intervals of two, beginning with the number thirty.
Next, draw a vertical column to the appropriate value for each president.
339
Examining data using bar graphs, histograms and frequency tables can help us to understand information in
a visual way. For people who learn in a visual way, using data displays is a great way to tackle such a task!
Now use this bar graph to answer the following questions about our presidents.
Example A
How many of our presidents were sixty-one years of age or older at the time of the Inauguration?
Solution: Seven presidents
Example B
What was the most popular age for a president at the time of the Inauguration?
Solution: Fifty-seven years old
Example C
What was the age of the youngest president? Who was it?
Solution: Forty-three years old, Kennedy
Video Overview of Dot Plots
340
MEDIA
Video Overview of Bar Graphs
MEDIA
Video Overview of Histograms
MEDIA
Homework
1. The heights of 20 basketball players, in inches are given below. Make a dot plot from this data.
68, 70, 70, 71, 75, 80, 81, 82, 84, 75, 75, 80, 75, 77, 75, 80, 83, 80, 71, 70
2. Create a histogram to display the data from the frequency table below.
TABLE 7.2: Monthly Internet Purchases
Data Values Tally Frequency
0 3 I I I 3
4 7 I I I I 4
8 11 I 1
12 15 I I 2
3. The data collected depicts the number of letters in the last names of twenty people. Create a frequency table to
display the data.
12 3 5 9 11 2 7 5 6 8 14 4 8 7 5 10 5 9 7 15
4. Create a histogram to display the data.
5. The data collected depicts the number of hours twelve families traveled this summer to their vacation destination.
341
Create a frequency table to display the data.
7 3 10 5 12 9 8 4 3 11 3 9
6. Create a histogram to display the data.
7. Write a few sentences to explain any conclusions that you can draw from the data.
Directions: Use the histogram from the Practice Exercise to answer the following questions.
8. How many students spend less than 30 minutes studying?
9. How many students spend greater than 60 minutes studying?
10. How many students spend greater than 90 minutes studying?
11. How many students spend between 2 and 2 1/2 hours studying?
12. If this histogram is the result of a survey,was the number of students surveyed greater than 100?
Directions: Use this bar graph to answer the following questions.
13. If each girl could only vote once, what was the total number of girls surveyed?
342
14. If each boy could only vote once, how many boys were surveyed?
15. What fraction of the girls surveyed chose track as their favorite sport?
16. What fraction of the girls surveyed chose soccer as their favorite sport?
17. What percentage of the girls surveyed chose track and soccer as their favorite sport? You may round to the
nearest whole percent.
18. What fraction of the boys chose football as their favorite sport?
19. How many boys and girls were surveyed in all?
20. True or false. Basketball is the least popular sport among girls.
21. True or false. It is also the least popular among boys.
22. What is the most popular sport among girls?
23. What is the least popular sport among boys?
343
7.2. Measures of Central Tendency (Mean, Median and Mode) www.ck12.org
7.2
Measures of Central Tendency (Mean, Me-
dianandMode)
What You Will Learn
Calculate the mode, median, and mean for a set of data
Understand the differences between each measure of center.
Mode, Mean, and Median
Mode
The mode is dened as the most frequently occurring number in a data set.
Example:
The students in a statistics class were asked to report the number of children that live in their house (including
brothers and sisters temporarily away at college). The data is recorded below:
1, 3, 4, 3, 1, 2, 2, 2, 1, 2, 2, 3, 4, 5, 1, 2, 3, 2, 1, 2, 3, 6
In this example, the mode could be a useful statistic that would tell us something about the families of statistics
students in our school. In this case, 2 is the mode as it is the most frequently occurring number of children in the
sample, telling us that a large number of students in our class have 2 children in their home.
Two Issues with the Mode
a. If there is more than one number that is the most frequent than the mode is usually both of those numbers. For
example, if there were seven 3child households and seven with 2 children, we would say that the mode is,
2 and 3. When data is described as being bimodal, it is clustered about two different modes. Technically, if
there were more than two, they would all be the mode. However, the more of them there are, the more trivial
the mode becomes. In those cases, we would most likely search for a different statistic to describe the center
of such data.
b. If each data value occurs an equal number of times, we usually say, There is no mode. Again, this is a case
where the mode is not at all useful in helping us to understand the behavior of the data.
Mean
You are probably comfortable calculating averages. The average is a measure of center that statisticians call the
mean. Most students learn early on in their studies that you calculate the mean by adding all of the numbers and
dividing by the number of numbers. While you are expected to be able to perform this calculation, most real data sets
that statisticians deal with are so large that they very rarely calculate a mean by hand. It is much more critical that
you understand why the mean is such an important measure of center. The mean is actually the numerical balancing
point of the data set. A certain math teacher might refer to the mean as being "the center of mass".
We can illustrate this physical interpretation of the mean. Below is a graph of the class data from the last example.
344
If you have snap cubes like you used to use in elementary school, you can make a physical model of the graph, using
one cube to represent each students family and a row of six cubes at the bottom to hold them together like this:
345
There are 22 students in this class and the total number of children in all of their houses is 55, so the mean of
this data is 55 22 = 2.5. Statisticians use the symbol X to represent the mean when X is the symbol for a single
measurement. It is pronounced x bar.
It turns out that the model that you created balances at 2.5. In the pictures below, you can see that a block placed at
3 causes the graph to tip left, and while one placed at 2 causes the graph to tip right. However, if you place the block
at about 2.5, it balances perfectly!
346
Median
The median is simply the middle number in a set of data. Think of 5 students seated in a row in statistics class:
Aliyah Bob Catalina David Elaine
Which student is sitting in the middle? If there were only four students, what would be the middle of the row? These
are the same issues you face when calculating the numeric middle of a data set using the median.
Lets say that Ron has taken ve quizzes in his statistics class and received the following grades:
80, 94, 75, 90, 96
Before nding the median, you must put the data in order. The median is the numeric middle. Placing the data in
order from least to greatest yields:
347
75, 80, 90, 94, 96
The middle number in this case is the third grade, or 90, so the median of this data is 90. Notice that just by
coincidence, this was also the third quiz that he took, but this will usually not be the case.
Of course, when there is an even number of numbers, there is no true value in the middle. In this case we take the
two middle numbers and nd their mean. If there are four students sitting in a row, the middle of the row is halfway
between the second and third students.
Example
Take Rhondas quiz grades:
91, 83, 97, 89
Place them in numeric order:
83, 89, 91, 97
The second and third numbers straddle the middle of this set. The mean of these two numbers is 90, so the median
of the data is 90.
Mean vs. Median
Both the mean and the median are important and widely used measures of center. So you might wonder why we
need them both. There is an important difference between them that can be explained by the following example.
Suppose there are 5 houses in a community with the following prices: $55,000 $58,000 $60,000 $61,000 $3,200,000. The
"median housing price" is far more useful in real estate because it tells us that half of the houses on the market are
less and half are more. The mean of this data set $686,000, and it is not at all descriptive of the market. The
important thing to understand is that extremely large or small values in a data set can have a large inuence on the
mean.
348
Video Overview of Mean, Median and Mode
MEDIA
Homework
1. In Lois 2nd grade class, all of the students are between 45 and 52 inches tall, except one boy, Lucas, who is
62 inches tall. Which of the following statements is true about the heights of all of the students?
a. The mean height and the median height are about the same
b. The mean height is greater than the median height.
c. The mean height is less than the median height.
d. More information is needed to answer this question.
e. None of the above is true.
2. Enrique has a 91, 87 and 95 for his statistics grades for the rst three quarters. His mean grade for the year
must be a 93 in order for him to be exempt from taking the nal exam. Assuming grades are rounded following
valid mathematical procedures, what is the lowest whole number grade he can get for the 4th quarter and still
be exempt from taking the exam?
3. The chart below shows the data from the Galapagos tortoise preservation program with just the number of
individual tortoises that were bred in captivity and reintroduced into their native habitat.
TABLE 7.3:
Island or Volcano Number of Individuals Repatriated
Wolf 40
Darwin 0
Alcedo 0
Sierra Negra 286
Cerro Azul 357
Santa Cruz 210
Espaola 1293
San Cristbal 55
Santiago 498
Pinzn 552
Pinta 0
Figure: Approximate Distribution of Giant Galapagos Tortoises in 2004 ("Estado Actual De Las Poblaciones de
Tortugas Terrestres Gigantes en las Islas Galpagos," Marquez, Wiedenfeld, Snell, Fritts, MacFarland, Tapia, y
Nanjoa, Scologia Aplicada, Vol. 3, Num. 1,2, pp. 98-11).
For this data, calculate each of the following:
(a) mode
349
(b) median
(c) mean
(d) upper and lower quartiles
350
7.3
Box andWhisker Plots
What You Will Learn
How to determine the quartiles of a data set
How to make a 5-number summary
How to make a box and whisker plot
In the last section, we saw how data could be organized by using a dot plot or a histogram. Another way to plot data
is by using a box and whisker plot (often called a box plot). Histograms and box and whisker plots can be used to
draw conclusions about a data set, we will learn more about drawing conclusions in the next section of the book.
A box and whisker plot (often called a box plot) involves plotting 5 specic values. The 5 specic values are often
referred to as a ve-number summary of the organized data set. The ve-number summary consists of the following:
1. The lowest number in the data set (minimum value)
2. The lower quartile: Q
1
(median of the rst half of the data set)
3. The median of the entire data set (median)
4. The upper quartile: Q
3
(median of the second half of the data set)
5. The highest number in the data set (maximum value)
The display of the ve-number summary produces a box and whisker plot as shown below:
The above model of a box-and-whisker plot shows 2 horizontal lines (the whiskers) that each contain 25% of the
data and are of the same length. In addition, it shows that the median of the data set is in the middle of the box,
which contains 50% of the data. The lengths of the whiskers and the location of the median with respect to the center
of the box are used to describe the distribution of the data. Its important to note that this is just an example. Not all
box-and-whisker plots have the median in the middle of the box and whiskers of the same size.
Making a Box and Whisker Plot from data
Here is a data set showing the number of hours that teenagers work in a part time job.
16, 10, 8, 8, 11, 11, 12, 15, 10, 20, 6, 16, 8
To work with this set of data, the rst thing that we need to do is to order it from least to greatest including any
repeated numbers.
6, 8, 8, 8, 10, 10, 11, 11, 12, 15, 16, 16, 20.
Now we will nd the numbers for the ve-number summary. The rst two numbers to nd are the minimum and
the maximum, they are 6 and 20.
351
7.3. Box and Whisker Plots www.ck12.org
Next, we nd the median. Remember that the median is the middle number in a set of data. Here there are 13
values. The median is 11.
Lastly, we need to nd the lower and upper quartiles. The quartiles divides the data set into four parts. With the
median, our data set is divided into two parts. The rst part is the rst half up to 10 and the second half starts at 11
and goes to 20.
Take a look.
6, 8, 8, 8, 10, 10, 11, 11, 12, 15, 16, 16, 20
The median of the rst half of the data is called the lower quartile (Q
1
). The median of the second half of the data
is called the upper quartile (Q
3
).
6, 8, 8, 8, 10, 10, 11, 11, 12, 15, 16, 16, 20
Q
1
is the average between 8 and 8. Q
1
is 8.
Q
3
is the average between 15 and 16. Q
3
is 15.5.
Here are the steps to drawing a box-and-whisker plot.
1. Draw a number line labeled to show the range of data from least to greatest.
2. Mark the median, the upper quartile, the lower quartile, the minimum and the maximum on the number line.
3. Draw in a box around the quartiles. The median is the middle line of the two boxes.
4. Then draw in the whiskers. These are lines that extend from each quartile to the upper and lower extremes.
Here is a picture of a number line with a completed box-and-whisker plot on it.
Now lets examine this plot. The rst box goes from the lower quartile 8 to the median 11. The second box goes
from the median 11 to the upper quartile 15.5. The whiskers extend out from the lower quartile to the minimum of
6, and from the upper quartile to the maximum of 20.
Now that you know how to draw a box-and-whisker plot and nd the median, quartiles and extremes of a set of data,
we can work the other way around. We can look at a box-and-whisker plot to identify the median, quartiles and
extremes.
We can use this chart to examine the data. The median divides the two boxes. The median here is 200. The lower
quartile is 100 and the upper quartile is 300. The minimum is 50 and the maximum is 400.
Guided Practice
a. For the following data sets, determine the ve-number summaries:
i. 12, 16, 36, 10, 31, 23, 58
ii. 144, 240, 153, 629, 540, 300
b. Use the data set for part i of the previous question and the ve-number summary to construct a box-and-whisker
plot to model the data set.
Answer:
352
a. i. The rst step is to organize the values in the data set as shown below:
12, 16, 36, 10, 31, 23, 58
10, 12, 16, 23, 31, 36, 58
Now complete the following list:
Minimum value 10
Q
1
12
Median 23
Q
3
36
Maximum value 58
ii. The rst step is to organize the values in the data set as shown below:
144, 240, 153, 629, 540, 300
144, 153, 240, 300, 540, 629
Now complete the following list:
Minimum value 144
Q
1
153
Median 270
Q
3
540
Maximum value 629
b. The ve-number summary can now be used to construct a box-and-whisker plot for part i. Be sure to provide a
scale on the number line that includes the range from the minimum value to the maximum value.
Minimum value 10
Q
1
12
353
7.3. Box and Whisker Plots www.ck12.org
Median 23
Q
3
36
Maximum value 58
Video Overview
MEDIA
Homework
Directions: For each set of data, nd the ve-number summary and draw a box and whisker plot.
(1) 12, 13, 15, 17, 21, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 31
(2) 26, 27, 29, 30, 32, 35, 41, 42, 44
(3) 100, 105, 107, 109.110, 120
(4) 87, 85, 89, 92, 94, 97, 102, 105, 105, 113, 108.
354
7.4
Shape, Center andSpread
What You Will Learn
How to determine the shape of a data set
Which measure of central tendency is best to use for a given data set?
Three ways to calculate the spread of a data set
Range
Interquartile Range
Standard Deviation
Which measure of spread is best to use for a given data set?
How to determine outliers
Shape
The shape of a data set refers to where the largest amount of the data occurs. If most of the data is in the middle of
the histogram, the data is symmetric
If the histogram has a "tail" going out to the right, the data is skewed to the right
If the histogram has a "tail" going out to the left, the data is skewed to the left
A box and whisker plot can also provide information about the shape of the data.
355
7.4. Shape, Center and Spread www.ck12.org
a. If the median is located in the center or near the center of the box, the distribution is approximately symmetric.
b. If the median is located to the left of the center of the box, the distribution is skewed to the right.
c. If the median is located to the right of the center of the box, the distribution is skewed to the left.
Information about the data set that can be determined from the box-and-whisker plot with respect to the length of
the whiskers includes the following:
a. If the whiskers are the same or almost the same length, the distribution is approximately symmetric.
b. If the right whisker is longer than the left whisker, the distribution is skewed to the right.
c. If the left whisker is longer than the right whisker, the distribution is skewed to the left.
Example A
For each box-and-whisker plot, list the ve-number summary and describe the distribution based on the location of
the median.
a. Minimum value 4
Q
1
6
Median 9
Q
3
10
Maximum value 12
The median of the data set is located to the right of the center of the box, which indicates that the distribution is
skewed to the left.
b. Minimum value 225
Q
1
250
Median 300
Q
3
325
Maximum value 350
356
The median of the data set is located to the right of the center of the box, which indicates that the distribution is
skewed to the left.
c. Minimum value 60
Q
1
70
Median 75
Q
3
95
Maximum value 100
The median of the data set is located to the left of the center of the box, which indicates that the distribution is
skewed to the right.
Example B
The numbers of square feet (in 100s) of 10 of the largest museums in the world are shown below:
650, 547, 204, 213, 343, 288, 222, 250, 287, 269
Construct a box-and-whisker plot for the above data set and describe the distribution.
The rst step is to organize the data values as follows:
20, 400 21, 300 22, 200 25, 000 26, 900 28, 700 28, 800 34, 300 54, 700 65, 000
Now calculate the median, Q
1
, and Q
3
.
20, 400 21, 300 22, 200 25, 000 26, 900 28, 700 28, 800 34, 300 54, 700 65, 000
Median
26, 900+28, 700
2
=
55, 600
2
= 27, 800
Q
1
= 22, 200
Q
3
= 34, 300
Next, complete the following list:
Minimum value 20, 400
Q
1
22, 200
Median 27, 800
Q
3
34, 300
Maximum value 65, 000
357
The right whisker is longer than the left whisker, which indicates that the distribution is skewed to the right.
Which Measure of Central Tendency to Use?
The position of the center of a data set can be described the mean, the median or the mode. The mean is usually
the best choice if the data is symmetric. If the data is skewed to the right or left, the median is usually best. A
few numbers that are unusually large or small can have a large effect on the mean and then it no longer describes a
typical number in the data set. The mode can be the best measure of central tendency if there is signicant repetition
in the data.
Example C
Find the mean, median, and mode of the salaries given below. Which measure of central tendency is the best to
describe this set of data? Justify your answer.
TABLE 7.4:
Professional Realm Annual income
Farming, Fishing, and Forestry $19,630
Sales and Related $28,920
Architecture and Engineering $56,330
Healthcare Practitioners $49,930
Legal $69,030
Teaching & Education $39,130
Construction $35,460
Professional Baseball Player* $2,476,590
(Source: Bureau of Labor Statistics, except (*) - The Baseball Players Association (playbpa.com)).
Mean (average):
x =
19, 630+28, 920+56, 330+49, 930+69, 030+39, 130+35, 460+2, 476, 590
8
x =
2, 774, 750
8
x = 346, 843.75
mean = 346, 843.75
Median (middle):
Arrange the salaries from least to greatest.
358
19, 630 /28, 920 /35, 460 /39, 130 /49, 930 /56, 330 /69, 030 /2, 476, 590
There is no middle value. Take the two closest to the middle and average them together.
39, 130+49, 930
2
median = 44, 530
Mode (most):
There is no value that occurs the most. Each salary occurs one time in the chart.
There is no mode.
The mean is $346,843.75. The median is $44,530. There is no mode.
The median is the best measure to describe the data. This is because there is such a wide range in the data.
The mean would make people think that any professional would make about $346,843.75. Most professionals
do not.
Spread
The spread of the data refers to how far apart all of the data is. The simplest measure of spread is the range. To
nd the range, just subtract the minimum value from the maximum value.
Example D
Find the range of the following data:
223, 121, 227, 433, 122, 193, 397, 276, 303, 199, 197, 265, 366, 401, 222
Solution
The rst thing to do in this case is to order the data, listing all values in ascending order:
121, 122, 193, 197, 199, 222, 223, 227, 265, 276, 303, 366, 397, 401, 433
Note: It is extremely important to make sure that you dont skip any values when you reorder the list. Two ways to
do this are (i) cross out the numbers in the original list as you write them in the second list, and (ii) count the number
of values in both lists when you are done. In this example, both lists contain 15 values, so we can be sure we didnt
miss any (as long as we didnt count any twice!)
The range is found by subtracting the lowest value from the highest: 433122 = 311.
Interquartile Range (IQR)
If you are told that you are between the 25th percent and 75th percent of your class in height, would you know how
to nd the other people that are in this range as well? In statistics this is called nding the interquartile range.
Inter is between, quartile is divided into 4 parts, range is the difference between the greatest and least data value. That
means that the interquartile range is the difference between the number at the 75th quartile and the number at the
359
25th quartile (like a mini range). Lets make this clear using the following set of random data. We have already
arranged the data from least to greatest.
Example E
To make our four groups we rst nd the median. Remember that the median is the middle number in the data. The
middle is also the 50
th
quartile. Think - 50% is half! Once we have the data split into two halves, we split those
halves in half. This will make 4 equal parts.
To nd the 1st quartile, we would average 22 and 24 to get 23. 23 is the 1st quartile.
To nd the 3rd quartile, we would average 41 and 45 to get 43. 43 is the 3rd quartile.
Now we can nd the interquartile range, it is the difference between 43 - 23 = 20.
Standard Deviation
The standard deviation is another measure of the spread of the data. It describes more exactly how all the data is
related to the mean. It is more complicated to calculate, though. Lets look at the following data values and learn
how to calculate the standard deviation:
11, 13, 14, 15, 19, 22, 24, 26
The mean of these values is 18; of course, the values all differ from 18 by varying amounts. Heres a list of the
values deviations from the mean:
-7, -5, -4, -3, 1, 4, 6, 8
If we take the mean of these deviations, we nd that it is zero:
7543+1+4+6+8
8
=
0
8
= 0
This comes as no surprise. You can see that some of the values are positive and some are negative, as the mean
lies somewhere near the middle of the range. You can use algebra to prove (try it!) that the sum of the deviations
will always be zero, no matter what numbers are in the list. So, the sum of the deviations is not a useful tool for
measuring variance.
But if we square the differences, all the negative differences become positive, and then we can tell how great the
average deviation is. If we do that for this data set, we get the following list:
49, 25, 16, 9, 1, 16, 36, 64
The sum of those squares is 216, so their average is
216
8
= 27.
We call this averaging of the square of the differences from the mean (the mean squared deviation) the variance.
The variance is a measure of the dispersion, and its value is lower for tightly grouped data than for widely spread
data. In the example above, the variance is 27. What exactly does that 27 refer to, though? Since it is the mean
of the squares of the deviation, it seems logical that taking its square root would be a better way to make sense of
it. This square root of the variance is called the standard deviation, and is given the symbol (lower case Greek
letter "s").
The standard deviation is often used to to nd values within a certain range of the mean. It works out that 68% of a
data set will be within one standard deviation of the mean, 95% will be within two standard deviations of the mean
and 99.7% will be within three standard deviations of the mean.
360
Example F
Suppose that the mean number of calories consumed by an adult in a particular country per day is 3,200, with a
standard deviation of 150 calories. Determine each of the following intervals and shade the area under a normal
distribution curve for each interval.
a. The values within 1 standard deviation of the mean
b. The values within 2 standard deviations of the mean
c. The values within 3 standard deviations of the mean
Answer:
a. The values within 1 standard deviation of the mean are from 3, 200150 calories to 3, 200+150 calories, or from
3,050 calories to 3,350 calories.
b. The values within 2 standard deviations of the mean are from 3, 200 (2 150) calories to 3, 200 + (2
150) calories, or from 2,900 calories to 3,500 calories.
c. The values within 3 standard deviations of the mean are from 3, 200 (3 150) calories to 3, 200 + (3
150) calories, or from 2,750 calories to 3,650 calories.
Which Measure of Spread to Use?
Standard deviation is designed to be used if the data is symmetric or normally distributed. If the data is skewed, the
points far out along the tail will affect the standard deviation and it is no longer representative of the "typical" spread
in the data. This is very similar to the way that skewed data can affect the mean. If there is signicant skew in the
361
data, it is better to use the interquartile range.
Outliers
Outliers are data points that are signicantly different from the rest of the data. An example of an outlier would
be the salary of a professional baseball player compared to a typical salary, as outlined in a previous example about
calculating the mean. Statisticians need a way to dene whether or not a number is an outlier. One method for
checking a data set for the presence of an outlier is to follow the procedure below.
1. Organize the given data set and determine the values of Q
1
and Q
3
.
2. Calculate the difference between Q
1
and Q
3
. and determine the interquartile range (IQR)
3. Multiply the difference by 1.5, subtract this result from Q
1
, and add it to Q
3
.
4. The results from Step 3 will be the range into which all values of the data set should t. Any values that are
below or above this range are considered outliers.
Example G
Using the procedure outlined above, check the following data sets for outliers:
a. 18, 20, 24, 21, 5, 23, 19, 22
b. 13, 15, 19, 14, 26, 17, 12, 42, 18
a. Organize the given data set as follows:
18, 20, 24, 21, 5, 23, 19, 22
5, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24
Determine the values for Q
1
and Q
3
.
5, 18, 19 , 20, 21, 22, 23 , 24
Q
1
=
18+19
2
=
37
2
= 18.5 Q
3
=
22+23
2
=
45
2
= 22.5
Calculate the difference between Q
1
and Q
3
: Q
3
Q
1
= 22.518.5 = 4.0.
Multiply this difference by 1.5: (4.0)(1.5) = 6.0.
Finally, compute the range.
Q
1
6.0 = 18.56.0 = 12.5
Q
3
+6.0 = 22.5+6.0 = 28.5
.
362
Are there any data values below 12.5? Yes, the value of 5 is below 12.5 and is, therefore, an outlier.
Are there any values above 28.5? No, there are no values above 28.5.
b. Organize the given data set as follows:
13, 15, 19, 14, 26, 17, 12, 42, 18
12, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 26, 42
Determine the values for Q
1
and Q
3
.
12, 13, 14 , 15, 17 , 18, 19, 26 , 42
Q
1
=
13+14
2
=
27
2
= 13.5 Q
3
=
19+26
2
=
45
2
= 22.5
Calculate the difference between Q
1
and Q
3
: Q
3
Q
1
= 22.513.5 = 9.0.
Multiply this difference by 1.5: (9.0)(1.5) = 13.5.
Finally, compute the range.
Q
1
13.5 = 13.513.5 = 0
Q
3
+13.5 = 22.5+13.5 = 36.0
Are there any data values below 0? No, there are no values below 0.
Are there any values above 36.0? Yes, the value of 42 is above 36.0 and is, therefore, an outlier.
Video Overview of Range and Standard Deviation
MEDIA
Homework
For each of the following box-and-whisker plots, list the ve-number summary and comment on the distribution of
the data:
363
1.
2.
3. The following data represents the number of coins that 12 randomly selected people had in their piggy banks:
35 58 29 44 104 39 72 34 50 41 64 54
a. Construct a histogram for this data. Is it skewed? If so, in what direction?
b. Which measure of spread is better to use for this data?
c. Calculate the best measure of spread.
4. The following data represent the time (in minutes) that each of 20 people waited in line at a local book store to
purchase the latest Harry Potter book:
15 8 5 10 14 17 21 23 6 19 31 34 30 31
3 22 17 25 5 16
a. Contruct a box plot for this data
b. Which measure of spread is better to use for this data?
c. Calculate the best measure of spread.
5. Firmans Fitness Factory is a new gym that offers reasonably-priced family packages. The following table
represents the number of family packages sold during the opening month:
24 21 31 28 29
27 22 27 30 32
26 35 24 22 34
30 28 24 32 27
32 28 27 32 23
20 32 28 32 34
Construct a box-and-whisker plot for the data. Are the data symmetric or skewed?
Find the range, IQR and standard deviation for the following sets of data
6.
TABLE 7.5:
34 25 16 43
12 34 39 45
65 13 45 67
34 41 30 15
7.
364
TABLE 7.6:
2 5 9
5 7 3
7 9 1
Using the procedure outlined in this concept, check the following data sets for outliers:
8. 25, 33, 55, 32, 17, 19, 15, 18, 21
9. 149, 123, 126, 122, 129, 120
365

Algebra 1 EHS 2014-2015, No Stats

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Algebra 1 EHS 2014-2015, No Stats

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Algebra 1 - Essex High School

Lea Ann Smith

3x +4 = 5x Subtract 3x from both sides.

+5x Add 5x to both sides.

14x +40y =18

x 1 This is not a polynomial because is has a square root.

81 = 9 means the positive square root of 81.

81 =9 means the negative square root of 81.

81 =9 means the positive or negative square root of 81.

5, we can use estimation.

5 < 3. Because 5 is closer to 4 than 9, the decimal is a low value:

5 is considered a like term. Using the rule above:

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen